Academic Progress Tracking for Every Student with Vedantu's Improvement Promise

Academic Progress for every Student
Regular tests &

assignments
VEDANTU
IMPROVEMENT Report card with
PROMISE detailed analysis
VIP
Parent-teacher
meetings
Our Extraordinary Results 2021

Our Students
5.2X
HIGHER
Our Students
Our Students
3.8X
6.6X
HIGHER
All India HIGHER

All India All India
37.28% 37.28% 8.25%

9.84% 9.84% 1.25%
CBSE 10 CBSE 12 JEE

student scoring above 90% student scoring above 90% Advanced
SCAN CODE
to know more
about VIP
Published by
Vedantu Innovations Pvt. Ltd.
D. No. 1081, 3rd Floor, Vistar Arcade,
14th Main Rd, Sector 3, HSR Layout
Bangalore, Karnataka, India 560 102
www.vedantu.com
All rights reserved. No part of this book may be reproduced or utilized in any form or by any
means, electronic or mechanical, including photocopying, recording, or by any information
storage and retrieval system, without permission in writing from the publishers.
Notice: Vedantu is committed to serving students with the best resources and knowledge.
Bearing that in mind, we have obtained all the information in this book from sources regarded
as reliable, and taken utmost care in editing and printing this book. However, as authors and
publishers, we are not to be held responsible for unintentional mistakes that might have crept
in. Having stated that, errors (if any) brought to our notice shall be gratefully acknowledged
and rectified in upcoming editions.
Printed by
Softberry Technology Pvt. Ltd
2nd Floor, above PNB, Scheme No 140
Indore, Madhya Pradesh - 452016
https://www.softberry.in
How to use your
Tatva Practice Book
1
8. Quantization of charge
When a physical quantity can
have only discrete values rather
than any value, the quantity is
said to be quantised. The
smallest charge that can exist in Scan the QR Code in each
nature is the charge of an chapter’s theory section to
electron.
view micro concept videos
related to the chapter, on
SCAN CODE the Vedantu app
Electrostatics
Exercise - 2:
2
Solve all types of
1. The rate constant for a first
order reaction is 4.606 ×
10–3s–1. The time required to
reduce 2.0g of the reactant to
0.2g is:
exercise questions (JEE 2020)
based on the latest JEE
pattern. (a) 500s (b) 1000s
(c) 100s (d) 200s
Answer Key
3
CHAPTER-1: ELECTROSTATICS
For extra exam
Exercise-1: Basic Objective preparation content,
visit the Vedantu app.
Scan the QR code in the You can find previous
Answers Section to view years’ JEE papers with
detailed solutions for all solutions and detailed
exercise questions. analysis.
Founder’s Message
Dear Student,
I am delighted to present to you a Ready Reckoner and an amazing book to guide you for your
exams-‘TATVA’. Tatva—which means the ‘Core’ is fully aligned with the culture, the mission, and the
vision of Vedantu and therefore it gives me immense pleasure and joy to share this book with you. We
at Vedantu have always believed in revolutionizing the teaching and learning process and always
speedily progressed in the direction of bringing superior quality education and content to your table.
Tatva is a step forward in this direction. This book is your guide, your practice guru, and your
companion in moving towards your dreams. The book is a result of the consistent effort, diligence, and
research by our experienced team of subject experts and teachers.
This book has been customized with curated content to suit the needs of JEE aspirants like you and
guide you on the right path to cracking JEE and optimizing your efficiency. Tatva is a comprehensive
amalgamation of important concepts, theories, derivations, definitions, solved examples, concept
videos, practice questions, and important questions. We have ensured that high-quality content and
the right ingredients are in place in this booklet to help you climb up the success ladder.
A few guiding points to optimally use Tatva with a planned approach:
Tatva equips you with Theory, Concept Videos, and Solved examples to help you revise concepts,
mark your notes, walk you through the entire summary, and eventually makes you capable of
clearing all your conceptual doubts all by yourself.
We suggest revision of theory followed by practice of solved examples.
Practice relevant questions daily after finishing Vedantu lectures and session assignments. We
believe that a daily dose of Tatva will keep all your exam blues at bay.
Use the Tatva booklet to mark notes so that it always comes in handy for last-minute revision
sessions before your exams. Notes should include key points of theory, solved examples, and some
questions which you couldn't solve in the first attempt.
Exercise 1 and Exercise 2 of JEE Tatva deal with basic questions and those which can be asked or
already asked in JEE Main. Similarly, Exercise 3 and Exercise 4 deal with JEE Advanced level
questions. We recommend you solve basic JEE Main questions before moving to JEE Advanced
level questions.
Before wrapping up, the practice mantra: “Don't practice until you get it right. Practice until you
can't get it wrong.”
We strongly believe in you and your capabilities. So believe in yourself

because success is only one step away. Wishing that your talent shines
bright. All the very best!
Anand Prakash
Founder and Academic Head, Vedantu
Anand Prakash Sir has been a pioneer in producing Top Ranks in JEE/NEET
and Olympiads. He has personally taught and mentored AIR 1, 6, 7 (JEE
Advanced), AIR-1, 7, 9(AIIMS), and thousands of more students who have
successfully cleared these competitive exams in the last few years.
Credits
“Happiness lies in the joy of achievement
and the thrill of creative effort.”
—Franklin D. Roosevelt
Tatva is the brainchild of a group of creative Vedans who have strived tirelessly to weave success stories for you.
We extend our heartfelt gratitude to the superb team of Vedans who give wings to the vision of Vedantu,
starting with our leaders who have been guiding and encouraging us at every step of the way:
Vamsi Krishna Sir, Anand Prakash Sir and Pulkit Jain Sir
We thank our leaders for their insight and mentorship. They steered the project in the right direction and were
instrumental in making Tatva a reality:
Sahil Bhatia, Sudhanshu Jain, Shubam Gupta, Ajay Mittal, Arshad Shahid, Jaideep Sontakke
The managers who embodied every aspect of what Tatva aimed to accomplish and brought their ideas and
diligence to the table to execute this vision immaculately:
Harish Rao, Neha Surana, Charubak Chakrabarti, Prashant Palande
Physics Team
We truly appreciate all the Master Teachers of Vedantu whose relentless efforts helped us translate this vision
into reality. Our heartfelt gratitude to our creative content developers and the typesetting team, who have put
in their hard work, insight, and eagerness to nurture and execute Tatva into ‘your ready handbook’ and bring a
positive learning experience to you.
Teachers Subject Matter Experts
Shreyas Hebbare Mohit Singla Atul Singh (Team Lead) Rohit Thakur
Typesetting Team Graphic Designers

Jitender Nathu Singh Vishwanath G Mohit Kamboj
We cannot thank the creative team enough. Their creative minds and contagious energy have added a visual
flair, truly making Tatva the treasure trove of knowledge that it is.
Kajal Nilanjan Chowdhury Rabin Jacob Mohit Kamboj
Kiran Gopal Balaji Sakamuri Thamam Mubarish Haritha Ranchith
Sarib Mohammad
We thank and appreciate the enthusiastic support provided by Arunima Kar, Savin Khandelwal, and Dipshi
Shetty.
The journey of bringing Tatva to life, from an idea to the book you are holding, would not have been possible
without the extensive support of our diligent Operations Team, our amazing Academic Team, our dedicated
team of Teachers, and our talented Tech Team.
TABLE OF CONTENTS
ELECTROSTATICS
Theory ................................................................................................................................................ 8
Solved examples ............................................................................................................................... 38
Exercise - 1 : Basic Objective Questions............................................................................................ 50
Exercise - 2 : Previous Years JEE MAIN Questions ........................................................................... 58
Exercise - 3 : Advanced Objective Questions .................................................................................. 69
Exercise - 4 : Previous Years JEE Advanced Questions ..................................................................... 76
Answer Key ........................................................................................................................................ 202
CAPACITANCE
Theory ................................................................................................................................................ 86
Solved examples ............................................................................................................................... 102
Answer Key ........................................................................................................................................ 205

CURRENT ELECTRICITY
Theory ................................................................................................................................................ 128
Solved examples ............................................................................................................................... 156
Answer Key ........................................................................................................................................ 207

ELECTROSTATICS
SCAN CODE
ELECTROSTATICS
Chapter 01 9
ELECTROSTATICS
ELECTROSTATICS
1. ELECTRIC CHARGE
1.1 Definition
(v) Charge is conserved: Charge can neither be
Charge is the property associated with matter due to which it
produces and experiences electrical and magnetic effects. created nor be destroyed.
1.2 Type (vi) Invariance of charge: The numerical value of an

There exists two types of charges in nature
elementary charge is independent of velocity.
(i) Positive charge
(vii) Charge produces electric field and magnetic field:
(ii) Negative charge
Charges with the same electrical sign repel each other, A charged particle at rest produces only electric
and charges with opposite electrical sign attract each
field in the space surrounding it. However, if the
other.
charged
particle is in non accelerated motion it produces both

Fig 1.1
electric and magnetic fields. And if the motion of
1.3 Unit and Dimensional Formula
S.I. unit of charge is coulomb (C), charged particle is accelerated it not only produces
1mC  10 3

C, 1C  106 C, 1nC  109 C electric and magnetic fields but also radiates energy in
C.G.S. unit of charge is e.s.u. 1C = 3 × 109 e.s.u. the space surrounding the charge in the form of
Dimensional formula [Q] = [AT]. electromagnetic waves.

1.4 Point Charge
(viii) Quantization of charge: When a physical quantity can
Whose spatial size is negligible as compared to other
have only discrete values rather than any value, the
distances.
(i) Charge is a Scalar Quantity: Charges can be quantity is said to be quantized. The smallest charge
added or subtracted algebraically.
that can exist in nature is the charge of an electron. If
(ii) Charge is transferable: If a charged body is
put in contact with an uncharged body, uncharged  
the charge of an electron "e"  1.6 1019 C is taken
body becomes charged due to transfer of electrons from
as elementary unit i.e. quanta of charge the charge on
one body to the other.
(iii) Charge is always associated with mass, any body will be some integral multiple of e i.e., Q = ±
(iv) i.e., charge can not exist without mass though mass ne with n = 0, 1, 2, 3 ...... Charge on a body can never
can exist without charge
be 0.5 e, ±17.2 e or ± 10–5 e etc.
SCAN CODE
ELECTROSTATICS
10
ELECTROSTATICS
1.6 Comparison of Charge and Mass charged while the silk becomes negatively charged.
We are familiar with role of mass in gravitation, and we However, ebonite on rubbing with wool becomes
have just studied some features of electric charge. We negatively charged making the wool positively charged.
can compare the two as shown below: Clouds also become charged by friction. In charging by
friction in accordance with conservation of charge, both
Charge Mass
positive and negative charges in equal amounts appear
1. Electric charge can be Mass of a body is a simultaneously due to transfer of electrons from one
positive, negative or body to the other.

positive quantity.
zero. (ii) By electrostatic induction: If a charged body is
brought near an uncharged body, the charged body will
2. Charge carried by a Mass of a body increases
attract opposite charge and repel similar charge present
body does not depend with its velocity as
in the uncharged body. As a result of this one side of
upon velocity of the
m0 neutral body (closer to charged body) becomes
body. m
1   2 / c2 oppositely charged while the other is similarly charged.
This process is called electrostatic induction.
where c is velocity of light
in vacuum, m is the mass of
the velocity  and m0 is rest
mass of the body.
3. Charge is quantized. The quantization of mass is

yet to be established.
4. Electric charge is Mass is not conserved as

always conserved. mass can be converted into
energy.
5. Force between charges The gravitational force

can be attractive or between two masses is
Fig 1.2
repulsive, as charges always attractive.
are unlike or like NOTE:
charges. Inducting body neither gains nor loses charge.
1.7 Methods of Charging (iii) Charging by conduction: Charging by conduction
A body can be charged by following methods: involves the contact of a charged object to a neutral
(i) By friction: In friction when two bodies are rubbed object. Hence when an uncharged conductor is brought
together, electrons are transferred from one body to the in contact with a charged conductor, charge is shared
other. As a result of this one body becomes positively between the two conductors and hence the uncharged
charged while the other negatively charged, e.g., when a conductor gets charged.
glass rod is rubbed with silk, the rod becomes positively
SCAN CODE
ELECTROSTATICS
11
ELECTROSTATICS
NOTE: (1) Uncharged electroscope
Inducting body neither gains nor loses charge.
A truck carrying explosives has a metal chain touching

the ground, to conduct away the charge produced by
friction.
Fig 1.4
(2) Charged electroscope
Fig 1.3 Fig 1.5

1.8 Electroscope
It is a simple apparatus with which the presence of electric 2. COULOMB’S LAW
charge on a body is detected (see figure). When metal knob
If two stationary and point charges Q1 and Q2 are kept at a
is touched with a charged body, some charge is transferred
distance r, then it is found that force of attraction or
to the gold leaves, which then diverges due to repulsion. The
repulsion between them is proportional to the product of the
separation gives a rough idea of the amount of charge on the
two charges and inversely proportional to the square of the
body. If a charged body is brought near a charged
distance between them. Mathematically, Coulomb’s law can
electroscope the leaves will also diverge as the charge on
q1q 2
body is similar to that on electroscope and will usually be written as F  k where k is a proportionality
r2
converge if opposite. If the induction effect is strong
constant.
enough, leaves after converging may again diverge.
In case of uncharged electroscope, if the charged body is In S.I units k has the value,
brought is contact, the electroscope gets charged and the k = 8.988 × 109 N m2/C2  9.0 × 109 N m2/C2
leaves diverge. when a charged body is brought near
electroscope (but not is contact), different charges appear on
different parts of electroscope (as shown in figure). resulting
in divergence of leaves. Fig 1.6
SCAN CODE
ELECTROSTATICS
12
ELECTROSTATICS
(a) The direction of force is always along the line joining the Fair 1 Q1Q 2
Fm   .
two charges. K 40K r 2
(b) The force is repulsive if the charges have the same sign
0 K  0r  
and attractive if their signs are opposite.
(c) This force is conservative in nature. Medium K
(d) This is also called inverse square law.
Vacuum/air 1
2.1 Variation of k Water 80
Constant k depends upon system of units and medium
Mica 6
between the two charges.
Glass 5-10
2.1.1 Effect of Units Metal 

kQ1Q 2
(a) In C.G.S. for air k = 1, F  Dyne 2.2 Vector form of Coulomb’s Law
r2
(b) In S.I. for air It is helpful to adopt a convention for subscript notation.
1 N  m2 1 Q1Q2 F12 = force on 1 due to 2 F21 = force on 2 due to 1

k  9 109 , F .
4 0 C 2 40 r2 
Suppose the position vectors of two charges q1 and q2 are r1
Newton (1 Newton = 105 Dyne) 
and r2 , then, electric force on charge q1 due to charge q2 is,
NOTE:  1 q1q 2  
F12   r1  r2 
40 r1  r2 3
Absolute permittivity of air or free space
12 C2 Farad  Similarly, electric force on q2 due to charge q1 is

= 8.85 10  2 .
Nm  m 
Dimension is  M 1L3 T 4 A 2 
2.1.2 Effect of Medium

(a) When a dielectric medium is completely filled in
between charges rearrangement of the charges inside
the dielectric medium takes place and the force between
the same two charges, decreases by a factor of K known
as dielectric constant. K is also called relative
Fig 1.8
permittivity r of the medium (relative means with
respect to free space). Force is a vector, so in vector form the Coulomb’s law is
written as
 1 q1q 2  
F21   r2  r1 
40 r2  r1 3
Fig 1.7
Hence in the presence of medium
SCAN CODE
ELECTROSTATICS
13
ELECTROSTATICS
Fig 1.9 Fig 1.10

where r̂12 is a unit vector directed toward q1 from q2. The magnitude of the resultant of two electric force is given
rˆ12   rˆ21 by F  F12  F22  2F1F2 cos  and the force direction is
F2 sin 
 1 q1 q 2 given by tan  
F12  rˆ12 F1  F2 cos 
4  0 r 2
 1 q 1q 2 1 q 2 q1
F12  rˆ12    rˆ21 
4  0 r 2 4  0 r 2
1 q 2 q1 
 r̂21   F21
4  0 r 2
Fig 1.11
3. ELECTRIC FIELD
A positive charge or a negative charge is said to create its

Remember convention for r̂ .
field around itself. Thus space around a charge in which
Here q1 and q2 are to be substituted with sign. another charged particle experiences a force is said to have
 electrical field in it.
Position vector of charges q1 and q2 are r1  x1î  y1ˆj  z1kˆ

 3.1 Electric Field Intensity ( E )
and r2  x 2 î  y 2 ˆj  z 2 kˆ respectively, where (x1, y1, z1) and
The electric field intensity at any point is defined as the
(x2, y2, z2) are the co-ordinates of charges q1 and q2. force experienced by a unit positive charge placed at that

 F
2.3 Principle of Superposition point. E 
q0
According to the principle of superposition, total force
acting on a given charge due to number of charges is the
vector sum of the individual forces acting on that charge due
to all the charges. Fig 1.12
Consider number of charge Q1, Q2, Q3…are applying force Where q0  0 so that presence of this charge may not
on a charge Q Net force on Q will be affect the source charge Q and its electric field is not
     changed, therefore expression for electric field intensity can
Fnet  F1  F2  .........  Fn 1  Fn 
 F
be better written as E  lim
q 0 q0
0
SCAN CODE
ELECTROSTATICS
14
ELECTROSTATICS
 Unit and Dimensional formula: Its S.I. unit – 3.4 Point Charge
Newton volt Joule Point charge produces its electric field at a point P which is
  and
coulomb meter coulomb  meter
distance r from it given by
C.G.S. unit = Dyne/stat coulomb.
Q
EP  (Magnitude)
Dimension: [E] = [MLT–3 A–1] 40 r 2
 Direction of electric field: Electric field (intensity)

E is a vector quantity. Electric field due to appositive
charge is always away from the charge and that due to Fig. 1.16
a negative charge is always towards the charge  For + ve point charge, E is directed away from it.
 For – ve point charge, E is directed towards it.
3.5 Continuous Charge Distributions

Fig. 1.13 There are infinite number of ways in which we can spread a
3.2 Relation between Electric Force continuous charge distribution over a region of space.
and Electric Field
 Mainly three types of charge distributions will be used. We
In an electric field E a charge (Q) experiences a force define three different charge densities.
 
F  Q E . If charge is positive then force is directed in the
Symbol Definition SI units
direction of field while if charge is negative force acts on it
in the opposite direction of field (lambda)  = Charge per unit length C/m
(sigma)  = Charge per unit area C/m2
Fig 1.14 (rho)  = Charge per unit volume C/m3
3.3 Superposition of Electric Field

If a total charge q is distributed along a line of length , over
The resultant electric field at any point is equal to the vector
a surface area A or throughout a volume V, we can calculate
sum of electric fields at that point due to various charges.
    charge densities from.
E  E1  E 2  E 3  ...
The magnitude of the resultant of two electric fields are q q q
 ,  , 
given by  A V
Fig 1.15
E  E12  E22  2E1E2 cos  and the direction is given by
E 2 sin 
tan  
E1  E 2 cos 
SCAN CODE
ELECTROSTATICS
15
ELECTROSTATICS
3.5.1 Electric Field Strength at a General Point Due kQ 1 kQ

  cos 12

Ex   dEx 
Lr  2
sin  d  
Lr
to a Uniformly Charged Rod
kQ
P   cos 2  cos 1 
Lr
Similarly, electric field strength at point P due to dq
1  in y–direction is
2
dE y  dE cos 
r kQdx
= × cos 

L r 2  x2 
Again we have x = r tan and dx = r sec2d. Thus
O
L kQ r sec2  kQ
Fig. 1.17 we have dEy = cos  × d =
L 2 2 Lr
r sec 
dEcos dE Net electric field strength at P due to dq in y–
direction is
1
dEsin kQ
P Ey  dE y =
Lr  cos  d 
 2
r kQ kQ
=   sin 

1
= sin 1  sin 2 
Lr 2 Lr
Thus electric field at a general point in the
dx surrounding of a uniformly charged rod which
x
Fig. 1.18 subtend angles 1 and 2 at the two corners of rod
As shown in figure, if P is any general point in the can be given as
surrounding of rod, to find electric field strength at P,
kQ
we consider an element on rod of length dx at a
in x–direction : Ex  cos 2  cos 1  and in y–
Lr
distance x from point O as shown in figure. Now if kQ
dE be the electric field at P due to the element, then
direction E y   sin 1  sin 2 
Lr
kdq Q
dE = Here dq = = dx
x  r 
2 2
L 3.5.2 Electric Field Strength Due to a Charged
Circular arc at its Centre
Electric field strength in x–direction due to dq at P is
Figure shows a circular arc of radius R which subtend
 kdq  kQ sin 
dEx = dE sin =  2 2 
= dx
 x  r  L  x  r 
2 2 an angle  at its centre. To find electric field strength
at C, we consider a polar segment on arc of angular
Here we have x = r tan  and dx = r secd
width dθ at an angle θ from the angular bisector XY as
Thus,
shown.
kQ r sec 2  d  kQ
dEx  sin  = sin  d 
L r sec 
2 2
Lr
Net electric field strength due to dq at point P in x–
direction is
SCAN CODE
ELECTROSTATICS
16
ELECTROSTATICS
x
Rd 3.6 Properties of Electric Field Lines
++++++++++  Electric field lines originate from a positive charge &
++++
+
+++ terminate on a negative charge.
+
+
++
d
++
++

+
++
R Fig 1.20

C  The number of field lines originating/terminating on a
dEsin charge is proportional to the magnitude of the charge.
 
dE dEcos
Y
Fig. 1.19
The length of elemental segment is Rd, the charge
Q
on this element d is dq =   .d 
 Fig 1.21
Due to this d, electric field at centre of arc C is
 The number of Field Lines passing through
kdq
given as dE  perpendicular unit area will be proportional to the
R2
Now electric field component due to this segment magnitude of Electric Field there.
dEsin which is perpendicular to the angular bisector  Tangent to a Field line at any point gives the direction
gets cancelled out in integration and net electric field of electric field at that point. This will be
at centre will be along angular bisector which can be instantaneous path charge will take if kept there.
calculated by integrating dEcos within limits from

 
– to .
2 2
Hence net electric field strength at centre C is
EC   dE cos 
  /2   /2 Fig 1.22
kQ kQ
  2
cos d  
R 2  /2
 cos d   Two or more field lines can never intersect each other.
 /2 R
[Net electric field cannot have multiple directions].
kQ  /2 kQ   
 sin /2  2 
sin  sin   Uniform field lines are straight, parallel & uniformly
R 2 R 2 2
placed

2kQ sin  
2  Field lines cannot form a loop.

2
R
SCAN CODE
ELECTROSTATICS
17
ELECTROSTATICS
4. ELECTRIC FLUX 4.2 Unit and Dimension

Flux is a scalar quantity.
4.1 Definition N.m 2
S.I. unit: (volt × m) or
Electric flux is measure of the field lines crossing a surface. C
3 –3 –1
N It’s Dimensional formula: (ML T A )
It is scalar quantity with S.I unit -m2 or V-m
C 4.3 Types of Flux
“The number of field lines passing through perpendicular For a closed body outward flux is taken to be positive, while
unit area will be proportional to the magnitude of Electric inward flux is taken to be negative.
N
Field there” (Theory of Field Lines)  E  N  EA
A
 Electric Flux,  A   EA 
Fig 1.25
5. GAUSS’S LAW
Fig 1.23
5.1 Definition
As  increases, flux through area A decreases. If we draw a
According to Gauss’s law, total electric flux through a
vector of magnitude A along the positive normal, it is called
1
 closed surface enclosing a charge is times the magnitude
the area vector, A corresponding to the area A. 0
1
of the charge enclosed. i.e.  net  (Qenc.)
0
  Q en
i.e. .  E .dA  0
NOTE:
Gauss’s law is only applicable for a closed surface.
5.2 Gaussian Surface

Fig 1.24
The closed surface on which Gauss law is applicable is
 
 Electric Flux,  A  EA cos   E . A defined as a Gaussian surface.
(Assuming Electric Field is uniform over whole area) NOTE:

 
For variable area d  E.dA Gaussian surface can be of any shape & size, only
condition is that it should be closed.
NOTE:
 Gaussian surface is hypothetical in nature. It
If Electric field is not constant over the area of
  does not have a physical existence.
cross section, then    E .dA
SCAN CODE
ELECTROSTATICS
18
ELECTROSTATICS
5.3 Deriving Gauss’s Law from Coulomb’s Law
Fig 1.28
 
net   E.dA   E dA  E  dA  E 4r 2  
Fig 1.26
Lets take a spherical gaussian surface with charge ‘+Q’ kept Qenclosed = q
at the centre.
q q
We know field lines for a +ve charge are always radially Thus, E  4 r 2   or E 
  0 4  0 r 2
outward. Angle between dA & E is zero.
From the definition of the electric field, the force on a point
charge q0 located at a distance r from the charge q is F = q0E.
Therefore, which is Coulomb’s law.
6. APPLICATIONS OF GAUSS’S LAW

Fig 1.27
Using Gauss’s law to derive ‘E’ due to various charge
kQ Q
E 2  distributions.
r 4  0 r 2
  Q 6.1 Electric Field due to a Line Charge

Net flux   E.dA   dA
4 0 r 2 Consider an infinite line which has a linear charge density .
Q Q Q Using Gauss’s law, let us find the electric field at a distance

4  0 r 2  dA  4 
0 r 2
. 4 r 2 
0 ‘r’ from the line charge.
Hence Net flux = Q/0. The cylindrical symmetry tells us that the field strength will
be the same at all points at a fixed distance r from the line.
NOTE: Thus, if the charges are positive. The field lines are directed
Although we derived gauss law for a spherical radially outwards, perpendicular to the line charge.
surface it is valid for any shape of Gaussian surface
and for any charge kept anywhere inside the surface
5.4 Coulomb’s Law From Gauss’s Law

We choose an imaginary sphere (Gaussian surface) of radius
r centred on the charge +q. Due to symmetry, E must have
the same magnitude at any point on the surface, and
 
E points radially outward, parallel to dA .Hence we write
the integral in Gauss’s law as
Fig 1.29
SCAN CODE
ELECTROSTATICS
19
ELECTROSTATICS
The appropriate choice of Gaussian surface is a cylinder of 

 Or EA  EA  0 
A
or E
radius r and length L. On the flat end faces, S2 and S3, E is 0 2 0

perpendicular dS , which means flux is zero on them. On
    NOTE:
the curved surface S1, E is parallel to dS , so that E .dS =
We see that the field is uniform and does not depend
EdS. The charge enclosed by the cylinder is Q = L. on the distance from the charge sheet. This is true as
Applying Gauss’s law to the curved surface, we have long as the sheet is large as compared to its distance
L  2k from P.
E  dS  E  2rL   or E 
0 20 r r
NOTE: 6.3 Uniform Spherical Charge Distribution

6.3.1 Outside the Sphere
This is the field at a distance r from the line. It is
directed away from the line if the charge is positive P is a point outside the sphere at a distance r from the centre.
and towards the line if the charge is negative,
6.2 Electric Field due to a Plane Sheet of Charge
Fig. 1.31
According to Gauss law,
  Q
Fig 1.30
 E .ds   or E  4r   Q
2
0 0
Consider a large plane sheet of charge with surface charge
Electric field at P (Outside sphere)
density (charge per unit area) . We have to find the electric
field E at a point P in front of the sheet. 1 Q R 2 Q   A 
E out  .   
40 r 2 0 r 2    4R 
2
NOTE:
If the charge is positive, the field is away from the
plane 6.3.2 At the Surface of Sphere
At surface r = R
To calculate the field E at P. Choose a cylinder of area of 1 Q 
So, E s  . 2 
cross-section A through the point P as the Gaussian surface. 4 0 R 0
The flux due to the electric field of the plane sheet of charge
passes only through the two circular caps of the cylinder. 6.3.3 Inside the Sphere
  Inside the conducting charged sphere electric field is zero
According to Gauss law  E . dS  q in / 0
and potential remains constant everywhere and equals to the
      A potential at the surface. Ein = 0

I circular
E.dS  
II circular
E.dS  
cylindrical
E.dS 
0
surface surface surface
SCAN CODE
ELECTROSTATICS
20
ELECTROSTATICS
Graphical variation of electric field with distance 6.4.2 At the Surface of Sphere
At surface r = R
1 Q R
Es  . 
4  0 R 2 3 0
6.4.3 Inside the Sphere
At a distance r from the centre. (r  R)
  q in Qr 3 Qr 3
 E in .ds  
0 0 R 3
E in4 r 2


0 R 3
or
1 Qr r
E in  .  E in  r
Fig 1.32 4 0 R 3 3 0
6.4 Uniform Spherical Volume Charge Distribution

We consider a spherical uniformly charge distribution of
radius R in which total charge Q is uniformly distributed
throughout the volume. The charge density
total ch arg e Q 3Q
  
total volume 4 R 3 4R 3
3
Fig 1.34
Graphical variation of electric field with distance
Fig 1.33
6.4.1 Outside the Sphere at P (r > R)
According to Gauss’s law
  Q Q
 E .ds   
or E 4r 2   0
0
Fig 1.35
1 Q
E out  .
4 0 r 2
Q R 3
using   Eout 
4 3 30 r 2
R
3
SCAN CODE
ELECTROSTATICS
21
ELECTROSTATICS
Electric Field Due to Various Uniform Charge Distribution

(i) At the centre of circular are
kQ sin   / 2 
E
R2  / 2
(ii) At the axis of ring
kQx
E=
R 
1/ 2
2
+ x2
(iii) At the axis of disc
 
2kQ  x 
E = 2 1–
 
 
3/2
R  R  x2
2
 
(iv) Hollow sphere

For x < R
E=0
For x  R
kQ
E
x2
SCAN CODE
ELECTROSTATICS
22
ELECTROSTATICS
(v) Non conducting solid sphere For x < R

kQx
E
R3
For x  R
kQ
E
x2
(vi) Infinite thin sheet 

E
2 0
(vii) Infinite wire 2k

E
x
SCAN CODE
ELECTROSTATICS
23
ELECTROSTATICS
The potential energy depends essentially on the separation

7. ELECTRIC POTENTIAL ENERGY between the charges and is independent of the spatial
location of the charged particles.
7.1 Potential Energy of 2 Charges System
Above Equation gives the electric potential energy of a pair
It is always change in potential energy that is defined as of charges.
U = – Wconservative force = – WCoulomb force
NOTE:
Potential energy is defined for a system of charges in a
Electric potential energy is a scalar quantity so
particular configuration.
in the above formula take sign of Q1 and Q2.
Consider a system of two charges q1 and q2. Suppose, the
charge q1 is fixed and the charge q2 is taken from a point A 7.2 Electron Volt (eV)
to B. It is the practical unit of energy used in atomic and nuclear
physics. As electron volt is defined as “the energy acquired
by a particle having one quantum of charge i.e., when
accelerated by 1volt” i.e.
1J
1eV  1.6 1019 C   1.6 1019 J  1.6 1012 erg
C
7.3 Potential Energy of a System of n Charges
Fig 1.36 In a system of n charges electric potential energy is
The electric force on the charge q2 is calculated for each pair and then all energies so obtained are
 added algebraically. i.e.

qq
F  1 2 2 rˆ
40 r 1  Q1Q 2 Q 2 Q3 
U    ...........
40  r12 r23 
The total work done as the charge q2 moves from A to B is
r
2
q1q 2 q1q 2 1 1 8. ELECTRIC POTENTIAL
W  40 r 2
dr 
40
  
 r1 r2 
r
1 Suppose, a test charge q is moved in an electric field from a
The change in potential energy U(r2) – U(r1) is, therefore, point A to a point B while all the other charges in question
remain fixed. If the electric potential energy changes by UB
q q 1 1
U  r2   U  r1    W  1 2    – UA due to this displacement, we define the potential
40  r2 r1 
difference between the point A and the point B as
As the potential energy of the two-charge system is assumed
to be zero when they have infinite separation.
The potential energy when the separation is r is
q1 q 2  1 1  q 1q 2
U(r) = U(r) – U()    
4  0  r   4  0 r
Fig 1.37
SCAN CODE
ELECTROSTATICS
24
ELECTROSTATICS
U U  UA Wext NOTE:
V  i.e. VB  VA  B   KE  0
q q q At the centre of two equal and opposite charge
Conversely, if a charge q is taken through a potential V = 0 but E  0.

difference VB – VA, the electric potential energy is increased  At the centre of the line joining two equal and
by UB – UA = q(VB – VA). similar charge V  0, E = 0.
Also Wext = q(VB – VA)[KE = 0]  If left free to move,

 Positive charge will always move from higher to
Potential difference between two points give us an idea
lower potential points.
about work which has to be done in moving a charge
 Negative charge will always move from lower to
between those points.
higher potential points.
8.1 Electric Potential due to a Point Charge
(Because this motion will decrease potential energy of a
Consider a point charge Q placed at a point A. system)
The potential at P is,
9. RELATION BETWEEN ELECTRIC FIELD &

POTENTIAL
Fig 1.38 In an electric field rate of change of potential with distance

is known as potential gradient. It is a vector quantity and it’s
( V is taken as 0)
direction is opposite to that of electric field. Potential
The electric potential due to a system of charges may be
gradient relates with electric field according to the following
obtained by finding potentials due to the individual charges
dV
using equation and then adding them. Thus, relation E   ; This relation gives another unit of
dr
1 Qi
V
4  0
 ri electric field is
volt
. In the above relation negative sign
meter
Electric potential is a scalar quantity, hence sign of charges indicates that in the direction of electric field potential
is to taken in expression decreases.
Electric potential is denoted by V
8.2 Unit and Dimensional Formula
Joule
S.I. unit =  volt
Coulomb
[V] = [ML2T–3A–1]
8.3 Types of Electric Potential

According to the nature of charge potential is of two types
(i) Positive potential : Due to positive charge.

Fig 1.39
(ii) Negative potential : Due to negative charge.
SCAN CODE
ELECTROSTATICS
25
ELECTROSTATICS
In space around a charge distribution we can also


write E  E x î  E y ˆj  E z kˆ
where E x   V , E y   V and E z   V
x y z
Suppose A, B and C are three points in an uniform electric

field as shown in below figure.
(i) Potential difference between point A and B is
B  
V B  VA    E . dr Fig 1.41
A
Since displacement is in the direction of electric field, hence


 = 0o (if E = constant)
Fig 1.42
Fig 1.40  For a uniform electric field, the equipotential surfaces
B B
are a family of plane perpendicular to the field lines.
So, V B  VA    E . dr cos 0    E . dr  Ed  A metallic surface of any shape is an equipotential
A A
surface e.g. When a charge is given to a metallic
9.1 Equipotential Surface or Lines
surface, it distributes itself in a manner such that its
 If every point of a surface is at same potential, then it
every point comes at same potential even if the object
is said to be an equipotential surface. Regarding
is of irregular shape and has sharp points on it.
equipotential surface following points should be kept
in mind :
 The direction of electric field is perpendicular to the
equipotential surfaces or lines.
 The equipotential surfaces produced by a point charge
or a spherical charge distribution are a family of
concentric spheres.
Fig 1.43
 Equipotential surfaces can never cross each other.
SCAN CODE
ELECTROSTATICS
26
ELECTROSTATICS
Electric Potential due to Various Charge Configurations

(i) Point charge kQ
VP 
r
(ii) At the centre of circular are kQ

VP 
R
(iii) At the axis of the ring kQ

VP 
R2  x2
 
(iv) At the axis of Disc 2kQ
VP  R2  x2  x
R2
(v) Hollow sphere or conducting solid sphere (i) For x R
kQ
VP 
R
(ii) For x = R
kQ
VP 
R
(ii) For x  R
kQ
VP 
x
SCAN CODE
ELECTROSTATICS
27
ELECTROSTATICS
(vi) Uniformly charged non-conducting solid (i) For x < R

sphere
kQ
3 
VP  3R 2  x 2 
2R
(ii) For x = R
kQ
VP 
R
(iii) For > R
kQ
VP 
x
SCAN CODE
ELECTROSTATICS
28
ELECTROSTATICS
k( q) k( q)
VP  
10. ELECTRIC DIPOLE AP BP
r >> d (distance ‘r’ is large as compared to d);
10.1 General information
AP  OP BP  OP
System of two equal and opposite charges separated by a
small fixed distance is called a dipole. rd rd
OP  O P 
2 cos  2 cos 
 Dipole axis: Line joining negative charge to positive
charge of a dipole is called its axis. It may also be k( q) k(  q)
termed as its longitudinal axis. Vp  
(r  d / 2 cos ) (r  d / 2 cos )
 Equatorial axis: Perpendicular bisector of the dipole
is called its equatorial or transverse axis as it is  1 1 
 k( q)   .
perpendicular to length.  r  d / 2 cos  r  d / 2 cos  
 Dipole length: The distance between two charges is
known as dipole length (d)  
 Dipole moment: It is a quantity which gives  r  d / 2 cos   r  d / 2 cos  
 kq  
information about the strength of dipole. It is a vector  2 d2 2 
 r  cos  
quantity and is directed from negative charge to 4

positive charge along the axis. It is denoted as p and
is defined as the product of the magnitude of either of kq d cos 

  d2

the charge and the dipole length. i.e. p  q d r2 
4
cos 2 
Its S.I. unit is coulomb-metre another units is Debye (1

k(qd) cos  kp cos 
Debye = 3.3 × 10–30 C × m) and its dimensions are M0L1T1A1. Vp    p  qd .
d2 d2
r 2  cos 2  r  cos 2 
2
4 4
NOTE:
 A region surrounding a stationary electric kpcos  1 p cos 
since r >> d Vp   .
dipole has electric field only. r 2
40 r 2
 When a dielectric is placed in an electric field, its
atoms or molecules are considered as tiny dipoles  is angle with the axis of dipole ; r is distance from centre
and potential due to an electric dipole of dipole.
(a) Electric Potential due to a dipole (b) Electric Field due to dipole
(i) For points on the axis
Let the point P be at distance r from the centre of the dipole
on the side of the charge q, as shown in fig (a). Then
q
E q   pˆ
40 (r  a) 2
where p̂ is the unit vector along the dipole axis (from –q to
q
q). Also E  q  pˆ
4 0 (r  a) 2
SCAN CODE
ELECTROSTATICS
29
ELECTROSTATICS
The directions of E+q and E–q are as shown in fig. (b).

Clearly, the components normal to the dipole axis cancel
away. The components along the dipole axis add up. The
total electric field is opposite to p̂ . We have
Fig 1.44
The total field at P is 2qa
E = – (E+q + E–q) cos p̂   p̂
4 0 (r 2  a 2 )3/2
q  1 1 
E  E  q  E q     pˆ
40  (r  a) 2 (r  a)2  At large distances (r >> a), this reduces to
2qa
q 4a r E pˆ (r >> a)...(ii)
 p̂ 40 r 3
40 (r  a 2 ) 2
2
From Eqs. (i) and (ii), it is clear that the dipole field at large
For r > > a
distances does not involve q and a separately ; it depends on
2kp
E (r >> a) ...(i) the product qa. In terms of p, the electric field of a dipole at
r3
large distances takes simple forms :
(ii) For points on the equatorial plane At a point on the dipole axis
The magnitudes of the electric fields due to the two 2p 2kp
E
3
  r  a 
charges + q and –q are given by 40 r r3
q 1 At a point on the equatorial plane
Eq 
4  0 r 2  a 2
p kp
E  (r  a)
q 1 40 r 3
r3
E q  and are equal.
4 0 r 2  a 2
Electric field due to an electric dipole
y
Enet
Er
E

O

x
-q +q
Fig 1.46
Figure shows an electric dipole placed on x–axis at origin.

Here we wish to find the electric field and potential at a
Fig 1.45 point O having coordinates (r, θ). Due to the positive charge
(b) a point on the equatorial plane of the dipole. p is the of dipole electric field at O is in radially outward direction
dipole moment vector of magnitude p = q × 2a and and due to the negative charge it is radially inward as shown
directed from –q to q. in figure.
SCAN CODE
ELECTROSTATICS
30
ELECTROSTATICS
V 2kp cos  (ii) Work: From the above discussion it is clear that in
Er  
r r3 an uniform electric field dipole tries to align itself in
1 V kp sin  the direction of electric field (i.e. equilibrium

and E   
r  r3 position). To change it’s angular position some work
has to be done.
Thus net electric field at point O,
Suppose an electric dipole is kept in an uniform
kp
Enet  E  E  3 1  3cos 2 
2
r
2
 electric field by making an angle 1 with the field, if
r
If the direction of Enet is at an angle α from radial it is again turn so that it makes an angle 2 with the
E  1  field, work done in this process is given by the

direction, then α = tan–1   tan  
Er  2  formula
Thus the inclination of net electric field at point O is

(θ + α)
10.2 Electric Dipole in Uniform Electric Field

(i) Force and Torque: If a dipole is placed in a

uniform field such that dipole (i.e. p ) makes an
angle  with direction of field, then two equal and

Fig 1.48
opposite force act on dipole and constitute a couple
W  pE  cos 1  cos 2 
whose tendency is to rotate the dipole. Hence a
Potential energy: In case of a dipole (in a uniform
torque is developed in it and dipole tries to align it
field), potential energy of dipole is defined as work
self in the direction of field. Consider an electric
done in rotating a dipole from a direction
dipole in placed in a uniform electric field such that
 perpendicular to the field to the given direction i.e. if
dipole (i.e. p ) makes an angle  with the direction
1 = 90o and 2 =  then
of electric field as shown
Fig 1.49
Fig 1.47
W = U = U – U 90° = – pE cos 
(a) Net force on electric dipole Fnet  0
 U = – pE cos
  

(b) Torque   pE sin    p  E 
SCAN CODE
ELECTROSTATICS
31
ELECTROSTATICS
[U (90°) = 0]  The charge kept in the material of a conductor will

come to its outermost surface.
 
or U  p.E We know electric field at all points inside the material
of a conductor is zero. This means ‘E’ at all points on
  pEsin
the Gaussian surface is zero.
For small oscillations,   pE
∴ Time period of small oscillations
I
T = 2π
pE
(I = moment of inertia)
11. CONDUCTORS AND ITS PROPERTIES Fig 1.50

  Q en
11. 1 Properties of Conductors  E.dA  0  E  0  Qen  0
 Inside a conductor, electrostatic field is zero Charge cannot remain inside so it comes outside
dotted surface.
Consider a conductor, neutral or charged. There may
also be an external electrostatic field. In the static
situation the electric field is zero everywhere inside the
conductor. As long as electric field is not zero, the free
charge carriers would experience force and drift. In the
static situation, the free charges have so distributed Fig 1.51
themselves that the electric field is zero everywhere  Electrostatic potential is constant throughout the
inside. Electrostatic field is zero inside a conductor. volume of the conductor and has the same value (as
 At the surface of a charged conductor, electrostatic inside) on its surface
field must be normal to the surface at every point This follows from results 1 and 2 above. Since E = 0
inside the conductor and has no tangential component
If E were not normal to the surface, it would have
on the surface, no work is done in moving a small test
some non-zero component along the surface. Free
charge within the conductor and on its surface. That is,
charges on the surface of the conductor would then
there is no potential difference between any two points
experience force and move. In the static situation,
inside or on the surface of the conductor. Hence, the
therefore, E should have no tangential component.
result. If the conductor is charged, electric field normal
Thus electrostatic field at the surface of a charged
to the surface exists; this means potential will be
conductor must be normal to the surface at every point.
different for the surface and a point just outside the
(For a conductor without any surface charge density,
surface.
field is zero even at the surface).
In a system of conductors of arbitrary size, shape and
charge configuration, each conductor is characterized
by a constant value of potential, but this constant may
differ from one conductor to the other.
SCAN CODE
ELECTROSTATICS
32
ELECTROSTATICS
 Electric field at the surface of a charged conductor

E nˆ
0
where  is the surface charge density and n̂ is a unit

vector normal to the surface in the outward direction.
For  > 0, electric field is normal to the surface

outward ; for  < 0, electric field is normal to the
surface inward. Fig 1.54
kQ1 k   Q1  k  Q1  Q 2 
Va   
r1 r2 r2
kQ1 k  Q1  k  Q1  Q 2 
Vb   
r2 r2 r2
11.3 Cases of Earthing a Conductor
Fig 1.52
11.2 Cases of Concentric Shells Initially

Fig 1.55
 Firstly do charge distribution before earthing.

 After charge distribution, assume some ‘x’ charge
flown to ground (after earthing).
 Do re-distribution of charge.
 Take a point on the conductor (which is earthed) & do
net potential of it equals 0. Calculate x.
Fig 1.53
Fig 1.56
SCAN CODE
ELECTROSTATICS
33
ELECTROSTATICS
kQ1 k   Q1  k  Q1  Q2  x  Some other important results for a closed conductor:

VP  0    (i) f a charge q is kept in the cavity then –q will be
r2 r2 r2
 x=Q1 + Q2 induced on the inner surface and +q will be induced on
the outer surface of the conductor (it can be proved
using gauss theorem)
Fig 1.57
Charge is flown from outer surface because as long as Q1
remains on inner shell, ‘– Q1’ will be induced on inner shell.
Fig 1.59
(ii) If a charge q is kept inside the cavity of a conductor

and conductor is given a charge Q then –q charge
will be induced on inner surface and total charge on
the outer surface will be q + Q. (it can be proved
using gauss theorem)
+q+Q
–q
q
Fig 1.60
Fig 1.58
(iii) Resultant field, due to q (which is inside the cavity)
k  Q1  x  k    Q1  x   k  Q1  Q2  x 
VP  0    and induced charge on S1, at any point outside S1 (like
r1 r2 r2
B,C) is zero. Resultant field due to q + Q on S2 and
Q  x  Q1  x  Q1  Q2  x any other charge outside S2 , at any point inside of
 1   0
r1 r2 r2 surface S2 (like A, B) is zero
Q1 Q2 x r S2
    x  Q1  Q2 1  .B .C
r1 r2 r1 r2
S1
.q q+Q
NOTE: .A
–q
As it can be seen not all charge on the surface flows to
ground. When the outermost conductor is earthed then
the charge residing on the outermost surface of outer
conductor will flow to ground.
Fig 1.61
SCAN CODE
ELECTROSTATICS
34
ELECTROSTATICS
(iv) Resultant field in a charge free cavity in a closed (C)

S2
conductor is zero. There can be charges outside the
conductor and on  surface also. Then also this
result is true. No charge will be induced on the inner
q
most surface of the conductor. S1 •
C
charge is at the centre of S2

No (S2  spherical)
charge
Fig 1.65
Fig 1.62 (D)

(v) Charge distribution for different types of cavities in
S2
conductors
(A)
S2
S1 •
C •q
S1
q
•C
charge is not at the centre of S2
(S2   spherical)
charge is at the common centre

Fig 1.66
(S1, S2  spherical)
(E)
Fig 1.63
S2
(B)
S2
S1
•q ·q
S1 •C C
charge is not at the common centre charge is at the centre of

(S1, S2  spherical) S1 (Spherical)
Fig 1.67
Fig 1.64
SCAN CODE
ELECTROSTATICS
35
ELECTROSTATICS
(F)
S2
C
S1 • •q
charge not at the centre

of S1(Spherical)
Fig 1.68 Fig 1.70

Using the result that Eres in the conducting material Final charges
should be zero and using result (iii) We can show that
Case A B C
S1 Uniform Non uniform Non uniform
S2 Uniform Uniform Uniform
Fig 1.71
Case D E F
S1 Non uniform Uniform Non uniform  Q  Q2 
Final common potential = k .  1 
 r1  r2 
S2 Uniform Non uniform Non uniform
Note : In all cases charge on inner surface S1 = – q and

on outer surface S2 = q. The distribution of charge on
S1 will not change even if some charges are kept
outside the conductor (i.e. outside the surface S2). But
the charge distribution on S2 may change if some
charges(s) is/are kept outside the conductor.
Fig 1.72
11.4 Connection of Charged Conductor VP = V R
k  Q1  x  k   Q1  x  k  Q1  Q 2 
Steps VP   
 Do charge distribution before connection. r1 r2 r2
 Assume ‘x’charge flows from one conductor to another. k  Q1  x  k   Q1  x  k  Q1  Q2 
 Do redistribution of charges.  VR   
r2 r2 r2
 Equate net potential of conductor (1) with the net
potential of conductor (2). VP = V R
k  Q1  x  k  Q1  x  1 1 
    Q1  x      0
r1 r2  r1 r2 
 x = Q1
This indicates that all the charge on shell (1) will flow to
Fig 1.69 shell (2).
Assumption: Distance between them is very large.
SCAN CODE
ELECTROSTATICS
36
ELECTROSTATICS
12. Self-Energy of Charged Sphere

Consider a uniformly charged sphere of radius R having a
total charge Q. The electric potential energy of this sphere
is equal to the work done in bringing the charges from
infinity to assemble the sphere.
Fig 1.75

E
0
Net electric field at point P, near a conducting surface,
having surface charge distribution ‘’ is given by [/0].
Fig 1.73
13.2 Parallel Plate Theory
3Q 2
U To find charge distribution on each surface of plates
200 R
Fig 1.76
Fig 1.74
Two conducting plates having area ‘A’ (area is large as
Q2 compared to distance, so that field is uniform) and the
U
8 0 R thickness of plates is small so that charge only appears on
parallel faces.
The energy stored per unit volume around a point in an
U 1
electric field is given by u e    0 E 2 . If in place
Volume 2
of vacuum some medium of dielectric constant K is present
1
then u e  K0 E 2 .
2
13. PLATE THEORY
13.1 Charged Conducting Plate

Fig 1.77
Q r 2
Net Flux  en  Since the field lines are parallel, the net flux through the
0 0 gaussian surface will be zero, surface (1) & (2) be inside the
r 2 material of the conductor.
(cylindrical Gaussian surface) Er 2 
0
SCAN CODE
ELECTROSTATICS
37
ELECTROSTATICS
Hence it can be said that net charge enclosed will be zero 13. FORCE ON A CHARGED CONDUCTOR
which implies the charges appearing on the facing surfaces
are equal & opposite to each other. To find force on a charged conductor (due to repulsion of
like charges) imagine a small part XY to be cut and just
separated from the rest of the conductor MLN. The field in
the cavity due to the rest of the conductor is E2, while field
due to small part is E1. Then
Fig 1.78
Net electric field at any point ‘P’ or ‘R’ has to be zero.
(Enet)P = 0
Fig 1.80
There are 4 distributions, the net field at P should be zero.
Inside the conductor
 Q  q
 EP 1     1     E P 2  q    E = E1 – E2 = 0 or E1 = E2
2 0 2A0 2A0

Outside the conductor E  E1  E 2  .
q Q q 0
 E P 3      E P 4  2   
2A0 2A 0 
Thus, E1  E2 
2 0
  E P 1   E P 3   E P 2   E P 4
To find force, imagine charged part XY (having charge
Q1  q q q Q q dA placed in the cavity MN having field E2). Thus force
This shows    2
2A 0 2A 0 2A 0 2A 0 2
dF = (dA)E2 or dF  dA . The force per unit area or
2 0
Q1  Q2
q so final distributions would be dF  2
2 electric pressure is P   (Electrostatic pressure)
dA 2 0
2
The force is always outwards as (+) is positive i.e.,
whether charged positively or negatively, this force will try
to expand the charged body.
Fig 1.79
NOTE:
When charged conducting plates are placed parallel to
each other, the two outermost surfaces get equal
charges and the facing surfaces get equal and opposite
charges
SCAN CODE
ELECTROSTATICS
ELECTROSTATICS 38
SOLVED EXAMPLES
Example - 1
Example -2
A particle of mass m and charge (–q) enters the
Three equal charges each +Q, placed at the corners of
region between the two charged plates initially,
an equilateral triangle of side a. What will be the
moving along X-axis with speed vx as shown in fig.
force on any charge ?  k  1 
The length of each plate is L and a uniform electric  40 
2 2
field E is maintained between the plates. Show that (a) kQ (b) 2 kQ
a2 a2
the vertical deflection of the particle at the far edge
(c) 2 kQ 2 (d) 3 kQ 2
2
a2 a2
of the plate is. qEL .
2mv 2x Ans. (d)
Sol. Suppose net force is to be calculated on the charge
which is kept at A. Two charges kept at B and C are
applying force on that particular charge, with
directions as shown in the figure.
Sol. Force on particle towards upper plate B, Fy = qE
vertical acceleration of particle,
qE
ay 
m
Initial vertical velocity voy = 0
Speed of particle along X-axis = vx (constant) Q2

Since Fb  Fc  F  k
a2
Time taken by particle between the plates, t  L So, Fnet  FB2  FC2  2 FB FC cos 60
vx
3 kQ2
Fnet  3 F 
From relation s= ut+ 1 at 2 , vertical deflection a2
2
Example - 3
2
1 1  qE   L  A spherical conducting shell of inner radius r1, and
y  0  ayt2  0     outer radius r2 has a charge ‘Q’. A charge ‘q’ is
2 2  m   vx 
placed at the centre of the shell.
(a) What is the surface charge density on the
qEL2
 y (i) inner surface (ii) outer surface of the shell ?
2mv 2x
(b) Write expression for the electric field at a point x
> r2 from the centre of the shell.
ELECTROSTATICS 39
Ans. (a) Sol. Given qA = 2.5 × 10–7 C, qB = – 2.5 × 10–7 C

Sol. Charge Q resides on the outer surface of the 2l = AB = 30 cm = 0.30 m
spherical conducting shell. Due to charge q Total charge of the system q = qA + qB
placed at centre, charge induced on the inner q = 2.5 × 10–7 C – 2.5 × 10–7 C q=0
surface is –q and on the outer surface it is +q. So,  
Electric dipole moment p  q.2l ,
total charge on the inner surface –q and on outer 
surface it is Q + q. p  7.5 × 10 –8 Cm directed along negative z-axis

 
ˆ
p  7.5 × 10 –8 Cm –k
Example - 5
- 5 A cube of side b has a charge q at each of its vertices.
Determine the potential and electric field due to this
charge-array at the centre of the cube.
Sol. O is the centre of cube ABCDEFGH. Charge q is
placed at each of eight corners of the cube.
Surface charge density on inner surface =  q
4r12 Electric Potential :
Surface charge density on outer surface  Q  q

4r22
(b) For external points, the whole charge acts at
centre, so electric field at distance x > r2.
 1 Qq
E ( x)  rˆ
4 0 x 2
Example - 4 Side of cube = b

–7
A system has two charges qA = 2.5 × 10 C and qB
Length of each diagonal = b 2  b 2  b 2  3b
= – 2.5 × 10–7 C located at points A = (0, 0, – 15 cm)
Distance of each corner from centre O.
and B = (0, 0, + 15 cm) respectively. What are the
total charge and electric dipole moment of the = half the diagonal = . 3b
system? 2
Potential at O due to charge at each corner
= 1 q 1 2q

40 ( 3 b / 2) 4 0 3 b
Net potential at O due to all 8 charges at corners of the
cube V  8  1 2q  1 . 16q
40 3 b 4 0 3 b
Electric Field : The electric field at O due to charges
at all corners of the cube is zero, since, electric fields
due to charges at opposite corners such as A and H, G
and D, B and E, F and C are equal and opposite.
ELECTROSTATICS 40
Example - 6 2 106
| E C | 9  109  2
 1.44  107 N / C
Four charges are placed on corners of a square as  5 
  102 
 2 
shown in figure having side of 5 cm. If Q is one
micro coulomb, then electric field intensity at centre 10 6
| E D | 9  109   0.72  107 N / C ;
will be  5 
2
  102 
 2 
So, |ECA| = |EC| – | EA|
= 0.72 × 107 N/C and |EBD| = |EB| – |ED|
= 0.72 × 107 N/C.
Hence from equation – (i)

7
(a) 1.02 × 10 N/C upwards E = 1.02 × 107 N/C upwards.
(b) 2.04 × 107 N/C downwards
Example- 7
(c) 2.04 × 107 N/C upwards
Two point charges q1 = q2 = 2μC are fixed at
(d) 1.02 × 107 N/C downwards
x1 = + 3m and x2 = – 3m as shown in figure. A third
Ans. (a)
particle of mass 1 g and charge q3 = – 4μC is released
Sol. |EC| > |EA| so resultant of EC& EA is
from rest at y = 4.0 m. All these charges are on a
ECA = EC – EAdirected toward Q
frictionless plane. Find the speed of the particle as it
Also |EB| > |ED| so resultant of EB and ED i.e.
reaches the origin.
EBD = EB – ED directed toward –2Q charge
hence Net electric field at centre is
 E CA    E BD  ...(i)
2 2
E
Sol. How to proceed : Here, the charge q3 is attracted

towards q1 and q2 both. So, the net force on q3 is
towards origin.
By proper calculations
106 = 0.72 × 107 N/C

| E A |  9  109  2
 5 
  10 2 
 2 
2 106
| E B | 9  109  2
 1.44  107 N / C ;
 5 
  102 
 2 
ELECTROSTATICS 41
By this force charge is accelerated towards origin,

Sol. By using E   dV , E   dV  ay ,
but this acceleration is not constant. So, to obtain the x
dr dx
speed of particle at origin by kinematics we will
have to first find the acceleration at some dV
intermediate position and then will have to integrate Ey    ax
dy
with proper limits. On the other hand it is easy to
use the energy conservation principle, as the only Electric field at point P,
forces are conservative.
Let v be the speed of the particle at origin. From
E  E 2x  E 2y  a x 2  y 2  ar
conservation of mechanical energy, Ui + Ki = Uf + Kf
or i.e., E∝r
1  q 3 q 2 q 3 q 1 q 2 q1  Example - 9
   0
40  (r32 )i (r31 )i (r21 )i  A point particle of mass M is attached to one end of
a massless rigid non-conducting rod of length L.
1  q 3 q 2 q 3 q 1 q 2 q1  1
      mv
2
40 (r ) (r ) (r ) 2 Another point particle of the same mass is attached

 32 f 31 f 21 f 
to the other end of the rod. The two particles carry

Here, (r21)i = (r21)f. Substituting the proper values, we
charges +q and – q respectively. This arrangement is
have
held in a region of a uniform electric field E such
 (4)(2) (4)(2)  that the rod makes a small angle θ (say of about 5
(9.0 109 )     10  (9.0  10 )
12 9
 (5.0) (5.0)  degrees) with the field direction (see figure). What
will be the minimum time, needed for the rod to
 (4) (2) (4) (2)  1 become parallel to the field after it is set free
 (3.0)  (3.0)  10  2  10  v
12 3 2
 
 16   16  1
(9 103 )     (9 103 )     103  v2
∴  5   3 2
2 1
(9 103 ) (16)    103  v2
 15  2
∴ v = 6.2 m/s ML
(a) t  2
Example - 8 2 pE
In x-y co-ordinate system if potential at a point  ML

(b) t 
2 2 qE
P (x, y) is given by V = axy; where a is a constant, if
3 ML
r is the distance of point P from the origin, then (c) t 
2 2 pE
electric field at P is proportional to
2ML
(d) t  
(a) r (b) r –1 pE
Ans. (b)
(c) r—2 (d) r2
Ans. (a)
ELECTROSTATICS 42
Sol. In the given situation, the system oscillates in electric A according to the figure show below. The total field
field with maximum angular displacement θ. Its time at C must be zero. The field at C due to the point
period of oscillation (similar to dipole)
charge is E = k Q
r2
I
T  2 towards left. The field at C due to the induced charges
pE
where I = moment of inertia of the system and must be kQ towards right i.e. directed towards Q.
Hence the minimum time needed for the rod becomes r2
Example - 11
parallel to the field is t  T   I A long thin rod lies along the x-axis with one end at
4 2 pE
the origin. It has a uniform charge density λ C/m.
2 2 2 Assuming it to infinite in length, the electric field at
Here, I  M  L   M  L   ML
   
2 2 2 point x = – a on the x-axis will
(a)  (b) 
 ML2
t 0 a 2 0 a
⇒ 2 2  qL  E
 ML (c)  (d) 2 

2 2qE 4 0 a 0 a
Ans. (c)
Example - 10 Sol.
A point charge Q is placed outside a hollow
spherical conductor of radius R, at a distance (r > R)
from its centre C. The field at C due to the induced
charges on the conductor is  k  1  For infinite length

 40 
Electric field at a point along axis  
(a) Zero 4 0 r
(b) k Q r=a
r  R
2

E
(c) k Q directed towards Q 4 0 a
r2
(d) k Q directed away from Q Example - 12
r2 Two infinite plane parallel sheets separated by a
Ans. (c)
distance d have equal and opposite uniform charge
Sol.
densities σ. Electric field at a point between the
sheets is
(a) Zero (b) 

0
(c)  (d) 2
2 0 0
Ans. (b)
ELECTROSTATICS 43
Sol. Sol.
Electric field at point between the sheets

= EI – EII

E1 
2 0
    At equilibrium of Pendulum
EII    
2 0 2 0 2 0 0
T sin θ = Fe
T cosθ = mg
Example - 13
Fe QE Q
An infinite plane with uniformly distributed positive tan    tan  
mg mg 2 0 mg
charge has surface charge density σ. A small metallic
 Q 
sphere S of mass m and charge +Q is attached to a   tan 1  
thread and tied to a point P on the sheet AB. The  2 0 mg 
angle which PS makes with the plane AB is given by Example - 14

A solid sphere of radius R has a uniform distribution
of electric charge in its volume. At a distance x from
its centre for x < R, the electric field is directly
proportional to
(a) 1/x2 (b) 1/x
(c) x (d) x2
Ans. (c)
Sol.
(a) tan 1  Q 
 0 mg 
(b) cot 1  Q 
 2 0 mg 
Inside the solid sphere E  k . Q .x E  x
R3
(c) tan 1  Q 
 2 0 mg  Q' 
Q 4
  x3
4
R 3
3
(d) cot 1  Q  3
 0 mg 
Q Q' Q
Ans. (c) Q'  3
.x 3 E  k. 2
 k. x
R x R3
ELECTROSTATICS 44
Example - 15 Example - 17
Two very long line charges of uniform charge An electrostatic field line cannot be discontinuous,
density λ and –λ are placed along the same line with why?
the separation between the nearest ends being 2a as
Sol. Electrostatic field line originates from positive charge
shown in figure . The electric field intensity at the
point O is and terminates on negative charge i.e., it cannot
abruptly start or end in space. So the electric field line
is always continuous (directed from higher to lower
potential).
 
Example - 18
(a)   a (b) 4  a
Find the electrostatic potential at equatorial point of
 
an electric dipole.
(c) 3 a (d) 8 a
Sol. Let P be a point on the equator of an electric dipole
Ans. (a)
formed of charges –q and +q at separation 2a.
Sol.
The distance of point P from centre of dipole = r
AP = BP = r 2  a2
Electrostatics potential at
P, V  1  q q 
P   
40  BP AP 
  
E1 = E2 = ; Net - electric field at 0
4 0 a
   
= E1  E 2  2  =
4 0 a 2 0 a
Example - 16
Depict the equipotential surfaces for a system of two
identical positive point charges placed a distance ‘d’
apart.
Sol. Equipotential surfaces due to two identical charges is 1  q q 
VP    0
40  r 2  a 2 r  a2
2

shown in fig.
Thus, electrostatic potential at each equatorial point of
an electric dipole is zero.
Example - 19
A regular hexagon of side 0.10 m has a charge 5 μC
at each of its vertices. Calculate the potential at the
centre of the hexagon.
ELECTROSTATICS 45
Sol. The potential due to similar charges is additive. If we take (+) sign x = 2 (1 – x).
Let O be the centre of the hexagon.
This gives x  2 m = 66.7 cm
3
If we take (–) sign, x = – 2(1 – x) x = 2 m, Which
is not possible since the charges are having same
sign, the point must lie between the two charges.
Hence the answer will be only 66.7cm.

In triangle OAB, all angles are 60º, so
(ii) Electrostatic potential energy,
OA = OB = AB = a
So, in a regular hexagon distance of each corner from 1 (4Q )(Q ) 1 4Q 2
U 
centre is equal to the side of the cube 4 0 r 4 0 r
r = OA = OB = OC = OD = OE = OF = a = 0.10 m
7 2
= 9 × 109 × 4  (2  10 )
The net potential at O, V = 6  1 q . (1)
40 a
Here q = 5μC = 5 × 10–6 C, a = 0.10 m = 1.44 × 10–3 J
6 Example - 21
V = 6 × 9 × 109 × 5 × 10 = 2.7 × 106 volt
0.10 Two point charges 10 × 10–8 C and – 4 × 10– 8 C are
Example - 20 separated by a distance of 70 cm in air as shown in
(i) Two point charges 4Q and Q are separated by a figure.
distance 1 m in air. At what point on the line joining
the charges is the electric field intensity zero?
(ii) Also calculate the electrostatic potential energy
(i) Find at what distance from point A would the
of the charges if Q = 2 × 10–7 C.
electric potential be zero.
Sol. (i) Let x be the distance of point P from charge 4Q
(ii) Also calculate the electrostatic potential energy
where electric field intensity is zero, then of the system.
   Sol. (i) The electric potential due to opposite charges is
E  E1  E 2  0
subtractive. To find the electric potential, the
sign of the charge is retained in the formula.
Let x be the distance of point P from A at which
q electric potential is zero
As E1 and E2 are oppositely directed. 1 q1 1 q2

i.e., V   0
In magnitude, 40 x 40 (0.70  x)
 1 4Q 1 Q 4 1  1 10  10 8 1 (4  108 )
  2   0
40 x 2 40 (1  x) 2 x (1  x)2 40 x 40 (0.70  x)
 x2 = 4(1 – x)2
x = 2 (1 – x)
ELECTROSTATICS 46
Sol. Potential energy of the system,
10 4

x 0.70  x
 7.0 – 10x = 4x
 10  10 6  2 
or 14 x = 7.0 or x  17.0  0.5m U  9  109   3  27 J
 0.1 
14  
Example - 23
Also V  1  q1 q2 
 0
40  x x  0.70 

Infinite charges are lying at x = 1, 2, 4, 8…meter on
X-axis and the value of each charge is Q, find the
value of intensity of electric field at point x = 0 due
to these charges. Also find the value of potential at
this point if the value of Q is 1 micro coulomb.
8 8
 10 10  4 10  0  10  4 (a) 12 × 109 Q N/C, 1.8 × 104 V
x x  0.70 x x  0.70
(b) Zero, 1.2 × 104 V
(c) 6 × 109 Q N/C, 9 × 103 V
 x  7 m = 1.167 m
6 (d) 4 × 109 Q N/C , 6 × 103 V
Thus electric potential is zero at distances x = 0.5 m Ans. (a)
–8
and 1.167 m from charge q1 = 10 × 10 C. Sol. By the superposition, Net electric field at origin
(ii) Electrostatic potential energy of system 1 1 1 1 
E  kQ  2  2  2  2  ...
1
9 8 8
q1q2 = 9 × 10 × (10 10 )(4 10 ) 1 2 4 8 
=U
4 0 r 0.70  1 1 1 
E  kQ 1     ... 
 4 16 64 
U = –5.14 × 10–5 J
1 1 1
1    ...
Example - 22 4 16 64
is an infinite geometric progression. Its sum can be
Three particles, each having a charge of 10 micro
coulomb are placed at the corners of an equilateral
obtained by using the formula S  a ;

triangle of side 10cm. The electrostatic potential 1 r
energy of the system is Where a = First term, r = Common ratio.
(Given 1
 9  109 N  m 2 / C  )
4 0 Here a = 1 and r  1 so,
4
(a) Zero (b) Infinite
(c) 27 J (d) 100 J 1 1 1 1 4
1    ...   .
4 16 64 1 1 / 4 3
Ans. (c)
ELECTROSTATICS 47
4 Example - 25
E  9  109  Q   12 109 Q N / C
3 An arc of radius r carries charge. The linear density
of charge is λ and the arc subtends an angle π/3 at the
Hence, Electric potential at origin
centre. What is electric potential at the centre
1 1106 1 106 1106 110 6   
V      ... 
40  1 2 4 8  (a) 4 0 (b) 8  0
 
 1 1 1 
 9 109 106 1     ..............  (c) 12 0 (d) 16 0
 2 4 8 
Ans. (c)
Sol.
 
 1 
3 4
 9  10 
1  = 1.8 × 10 volt
1  
 2
Example - 24
A conducting sphere of radius R is charged to a
potential of V volt. Then the electric field at a
distance r (> R) from the centre of the sphere would Length of the arc = r
be Charge of the arc q = r
kq Kr   
(a) RV (b) V V   k   =
r2 r r r 3
2  1  
(c) rV (d) R V V = K V= . V=
R2 r3 3 4 0 3 12 0
Ans. (a) Example - 26
Sol. Conducting sphere (a) Plot a graph comparing the variation of
potential ‘V’ and electric field ‘E’ due to a point
charge ‘Q’ as a function of distance ‘R’ from
the point charge.
(b) Find the ratio of the potential differences that
must be applied across the parallel and the
series combination of two identical capacitors
If r > R so that the energy stored, in the two cases,
becomes the same.
1 Q Q Sol. (a) The graph of variation of potential and electric
V= . = k.
4 0 R R field due to a point charge Q with distance R
from the point charge is shown in fig.
V .R Q
Q= E = k.
k r2
VR VR
E = k. 2
E= 2
kr r
ELECTROSTATICS 48
(b) Let C be capacitance of each capacitor. Example - 29
In series arrangement, net capacitance C  C . The distance of the field point on the axis of a small
s
2 dipole is doubled. By what factor will the electric
In parallel arrangement, net capacitance, Cp = 2C field, due to the dipole change ?
Energy stored U  1 CV 2
2 Sol. For a small dipole, Eaxis = 1 2p 1
 3
If VS and VP are potential differences applied 40 r 3 r
across series and parallel arrangements, then When the distance r is doubled, the electric field
given Us = Up  1 C V 2  1 C V 2 strength becomes 1/8 times the original field.
S S p p
2 2
Example - 30
 Vp  Cs

C/2 1

VS Cp 2C 2
A positive charge is fixed at the origin of
Example - 27 coordinates. An electric dipole, which is free to move
A 500 μC charge is at the centre of a square of side and rotate, is placed on the positive x–axis. Its
10 cm. Find the work done in moving the charge of moment is directed away from the origin. The dipole
10 μC between two diagonally opposite points on will :
the square. (a) Move towards the origin
(b) Move away from the origin
(c) Rotate by /2
(d) Rotate by 
Sol. The points A and B are equidistant from the centre of Sol.
square where charge q = 500 μC is located ; therefore, -q charge is near the +Q as compare to +q, so
points A and B are at the same potential i.e., VA = VB. attractive force will be greater than repulsive force.
 Work done in moving charge q0 = 10μC from A to Therefore, dipole moves towards the origin.
B is W = q0 (VB – VA) = 0
Example - 31
Example - 28
An electric dipole with a dipole moment 4 × 10–9 A small metallic charged sphere is placed at the
Cm is aligned at 30º with the direction of a uniform centre of large uncharged spherical shell and the two
electric field of magnitude 5 × 104 NC–1. Calculate are connected by a wire. Will any charge flow on
the magnitude of the torque acting on the dipole. the outer shell?
Sol. A dipole placed in a uniform electric field experiences Sol. Yes, the whole charge will flow to the outer shell ;
a torque τ =pE sin θ which tends to align the dipole because charge always resides on outer surface of a
parallel to the direction of the field. conductor.
Torque τ =pE sin θ Example - 32
Here, p = 4 × 10–9 C-m, E = 5 × 104 NC–1, θ = 30º A hollow charged conductor has a tiny hole cut into
Torque τ = 4 × 10–9 × 5 × 104 sin 30º its surface. Show that the electric field in the hole is,
where is unit vector in the outward normal direction
4 × 10–9 × 5 × 104 × 1 = 10–4 Nm
2 and  is the surface charge density near the hole.
ELECTROSTATICS 49
Sol. Example - 33
The electric field component in the fig. shown are
Ex =  x1/2, Ey = Ez= 0, in which  = 800 N/Cm1/2.
Calculate (a) the electric flux through the cube
(b) the charge within the cube. The side of cube a =
0.1 m.
Sol. According to the question only the electric field has
only X-component, Y and Z-components are zero; so
electric flux diverging along Y and Z-axis is zero
Consider a hollow conductor (of any shape) having  
since   E  S = ES cos 90º = 0. The electric flux
hole AB at its surface. Consider a point P near the
diverging along X-axis from faces (1) and (2) exists.
hole just outside the conductor. First we consider the
The electric field at face (1) (where x = a) is E1 = 
conductor with hole filled up.
The electric field at point P due to whole conductor x1/2=  a1/2
This electric field may be considered as the

superposition of two electric fields :
 The electric field at face (2) (where x = 2a) is
(i) The electric field due to filled up hole E 1 .
E2 =  x1/2 =  (2a)1/2
(ii) The electric field due to rest of charged conductor
 The electric flux through faces (1) and (2) are
E2 .
 
At point P, these electric fields are directed along the 1  E  S  E1 S cos 180º = –a1/2 (a2) = –a5/2
    
 2  E 2  S  E 2 S cos 0 =  (2a)1/2. a2 × 1 2
same direction so E  E1  E 2  nˆ .........(1)
0
=a5/2
In the interior of conductor electric field is zero. If we
Net electric flux  = 1 + 2 = ( 2  1)  a5/2
consider a point Q near hole but inside the conductor,
 = ( 2  1) × 800 × (0.1)5/2
then electric field E1 changes direction, while electric
field due to rest of conductor remains the same in = (1.414 – 1) × 800 × (0.1)2 0.10
magnitude as well as in direction. The net field at Q is = 0.41 × 8 × 0.316 = 1.05 Nm2 C–1
   
Einside = E 2 – E 1 = 0  E 1 = E 2 ...........(2) (b) If q is net charge enclosed by cubical surface,
    then by Gauss-Theorem
From (1) 2 E 2  , E2  nˆ
0 2 0 q
  q  0 
The electric field strength of the hole will be due to 0
  or q = 8.854 × 10–12 × 1.05 = 9.27 × 10–12 C
rest of conductor and is given by 2 E 2  nˆ
2 0
ELECTROSTATICS 50
EXERCISE - 1 : BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS
Electric charge and its properties and Force between charges 9. Two point charges q1 = + 2C and q2 = – 1C are separated by
a distance d. The position on the line joining the two charges
1. 1012   particles (nuclei of helium) fall per second on a where a third charge = + 1C will be in equilibrium is at a
neutral sphere. Calculate the time (in second) in which distance
the sphere gets charged by 2 C . (a) d / 2 from q1 between q1 & q2
2. The ratio of the electric force between two electrons to (b) d / 2 from q1 away from q2
the gravitational force between them is of the order of
(c) d / 2 – 1 from q2 between q1 & q2
(a) 1042 (b) 1040
(c) 1036 (d) 1032 (d) d / 2 – 1 from q2 away q1
3. Two point charges +2 coulomb and +6 coulomb repel each 10. A charge Q is placed at each of the opposite corners of a
other with a force of 12 N. If a charge of –4 coulomb is square. A charge -q is placed at each of the other two corners.
given to each of these charges then the force will be If the net electrical force on is zero, then the Q/q
(a) 4 N (repulsive) (b) 4 N (attractive)
(c) 8 N (repulsive) (d) 8 N (attractive) (a) 2 2 (b) –1
4. Two point charges repel each other with a force of 100 N. 1

One of the charges is increased by 10% and other is (c) 1 (d) 
2
decreased by 10%. The new force of repulsion at the same
11. Two infinite linear charges are placed parallel to each other
distance will be
at a distance 0.1m from each other. If the linear charge
(a) 55 N (b) 77 N
density on each is 5 C / m, then the force (in N / m) acting
(c) 99 N (d) 100 N
on a unit length of each linear charge will be
5. A charge q1 exerts some force on a second charge q2. If a
12. Three charges –q1, + q2 and –q3 are placed as shown in the
third charge q3 is brought near, the force of q1 exerted on
figure. The x-component of the force on –q1 is proportional to
q2 will :
(a) increase (b) decrease
(c) remain unchanged (d) none of these
6. Two pith balls each of mass 1 gm and each carrying a
charge of 1C are attached to ends of silk threads 1m
long the other ends of which are attached to a fixed point
in gravity free space.The force between them will be
(a) 2.25 × 10–5 N (b) 6.1 × 10–3 N
(c) 4.25 × 10–3 N (d) 12.25 × 10–3 N q2 q3 q2 q3
(a) 2
 2
cos  (b) 2
 sin 
7. Two free charges q and 4q are placed at a distance d apart. b a b a2
A third charge Q is placed between them at a distance x q2 q3 q2 q3
from charge q such that the system is in equilibrium. Then, (c) 2
 2
cos  (d) 2
 sin 
b a b a2
(a) Q = –4q/9, x = d/3 (b) Q = –4q/9, x = d/4 13. Two identical charged spheres suspended from a common
(c) Q = –4q/3, x = d/3 (d) Q = –4q/3, x = d/4 point by two massless strings of length l are initially a
distance d (d << l) apart because of their mutual repulsion.
8. If a charge q is placed at the centre of the line joining two The charge begins to leak from both the spheres at a constant
equal charges Q each such that the system is in equilibrium, rate. As a result charges approach each other with a velocity
then the value of q is v. Then as a function of distance x between them,
(a) Q/2 (b) – Q/2 (a) v  x–1 (b) v  x1/2
(c) Q/4 (d) – Q/4 (c) v  x (d) v  x–1/2
ELECTROSTATICS 51
14. Two charges, each equal to q, are kept at x = –a and x = a on 19. An infinite number of charges, each equal to q, are placed
q along the x  axis at x  1, x  2, x  4, x  8, etc. The
the x–axis. A particle of mass m and charge q 0  is
2 electric field at the point x  0 due to the set of charges is
placed at the origin. If charge q 0 is given a small
q
displacement y (y << a) along the y –axis, the net force .
acting on the particle is proportional to n 0 Find n .
(a) y (b) –y 20. A charged particle enters at point A and comes out from
point B. Its velocity vector makes angle  and  with
1 1
(c) y (d)  y electric field at these two points, respectively. The ratio of
kinetic energy of the charged particle at these two points
Electric field  KB 
  will be (Given   60 and   30 
4  KA 
15. A charged oil drop is suspended in uniform field of 3×10
V/m, so that it neither falls nor rises. The charge on the
drop will be
–15 2
(take the mass of the charge = 9.9 × 10 kg and g = 10 m/s )
–18 –18
(a) 3.3 × 10 C (b) 3.2 × 10 C
–18 –18
(c) 1.6× 10 C (d) 4.8 × 10 C
16. Two point charges q1 = 4 C & q2 = 9 C are placed 20 cm Electric field due to continuous charge distribution
apart. The electric field due to them will be zero on the line
joining them at a distance of 21. The magnitude of the average electric field normally
present in the atmosphere just above the surface of the
(a) 8 cm from q1 (b) 8 cm from q2
Earth is about 150 N/C, directed inward towards the center
(c) 80/13 cm from q1 (d) 80/13 cm from q2 of the Earth. This gives the total net surface charge carried
by the Earth to be:
17. Charge of +q, +2q, + and –are placed at the corners of a
square ABCD, calculate the electric field at the intersection [Given 0 = 8.85 × 10–12 C2/Nm2, RE = 6.37 × 106 m]
of the diagonals of the square when q = 5/3 × 10–9 C and
(a) +670 kC (b) – 670 kC
each side square of is 10 cm.
(c) – 680 kC (d) + 680 kC
22. In a uniformly charged sphere of total charge Q and radius
R, the electric field E is plotted as function of distance from
the centre. The graph which would correspond to the above
will be
(a) (b)
(a) 2.1 × 103 Vm–1 (b) 9.1 × 10-2 Vm–1

(c) 1.8 × 104 Vm–1 (d) 0.9 × 104 Vm–1
18. Two point charges + 8q and –2q are located at x = 0 and x = (c) (d)
L respectively. The location of a point on the x-axis at which
the net electric field due to these two point charges is zero
is
(a) 2L (b) L/4
(c) 8L (d) 4L
ELECTROSTATICS 52
23. The electric field strength due a uniformly charged ring of 27. A spherically symmetric charge distribution is
radius R at a distance x from its centre on its axis carrying characterised by a charge density having the following
charge has somewhere maximum value on the axis. This is variation:
at distance
 r 
(r)  O 1   for r  R
(a) x = R (b) x   2 R  R 
R (r)  0 for r > R

(c) x   (d) x   3 R
2 Where r is the distance from the centre of the charge
distribution and O is a constant. The electric field at an
24. A point charge is placed at a distance r from the centre of an
internal point (r < R) is:
uncharged conducting sphere of radius R (< r). The potential
at any point on the sphere is O  r r 2  O  r r 2 
(a) 3   3  4R  (b) 4   3  4R 
1 q O   O  
(a) Zero (b) 4  r
0
O  r r 2  O  r r2 
1 qR 1 qr 2 (c)   3  4R  (d) 12    
(c) 4  2 (d) O   O  3 4R 
0 r 4 0 R
Q
25. A charged ball B hangs from a silk thread S, which makes an 28. Let (r)  r be the charge density distribution for a
angle with a large charged conducting sheet P, as shown R 4
in the figure. The surface charge density  of the sheet is solid sphere of radius R and total charge Q. For a point P
proportional to inside the sphere at distance r1 from the centre of the sphere,
the magnitude of electric field is
Q
(a) zero (b)
40 r12
Qr12 Qr12
(c) (d)
4 0 R 4 3 0 R 4
29. A uniformly charged sphere is placed inside a charged
hollow sphere as shown in the figure. O is the centre of
hollow sphere and C is the centre of solid sphere. The
(a) cos (b) cot 
 3
(c) sin  (d) tan  magnitude of charge on both the spheres is 4  7   C .
26. A thin semi-circular ring of radius r has a positive charge  

distributed uniformly over it. The net field E at the centre The electric field at point P which lies just outside the
O is hollow sphere is given by 3 K N / C . Find the value of
1 
 . (Here, K  4 
0 
q q ˆj
(a) ĵ (b) 
42  0 r 2 4 2  0 r 2
q ˆj q
(c)  (d) ĵ
2  0 r 2
2
2  0 r 2
2
ELECTROSTATICS 53
Electric potential energy 36. Three charges  q,  q and Q are located at the vertices of
30. Two equal charges are placed at a distance of ‘2 a’ and a a right-angled isosceles triangle as shown in the figure. If
third charge – 2is placed at the midpoint. The potential q
energy of the system is the total interaction energy is zero, then Q   . Find
p r
q2 6 q2
(a) (b) r2 ?
80 a 80 a
7 q2 9 q2
(c)  (d)
80 a 80 a
31. Uniform electric field of intensity 5 volt/m acts parallel to x

axis. A charge of 2C is moved from 0 to A (1,1), to B
(2, 1) and finally to D (3,0) in this field. Work done in this
process is : 1
37. An alpha nucleus of energy mv2 bombards a heavy nuclear
(a) 60 joule (b) 40 joule 2
target of charge Ze. Then the distance of closest approach for
(c) 30 joule (d) zero the alpha nucleus will be proportional to
2
32. An electron of 100 eV is fired directly towards a metal plate (a) v (b) 1/m
having surface charge density of –2 × 10–6 Cm–2. What is (c) 1/v
4
(d) 1/Ze
the distance from where the electron be projected so that
its just fails to strike the plate. Electric potential
(a) 0.22 mm (b) 0.33 mm 38. Four charges +q, +q, –q and –q are placed respectively at
the corners A, B, C & D of a square of side a. The potential
(c) 0.44 mm (d) 0.66 mm
and field at the centre O of the square are respectively
33. Two positive charges of magnitude q are placed at the
1
ends of a side 1 of a square of side 2a. Two negative charges
of the same magnitude are kept at the other corners. Starting 4 0 times
from rest, if a charge moves from the middle of side 1 to the
centre of square, its kinetic energy at the centre of square is
1 2qQ  1 
(a) 1   (b) zero
40 a  5
1 2qQ  1  1 2qQ  2 
(c) 4 a 1   (d) 4 a  1  
0  5 0  5
34. Two charge particles having charges 1C and –1C and
of mass 50 gm each are held at rest while their separation 4 2q
(a) zero, 4q/a2 (b) zero ,
is 2 meter. Find the speed of the particles when their a2
separation is 1 meter.
(a) 0.20 m/s (b) 0.6 m/s
(c) 4 2q / a ; 4q / a 2 (d) 4 2 q ; 4 2q / a 2
(c) 0.3 m/s (d) 0.4 m/s
35. A charged particle with q is shot towards another charged 39. Two charges of 4 C each are placed at the corners A and B
particle with charged q which is fixed, with a speed v. it of an equilateral triangle of side length 0.2 m in air. The
approaches upto a closest distance r and then returns. If q  1 N  m2 
was given a speed 2v, the closest distance of approach electric potential at C is   9  109 
would be  40 C2 
(a) 9 × 104 V (b) 18 × 104 V

(c) 36 × 104 V (d) 72 × 104 V
(a) r (b) 2r
(c) r/2 (d) r/4
ELECTROSTATICS 54
–3
40. An electric charge 10 C is placed at the origin (0, 0) of X- 47. The variation of potential is maximum if one goes
Y coordinate system. Two points A and B are situated at
(a) along the field line
( 2, 2) and (2, 0) respectively. The potential difference (b) Perpendicular to field line
between the points A and B will be (c) in any direction
(a) 9 V (b) zero (d) at 45° with the direction of field line
(c) 2 V (d) 4.5 V 48. Which of the following may be discontinuous across a
41. Two concentric, thin metallic spheres of radii R1 and R2 (R1 > R2) charged conducting surface ?
bear charges Q1 and Q2 respectively. Then the potential at
(a) Electric potential
 1  (b) Electric intensity
radius r between R1 and R2 will be  K  4  
 0 (c) Both electric intensity and potential
(a) K (Q1 + Q2) / r (b) K (Q1/r + Q2/R2) (d) None of these
(c) K (Q2/r + Q1/R1) (d) K (Q1/R1 + Q2/R2) 49. Charges are placed on the vertices of a square as shown.

42. A hollow hemisphere of radius R is charged uniformly with Let E be the electric field and V the potential at the centre.
surface density of charge . What will be the potential at If the charges on A and B are interchanged with those on D
centre ? and C respectively, then
R 
(a) 2  (b) 4 
0 0
 4R
(c) 2  (d) 3 
0 0
43. A solid sphere of radius R is charged uniformly through 

out the volume. At what distance from its surface is the (a) E remains unchanged, V changes
electric potential 1/4 of the potential at the centre ? 
(b) both E and V change
(a) 8R/3 (b) R/3 
(c) 5R/3 (d) 2R/3 (c) E and V remain unchanged
44. A thin spherical conducting shell of radius R has a charge 
(d) E changes, V remains unchanged
q. Another charge is placed at the centre of the shell. The
50. Three charges 2q, –q, –are located at the vertices of an
electrostatic potential at a point P at a distance R/2 from the
centre of the shell is equilateral triangle. At the circumcentre of the triangle
2Q 2Q q (a) field is zero but potential is non-zero
(a) 4 R (b) 4 R  4 R (b) field is non-zero but potential is zero
0 0 0
(c) both field and potential are zero

2Q q q  Q q
(c) 4 R  4 R (d) (d) both field and potential are non-zero
0 0 4 0 R

51. Assume that an electric field E  30x2 î exists in space.
45. A hexagon of side 8 cm has a charge 4 C at each of its
Then the potential difference VA – VO’ Where VO is the
vertices. The potential at the centre of the hexagon is
potential at the origin and VA the potential at x = 2 m is :
y 106 volt . Find y .
(a) –120 J/C (b) – 80 J/C
Electric field and potential (c) 80 J/C (d) 120 J/C
52. The electric potential in a certain region of space is given
46. In uniform electric field
by V = –3x2 + 2x, where x is in meter and V is in volt, in this
(a) All points are at same potential region the equipotential surface are
(b) no two points can have same potential
(a) plane parallel to XY plane
(c) pair of points separated by same distance must have
(b) planes parallel to YZ plane
same difference of potential
(c) concentric cylinders with axis as x–axis
(d) none of these
(d) concentric spheres concentrated at origin.
55
ELECTROSTATICS
53. Let V and E be the potential and electric field respectively 58. Electric potential at equatorial point of a small dipole with

at a point due to charge distribution. Which of the following dipole moment p (At r, distance from the dipole) is
assertion in true. p
(a) if V = 0 then E must be zero (a) Zero (b)
4 0 r 2
(b) V  0, then E can not be zero
(c) if E  0, V can not be zero p 2p
(c) (d)
(d) if V = 0, E may be zero 4 0 r 3 4 0 r 3
59. The distance between H+ and Cl– ions in HCl molecule is
54. Electric potential in an electric field is given as V  K , (K 1.28Å. What will be the potential due to this dipole at a
r distance of 12Å on the axis of dipole.

being constant), if position vector r  2 î  3 ˆj  6 k,
ˆ then (a) 0.13 V (b) 1.3 V
electric field will be (c) 13 V (d) 130 V
p
K K 60. Two short dipoles pkˆ and kˆ are located at  0, 0,0  and

(a) 2 î  3 ˆj  6 kˆ243

(b) 2 î  3 ˆj  6 kˆ343
2
(1 m, 0, 2 m), respectively. The resultant electric field due to
K K np ˆ
(c) 
3 î  2 ˆj  6 kˆ  (d) 
6 î  2 ˆj  3kˆ  the two dipoles at the point (1 m, 0, 0) is 32 k . Find n.
243 343 0
61. An electric dipole is fixed at the origin of coordinates. Its
55. The potential at a point x (measured in m) due to some moment is directed in the positive x–direction. A positive
charges situated on the x-axis is given by : charge is moved from the point (r, 0) to the point (–r, 0) by
2
V (x) = 20/(x – 4) volt external agent. In this process, the work done by the agent is
The electric field E at x = 4m is given by (a) Positive and inversely proportional to r
(b) Positive and inversely proportional to r2.
5
(a) V / m and in the –ve x direction (c) negative and inversely proportional to r
3
(d) Negative and inversely proportional to r2.
5 62. A charge q is placed at (1, 2, 1) and other charge –q is
(b) V / m and in the +ve x direction placed at (0, 1, 0) such that they form an electric dipole.
3

There exist a uniform electric field E  2iˆ  3jˆ . What is
10
(c) V / m and the –ve x direction torque experienced by the dipole.
9
10
 
(a) q 3iˆ  2jˆ  kˆ N.m 
(b) q 3iˆ  2ˆj  kˆ N.m
(d) V / m and in the +ve x direction
9
(c) q  3iˆ  2ˆj  kˆ  N.m (d) q  î  2ˆj  kˆ  N.m
56. An electric field (30iˆ  20 ˆj )Vm 1 exists in space. If the 
63. An electric dipole of dipole moment p is placed in uniform
potential at the origin is zero, then find the potential (in   
electric field E , with p parallel to E . It is then rotated by
volt) at (5 m,3 m).
an angle of . The work done is
Electric dipole & Dipole in electric field (a) pE sin  (b) pE cos 
(c) pE (1 – cos ) (d) pE (1 – sin)
57. Two short dipoles each of dipole moment p are placed at
64. An electric dipole is placed at an angle of 30º to a non-
origin. The dipole moment of one dipole is along x axis,
uniform electric field. The dipole will experience
while that of other is along y axis. The electric field at point
(a, 0) is given by (a) a translational force only in the direction of the field
(b) a translational force only in a direction normal to the
2p p direction of the field
(a) 4 a (b)
0 40 a 3 (c) a torque as well as a translational force
(d) a torque only
5p
(c) (d) zero
40 a 3
56
ELECTROSTATICS
65. There exists a non-uniform electric field along x-axis as 69. If the electric flux entering and leaving an enclosed surface

shown in figure. The field increases at a uniform rate along respectively is 1 and 2, the electric charge inside the surface
positive x-axis. A dipole is placed inside the field as shown. will be
For the dipole which one of the following statement is
correct  1  2 
(a) (2 – 1) 0 (b)
0
 2  1 
(c) (d) (1 + 2) 0
0
70. A positive point charge is placed just outside the centre of
the flat face of a hemispherical surface in air. The electric
flux through the flat face is
(a) Dipole moves along positive x-axis and undergoes a

clockwise rotation
(b) Dipole moves along negative x-axis after undergoing a
clockwise rotation
(c) Dipole moves along positive x-axis after under going an
anticlockwise rotation
(d) Dipole moves along negative x-axis and undergoes an
anticlockwise rotation
q q
Electric flux & Gauss's law (a)  (b) 2
0 0
66. The electric field in a region of space is given by,
 q
E  E 0 î  2E 0 ˆj where E0 = 100 N/C. The flux of this field
(c) zero (d) 2
through a circular surface of radius 0.02 m parallel to the 0
Y–Z plane is nearly : 71. The electric field in the region is radially outwards and has
2
(a) 3.14 Nm /C 2
(b) 0.02 Nm /C the magnitude of E = kr. The charge contained in a sphere
2
of radius a is
(c) 0.005 Nm /C (d) 0.125 Nm2/C
4 3
67. A uniform electric field E  500 N / C passes through a (a)  0 a (b) 4 k0 a 3
3
hemispherical surface of radius R  1.2 m as shown in the
figure. The net electric flux (in SI units) through the 2 3
hemispherical surface only is N  . Find the value of N . (c) k 0 a (d) 4 k0 a 2
3
72. Two large conducting plates parallel to each other are placed
close to each other. The inner surfaces of two plates have
surface charge densities  and –. The other surfaces are
without charge. The electric field has the magnitude.
2
(a)  in the region between the plates
0

(b)  in the region between the plates
68. A cube of side 10 cm encloses a charge of 0.1 C at its 0
centre. What is number of field lines through each face of

the cube. (c)  in the region outside the plates
0
(a) 1.13 × 1011 (b) 1.13 × 106
(d) zero in the region between the plates
(c) 1.13 × 1013 (d) 1883
ELECTROSTATICS 57
Conductors and its properties

73. A charge of 5 × 10–10 C is given to a metal cylinder of length
10 m, placed in air. The electric intensity at a distance of 0.2 76. A metal sphere of radius 10 cm is given a charge of 12C.
m from its axis is The force acting on unit area of its surface due to its own
(a) 4.5 V/m (b) 45 V/m charge is
(c) 450 V/m (d) 100 V/m (a) 5.157 × 102 N/m2 (b) 5.15 × 103 N/m2

An electric field given by E  4iˆ   3 y  2  ˆj pierces
2 (c) 5.15 × 10–2 N/m2 (d) 5.15 × 10–3 N/m2
74.
77. The outward pull on a metal plate of an area 0.01m2 having
Gaussian’s cube of side 1m placed at origin such that its a charge density of 50 C/m2 is
three edges represents x, y and z axes. The net charge (a) 1.4 N (b) 2.4 N
enclosed within the cube is given by n 0 . Find the value (c) 0.4 N (d) 1.8 N
of n . 78. A conducting sphere of radius R and carrying charge Q is
joined to an uncharged conducting sphere of radius 2R.
The charge flowing between them would be
Q Q
(a) (b)
2 3
2Q Q
(c) (d)
3 4
79. Two charged metallic spheres of radii r1 and r2 are touched
and separated. What is the ratio of their surface charge
density.
75. The field at a distance r from a long string of charge per unit 1 r2 1 r1
length  is (a)   r (b)   r
2 1 2 2
k k
(a) (b) 1 1 r2 r1
r2 r (c)   1 (d)   r  r
2 2 1 2
k 2k 80. What is the largest charge a metal ball of 1mm radius can
(c) (d)
2r r hold? Dielectric strength of air is 3×106 Vm–1.
(a) 3nC (b) 2nC
(c) 1/2 nC (d) 1/3nC
ELECTROSTATICS 58
EXERCISE - 2 : PREVIOUS YEARS JEE MAIN QUESTIONS

1. A wire, of length L (=20 cm), is bent into a semicircular arc. 4. The potential (in volts) of a charge distribution is given
If the two equal halves, of the arc, were each to be by
uniformly charged with charges  Q, [|Q| = 1030. Coulomb V(z) = 30 - 5z2 for |z| < 1 m
where  is the permittivity (in SI units) of free space] the V(z) = 35 -10 |z| for |z| >1 m.
net electric field at the centre O of the semicircular arc
V(z) does not depend on x and y. If this potential is
would be : (2015)
generated by a constant charge per unit volume ρ0 (in
units of 0) which is spread over a certain region, then
choose the correct statement. (2016)
(a) ρ0 =10 0 for |z| < 1 m and ρ0 = 0 elsewhere
(b) ρ0 = 20 0 in the entire region
(c) ρ0 = 40 0 in the entire region
(d) ρ0 = 20 0 for |z| < 1 m and ρ0 = 0 elsewhere
5. Within a spherical charge distribution of charge density
(a) (50 × 103 N/C) ˆj (b) (50 × 103 N/C) î
(r), N equipotential surfaces of potential V0, V0  V,
(c) (25 × 103 N/C) ˆj (d) (25 × 103 N/C) î V0  2V, …. V0  NV (V  0), are drawn and have
2. A uniformly charged solid sphere of radius R has potential increasing radii r0 , r1 , r2 ,.......rN , respectively. If the differ--
V0 (measured with respect to ) on its surface. For this ence in the radii of the surfaces is constant for all values
sphere the equipotential surfaces with potentials
of V0 and  V then : (2016)
3V0 5V0 3V0 V0
, , and have radius R1, R2, R3 and (a) (r)  r (b) (r)  constant
2 4 4 4
R4 respectively. Then (2015) 1
1
(a) R1 = 0 and R2 < (R4 – R3) (c) ρ(r)  (d) (r) 
r r2
(b) R1  0 and (R2 – R1) > (R4 – R3)
6. Four closed surfaces and corresponding charge
(c) R1 = 0 and R2 > (R4 – R3) distributions are shown below.
(d) none of these
3. The region between two concentric spheres of radii ‘a’
and ‘b’, respectively (see figure), has volume charge
A
density  , where A is a constant and r is the distance
r
from the centre. At the centre of the spheres is a point
charge Q. The value of A such that the electric field in the
region between the spheres will be constant, is : (2016)
Q 2Q Let the respective electric fluxes through the surfaces be

(a) 2 b2  a 2
 
(b)  a 2  b2
 1 ,  2 ,  3 and  4 . Then : (2017)
(a) 1   2   3   4 (b) 1   2   3   4
2Q Q
(c) (d) (c) 1   2   3   4 (d) 1  3 ;  2   4
a 2 2 a 2
ELECTROSTATICS 59
 11. A solid ball of radius R has a charge density  given by

7. An electric dipole has a fixed dipole moment p , which
makes angle  with respect to x-axis. When subjected to  r 
 = o  1-  for 0  r  R. ,where r is distance from the
     R
an electric field E1  E i , it experiences a torque T1   k .
centre of the ball. The electric field outside the ball is
  (2018)
When subjected to another electric field E 2  3 E j it
0 R 3 0 R 3
 
experiences a torque T2   T1 . The angle  is : (2017) (a) (b)
0 r 2 12 0 r 2
(a) 30° (b) 45°
(c) 60° (d) 90° 40 R 3 30 R 3
(c) (d)
8. There is a uniform electrostatic field in a region. The 3 0 r 2 4 0 r 2
potential at various points on a small sphere centered at P, 12. Two identical conducting spheres A and B, carry equal
in the region, is found to vary between the limits 589.0 V charge. They are separated by a distance much larger than
to 589.8 V. What is the potential at a point on the sphere their diameters, and the force between them is F. A third
whose radius vector makes an angle of 60° with the identical conducting sphere, C, is uncharged. Sphere C is
direction of the field ? (2017) first touched to A, then to B, and then removed. As a
(a) 589.5 V (b) 589.2 V result, the force between A and B would be equal to :
(c) 589.4 V (d) 589.6 V (2018)
9. Three concentric metal shells A, B and C of respective
3F
radii a,b and c (a < b < c) have surface charge densities (a) F (b)
and +, - and +  respectively. The potential of shell B 4
is : (2018)
3F F
(c) (d)
8 2
  b2  c2    b 2  c2 
(a)   b + a  (b)   c + a  a
0 
13. A charge is placed at a distance above the centre of the
 0  2
square surface of edge a as shown in the figure
  a 2  b2    a 2  b2 
(c)   a + c  (d)   b + c 
0  0 
10. A body of mass m and charge is connected to a spring of
spring constant k. It is oscillating along x-direction about
its equilibrium position, taken to be at x = 0, with an
amplitude A. An electric field E is applied along the x-
direction. Which of the following statements is correct ?
(2018) The electric flux through the square surface is : (2018 )
qE Q Q
(a) The new equilibrium position is at a distance from
2k (a)  (b) 2 
0 0
x =0.
Q Q
1 1 q2E2 (c) 3 (d) 6 
(b) The total energy of the system is m2 A 2 + 0 0
2 2 k
14. For a uniformly charged ring of radius R, the electric field
1 1 q2E2 on its axis has the largest magnitude at a distance h from
(c) The total energy of the system is m2 A 2 -
2 2 k its centre. Then value of h is: (2019)
2qE R R
(d) The new equilibrium position is at a distance (a) (b)
k 5 2
from x =0.
(c) R (d) R 2
ELECTROSTATICS 60
15. Two, point charges q1  

10  C and q2  25  C  are placed
on the x-axis at x = 1 m and x = 4 m respectively. The

electric field (in V/m) at a point y = 3 m on y-axis is,
 1 
 take  9  109 Nm 2C 2  (2019)
 4 0 
 
(a) 63iˆ  27 ˆj  10
2

(b) 63iˆ  27 ˆj  10
2

 
(c) 81iˆ  81 ˆj  10
2
(d)  81iˆ  81 ˆj   10
2
16. A charge is distributed over three concentric spherical F

(a) 3 F (b)
3
shells of radii a, b, c  a  b  c  such that their surface (c) 9 F (d) 27 F
charge densities are equal to one another. The total 19. Four equal point charges each are placed in the xy plane
potential at a point at distance r from their common centre, at (0, 2), (4, 2), (4, –2) and (0, –2). The work required to put
where r<a, would be: (2019) a fifth charge at the origin of the coordinate system will
be: (2019)
Q ab  bc  ca Q  a 2  b2  c2 
(a) 12  (b) 4  a 3  b 3  c 3 Q2  1 
abc 0   1
4 0  
0 (a)
3
Q Q  a  b  c
Q2  1 
0  
(c) 4   a  b  c  (d) 4  a2  b2  c2
0 (b)  1 
4 0  5
17. Two electric dipoles, A, B with respective dipole moments
  Q2
d A  4qaiˆ and dB  2q aiˆ are placed on the x-axis (c)
2 2  0
with a separation R, as shown in the figure
Q2
(d)
4  0
20. The given graph shows variation (with distance r from
centre) of: (2019)
The distance from A at which both of them produce the
same potential is: (2019)
R 2R
(a) (b)
2 1 2 1
R 2R
(c) (d)
2 1 2 1
18. Charges –q and +q located at A and B, respectively, (a) Electric field of a uniformly charged sphere
constitute an electric dipole. Distance AB = 2a, O is the (b) Potential of a uniformly charged spherical shell
midpoint of the dipole and OP is perpendicular to AB. A (c) Potential of a uniformly charged sphere
charge is placed at P where OP = y and y  . The charge (d) Electric field of a uniformly charged spherical shell
experiences an electrostatic force F. If is now moved along
21. An electric field of 1000 V /m is applied to an electric
 y dipoleat angle of 45°. The value of electric dipole
the equatorial line to P’ such that OP’ =   , the force moment is 10 –29Cm. What is the potential energy of the
3
electricdipole? (2019)
y
on will be close to  2a (2019) (a) –20 × 10–18 J (b) –7 × 10–27 J
3
(c) –10 × 10–29 J (d) –9 × 10–20 J
ELECTROSTATICS 61
22. Determine the electric dipole moment of the system of 26. An electric dipole is formed by two equal and opposite
three charges, placed on the vertices of an equilateral charges with separation d. The charges have same mass
triangle, as shown in the figure: (2019) m. It is kept in a uniform electric field E. If it is slightly
rotated from its equilibrium orientation, then its
angular frequency  is : (2019)
qE 2qE
(a) (b)
md md
qE qE
(c) 2 (d)
md 2md
ˆj  iˆ iˆ  ˆj
(a) 3 q (b)  q  27. The electric field in a region is given by
2 2 
E   Ax  B  iˆ, where E is in NC–1 and x is in metres.
(c) 2qljˆ (d)  3qljˆ The values of constants are A = 20 SI unit and B = 10 SI
23. The bob of a simple pendulum has mass 2 g and a charge unit. If the potential at x = 1 is V1 and that at x = –5 is V2,
of 5.0 μC. It is at rest in a uniform horizontal electric field then V1 V2 (2019)
of intensity 2000 V/m. At equilibrium, the angle that the (a) 320 V (b) –48 V
pendulum makes with the vertical is: (take g = 10 m/s2) (c) 180 V (d) –520 V
(2019) 28. A system of three charges are placed as shown in the
(a) tan (2.0)
–1
(b) tan (0.2)
–1
figure:
(c) tan (5.0)
–1
(d) tan–1(0.5)
24. A solid conducting sphere, having a charge Q, is
surrounded by an uncharged conducting hollow spherical
shell. Let the potential difference between the surface of
the solid sphere and that of the outer surface of the hollow
shell be V. If the shell is now given a charge of –4 Q, the If D >> d, the potential energy of the system is best given
new potential difference between the same two surfaces by (2019)
is nV, where n is: (2019)
25. A positive point charge is released from rest at a distance 1  q 2 qQd 
(a) 4   d  2 D 2 
r0 from a positive line charge with uniform density. Thes 0  
peed (v) of the point charge, as a function of instantaneous
distance r from line charge, is proportional to: (2019) 1  q 2 2qQd 
(b) 4   d  D 2 
0  
1  q2 qQd 
(c) 4    d  D 2 
0  
1  q 2 qQd 
(d)   2 
4 0  d D 
29. Four point charges q,  q,  q and  q are placed on yaxis

at y  2d , y  d , y   d and y  2d , respectively..
r The magnitude of the electric field E at a point on the
(a) v  e  r / r0 (b) v  ln  
xaxis at x = D, with D  d , will behave as: (2019)
 r0 
1 1
r   r  (a) E  (b) E 
D3 D
(c) v  ln   (d) v   
 r0   r0  1 1
(c) E  (d) E 
D4 D2
ELECTROSTATICS 62
30. A uniformly charged ring of radius 3a and total charge +q 33. Shown in the figure is a shell made of a conductor. It has
is placed in xy-plane centred at origin. A point charge is inner radius a and outer radius b, and carries charge Q. At
moving towards the ring along the z-axis and has speed its centre is a dipole P as shown. In this case: (2019)
vat z = 4a. The minimum value of v such that it crosses the
origin is : (2019)
1/ 2
2  4 q2  2  1 q2 
(a)   (b)  
m  15 4 0 a  m  5 4 0 a 
1/ 2 1/ 2
2  2 q2  2  1 q2 
(c)   (d)  
m  15 4 0 a  m  15 4 0 a 
(a) surface change density on the inner surface is uniform
31. In free space, a particle A of charge 1  C is held fixed at a
Q
point P. Another particle B of the same charge and mas s
and equal to 2 2
4  g is kept at a distance of 1 mm from P. If B is released, 4 a
then its velocity at a distance of 9 mm from P is: (b) electric field outside the shell is the same as that of a
point charge at the centre of the shell.
 1 
Take  9  109 Nm2 C 2  (2019) (c) surface charge density on the outer surface depends
 4 0  on P
(a) 1.0 m/s (b) 3.0×10 m / s
4
(d) surface charge density on the inner surface of the shell
(c) 2.0×10 m / s
3 (d) 1.5×10 m / s
2 is zero everywhere.

32. A simple pendulum of length L is placed between the plates 34. A point dipole p   p0 xˆ is kept at the origin. The
of a parallel plate capacitor having electric field E, as shown potential and electric field due to this dipole on the y-axis
in figure. Its bob has mass m and charge q. The time period at a distance d are, respectively : (Take V = 0 at infinity)
of the pendulum is given by: (2019)
(2019)
  
P P P
(a) , (b) 0,
4 0 d 2 4 0 d 3 4 0 d 3
  
P P P
(c) 0, (d) ,
4 0 d 3 4 0 d 2 4 0 d 3
35. Let a total charge 2be distributed in a sphere of radius R,
with the charge density given by   r   kr , where r is

the distance from the centre. Two charges A and B, of –
each, are placed on diametrically opposite points, at equal
L distance, a, from the centre. If A and B do not experience
L
(a) 2 (b) 2 any force, the: (2019)
 qE   2 q2 E 2 
g   g   1
3R
 m   m2  
(a) a  8 4
R (b) a 1
2 4
(c) 2
L (d) 2 L
 qE  1/2 
1
R
 2  qE  2  (c) a  2 R (d) a
g 
4
  g     3
 m   m  

ELECTROSTATICS 63
36. Two infinite planes each with uniform surface charge 38. If finding the electric field around a surface is given by
density  C / m are kept in such a way that the angle
2
 q
E  enclosed is applicable. In the formula  0 is permittivity
between them is 30 . The electric field in the region shown
0 0 A
between them is given by; (2020)
of free space, A is area of Gaussian surface and qenc is
charge enclosed by the Gaussian surface. This equation
can be used in which of the following situation? (2020)
(a) Only when the Gaussian surface is an equipotential
surface.

(b) Only when E  constant on the surface..
  3   1  
(a) 2    1   y  x

0  2  2  (c) Equipotential surface and E is constant on the
surface.
(d) for any choice of Gaussian surfaces.
  3   1 
 1   y  x 39. Consider two charged metallic spheres S1and S2 of radii
(b) 2 
0  2  2  r1 and r2 respectively. The electric fields E 1(on S1) and
E1 r1
  3   1  E2(on S2) on their surfaces are such that 
(c) 2  1  2  y  2 x  E2 r2 . Then

0    the ratio V1(on S1) /V2(on S2) of the electrostatic potentials
on each sphere is (2020)
  3   1 
1   y  x  r1 
2
(d)
2 0  2  2  r1
(a) (b)  
r2  r2 
37. Three charged particles A, B and, C with charge –4q, +2q
and –2q present on the circumference of a circle of radius 3
‘d’. The charges particles A, C and centre O of the circle r2  r1 
formed an equilateral triangle as shown in figure. Electric (c) (d)  
r1  r2 
field at O along x– direction is: (2020)
40. A particle of mass m and charge is released from rest in
uniform electric field. If there is no other force on the
particle, the dependence of its speed v on the distance x
travelled by it is correctly given by (graphs are schematic
and not drawn to scale) (2020)
(a) (b)
(c) (d)
3q 2 3q
(a) (b)
4 0 d 2  0 d 2
3q 3 3q
(c) (d)
 0 d 2 4 0 d 2
ELECTROSTATICS 64
41. A solid sphere having a radius R and uniform charge 44. A charged particle (mass m and charge q) moves along X
density  . If a sphere of radius R/2 is carved out of it as axis with velocity V0. When it passes through the origin it

shown in the figure. Find the ratio of the magnitude of enters a region having uniform electric field E   Ejˆ
electric field at point A and B (2020)
which extend upto x = d. Equation of path of electron in
the region x > d is : (2020)
2 qEd d 
17 18 (a) y  qEd x (b) y    x
(a) (b) mV02 mV02 2 
54 54
qEd
18 21 (c) y   x  d (d) y  qEd2 x
(c) (d) mV02 mV0
34 34
45. A small point mass carrying some positive charge on it, is
42. An electric dipole of moment C m at the origin (0,0,0). The
released from the edge of a table. There is a uniform electric

electric field due to this dipole at r  iˆ  3 ˆj  5kˆ is field in this region in the horizontal direction. Which of
parallel to the following options then correctly describe the
trajectory of the mass ? (Curves are drawn schematically
  
 
[Note that r . p  0 ] p   iˆ  3 ˆj  2 kˆ  10 29 (2020) and are not to scale). (2020)
(a) iˆ  3 ˆj  2kˆ (b) iˆ  3 ˆj  2kˆ
(c) iˆ  3 ˆj  2kˆ (d) iˆ  3 ˆj  2kˆ


43. An electric field E  4 xiˆ   y 2  1 ˆj N / C , passes through
the box shown in figure. The flux of the electric field
through surface ABCD and BCEF are marked as 1 and (a) (b)
 Nm2 
2 , then difference between 1  2  is   (2020)
 C 
(c) (d)
ELECTROSTATICS 65
46. A charge is distributed over two concentric conducting 49. Two charged thin infinite plane sheets of uniform surface
thin spherical shells radii r and R (R > r). If the surface
charge densities on the two shells are equal, the electric charge density  + and - , where + > - , intersect
potential at the common centre is : (2020) at right angle. Which of the following best represents the
electric field lines for this system: (2020)
(a)
1 (2R  r)
(a) Q
4 0 (R 2  r 2 )
1 (R  r)
(b) Q
4 0 (R 2  r 2 )
(b)
1 (R  r)
(c) Q
4 0 2(R 2  r 2 )
1 (R  2r) Q
(d)
4 0 2(R 2  r 2 )
2
47. Two isolated conducting spheres S1 and S2 of radius R
3
1
and R have 12 C and 3C charges, respectively, and (c)
3
are at a large distance from each other. They are now
connected by a conducting wire. A long time after this is
done the charges on S1 and S2 are respectively : (2020)
(a) 6 C and 3 C (b) 4.5 C on both
(c)  4.5 C and  4.5 C (d) 3 C and 6 C

48. Concentric metallic hollow spheres of radii R and 4R hold
charges Q1 and Q2 respectively. Given that surface charge
densities of the concentric spheres are equal, the potential (d)
difference V (R) – V (4R) is : (2020)
3Q 2
(a) 4 R
0
3Q1
(b) 4 R
0
3Q1
(c)
16 0 R
Q2
(d) 4 R
0
ELECTROSTATICS 66
50. Two point charges +4q and –q fixed on the x-axis at

 qQ 
(a) 2  2y   g
d d
x = - and x = , respectively. If a third point  4 0 R (R  y) m 
2 2
charges ‘q’ is taken from the origin to x = d along the  QqR 
semicircle as shown in the figure, the energy of the (b) 2  2y   g
3
charge will; (2020)  4 0 R (R  y) m 
 qQ 
(c) 2  2y   g
 4 0 R (R  y) m 
 qQ 
(d) 2  2y   g 
2
 4 0 R ym 
q2 4q 2 53. Ten charges are placed on the circumference of a circle of
(a) decrease by (b) decrease by
40 d 30 d radius R with constant angular separation between
successive charges. Alternate charges 1, 3, 5, 7, 9 have
3q 2 2q 2 charge (+q) each, while 2, 4, 6, 8, 10 have charge (–q) each.
(c) increase by (d) increase by The potential V and the electric field E at the centreof the
40 d 30 d
circle are respectively. (Take V = 0 at infinity) (2020)
51. A particle of charge and mass m is subjected to an electric
(a) V = 0; E = 0
field E = E0 (1 – ax2) in the x-direction, where a and E0 are
constants. Initially the particle was at rest at x = 0. Other 10q 10q
than the initial position the kinetic energy of the particle (b) V  ;E
4 0 R 4 0 R 2
becomes zero when the distance of the particle from the
origin is: (2020)
10q
(c) V  0; E 
4 0 R 2
2
(a) (b) a
a 10q
(d) V  4  R ; E  0
0
3 1
(c) (d) 54. Charges Q1 and Q2 are at points A and B of a right angle
a a triangle OAB (see figure). The resultant electric field at
52. A solid sphere of radius R carries a charge +Q distributed point O is perpendicular to the hypotenuse, then Q1/Q2is
uniformly over its volume. A very small point like piece of proportional to: (2020)
it of mass m gets detached from the bottom of the sphere
and falls down vertically under gravity. This piece carries
charge q. If it acquires a speed  when it has fallen through
a vertical height y (see figure), then : (assume the remaining
portion to be spherical). (2020)
x2 x22
(a) (b) 2
x1 x1
x13 x1
(c) 3 (d)
x2 x2
ELECTROSTATICS 67
55. Consider the force of on a charge ‘q’ due to a uniformly 58. A point charge of +12  C is at distance 6 cm vertically
charged spherical shell of radius R carrying charge
above the centre of a square of idea 12 cm as shown in
distributed uniformly over it. Which one of the following
figure. The magnitude of th elctric flux throught the square
statements is true for F, if ‘q’ is placed at distance r from
will be _____ ×103 Nm2/C. (2021)
the centre of the shell? (2020)
1 qQ
(a)  F  0 for r  R
4 0 R 2
(b) F 
1 qQ
for r  R
4 0 r 2
(c) F  1 qQ
for all r
4 0 r 2
59. 512 identical drops of mercury are charged to a potential of
1 qQ 2V each. The drops are joined to from a single drop. The
(d) F  for r  R
4 0 R 2 potential of this drop is ____ V. (2021)
60. Two identical conducting spheres with negligible volume
56. Two identical electric point dipoles have dipole moments
have 2.1nC and –0.1 nC charges, respectively. They are
 
p1  pi and p2   pi and are held on the x axis at brought into contact and then separated by a distance of
distance ‘a’ from each other. When released, they move 0.5 m. The electrostatie force acting between the spheres
along the x-axis with the direction of their dipole moments is ______ ×10–9N.
remaining unchanged. If the mass of each dipole is ‘m’,
their speed when they are infinitely far apart is: (2020)  1 
Given : 4 0  9  109 SI unit  (2021)
 
p 3 p 1
(a) (b) 61. Two small spheres each of mass 10 mg are suspended
a 2 0 ma a  0 ma from a point by threads 0.5m long. They are equally
charged and repel each other to a distance of 0.20 m. The
p 1 p 2 a
(c) a 2  ma (d) charge on each of the sphere is  10( 8) C . The value of
0 a  0 ma 21
 ‘ a‘ will be [Given g = 10 ms–2] (2021)
57.  
An electric field E  4 xiˆ  y 2  1 ˆj N / C , passes 62. 27 similar drops of mercury are maintained at 10V each. All
through the box shown in figure. The flux of the electric these spherical drops combine into a single big drop. The
potential energy of the bigger drop is how many times
field through surface ABCD and BCEF are marked as 1
that of a smaller drop. (2021)
 Nm 2  63. Two electrons each are fixed at a distance ‘2d’. Proton
and 2 , then difference between 1  2  is   placed at the midpoint is displaced slightly by a distance x
 C  (x < < d) perpendicular to the line joining the two fixed
(2020) charges. Proton will execute simple harmonic motion hav-
ing angular frequency : (m = mass of charged particle)
(2021)
1 1
 q2 2  20 md 3  2
(a)  3  (c)  
 20 md 
2
 q 
1 1
 2q 2  2  0 md 3  2
(c)  3  (d)  
  0 md 
2
 2q 
ELECTROSTATICS 68
64. Find the electric field at point P (as shown in figure) on the 69. A charge ‘q’ is placed at one corner of a cube as shown in
perpendicualr bisector of a uniformly charged thin wire of 
length L carrying charge Q. The distance of the point P figure. The flux of electrstatic field E through the shaded
area is : (2021)
3
from the centre of the rod is a  L (2021)
2
q q
(a) 24 (b) 4
Q 3Q 0 0
A. 4 L2 B.
0 40 L2
q q
(c) 48 (d) 8
Q Q 0 0
C. 3 L2 D.
0 2 3 0 L2 70. Given below are two statements:
65. Find out the surface charge density at the intersection of Statement I : An electric dipole is placed at the centre of a
point x = 3 plane and x-axis, in the region of uniform line hollow sphere. The flux of electric field through the sphere
charge of 8nC/m lying along the z-axis in free space. is zero but the electric field is not zero anywhere in the
sphere.
(2021)
Statement II: If R is the radius of a solid metallic sphere
(a) 0.07 nCm–2 (b) 47.88 C/m
and Q be the total charge on it.
(c) 0.424 nC m–2 (d) 4.0 nC m–2
The electric field at any point on the spherical surface of
66. An oil drop of radius 2 mm with a density 3 g cm–3 is held radius r in the light of the above statement, choose the
stationary under a constant electric field 3.55 × 105 V m–1 in correct answer from the options give below
the Milikan’s oil drop experiment. What is the number of
(2021)
excess electrons that the oil drop will possess?
(a) Bot statement I and Statement II are false
Consider g = 9.81 m/s2 (2021)
(b) Statement I is false but Statement II is true
(a) 48.8 × 1011 (b) 1.73 × 1012
(c) Statement I is ture but Statement II is false
(c) 1.73 5 1010 (d) 17.3 × 1010
(d) Both Statement I and Statement II are true
67. The electric field in a region is given by
71. Find out the surface charge density at the intersection of
 3  4  point x = 3 plane and x-axis, in the region of uniform line
E   E 0 i  E 0 j  N / C . The ratio of flux of reported
5 5  charge of 8nC/m lying along the z-axis in free space.
field reactangular surface of area 0.2 m2 ( parallel to y - z (2021)
plane) to that of the surface of area 0.3 m2 (parallel to x -z (a) 0.07 nCm –2
(b) 47.88 C/m
plane) is a : b, where a = ______. (c) 0.424 nC m–2 (d) 4.0 nC m–2
  
68. The electric field ina region is given by E  2 E 0 i  3 E 0 j
3 5
N
with E 0  4.0  103 . The flux of this field through a
C
reactangular surface area 0.4 m2 parallel to the Y - Z plane
is _____Nm2C–1 (2021)
ELECTROSTATICS 69
EXERCISE - 3: ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS

Single Choice Questions
2ke2 8 ke 2
(a) (b)
1. A charge +is fixed at each of the points x = x0, x = 3x0, x r 5 r
= 5x0, ..... ad inf. on the x axis, and a charge –is fixed at each ke2 8 ke2
of the points x = 2x0, x = 4x0, x = 6x0, ...... ad inf. Here x0 is a (c) (d)
r r
positive constant. Take the electric potential at a point
7. Two identical particles of same mass each m are having
due to a charge at a distance r from it to be Q/(40r). Then, same magnitude of charge Q. One particle is initially at
the potential at the origin due to the above system of rest on a frictionless horizontal plane and the other particle
charges is is projected directly towards the first particle from a very
q large distance with a velocity v. The distance of closest
(a) 0 (b) 8 x In2 approach of the particle will be
0 0
q In2 1 4Q2 1 2 Q2
(c)  (d) 4 x (a) (b)
4 0 m 2 4 0 m 2
0 0
2. Two equal negative charges –are fixed at points (0, –a) 1 Q2 1 4 Q2

(c) (d)
and (0, a) on y-axis. A positive charge is released from rest 4 0 m 2  2 4 0 m 2  2
at the point (2a, 0) on the x-axis. The charge will 8. An alpha particle of energy 5 MeV is scattered through
(a) execute simple harmonic motion about the origin 180° by a fixed uranium nucleus. The distance of closest
approach is of the order of
(b) move to the origin remain at rest –10
(a) 1 Å (b) 10 cm
(c) move to infinity –12 –15
(c) 10 cm (d) 10 cm
(d) execute oscillatory but not simple harmonic motion
9. An electric dipole is placed at origin and is directed along the
3. Two point charges +and –are held fixed at (–d, 0) and x-axis. At a point P far away from the dipole the electric
(d, 0) respectively of a x-y co-ordinate system. Then field is parallel to y-axis. OP makes an angle with x axis,
(a) the electric field E at all points on the x-axis has the then
same direction (a) tan   3 (b) tan   2
(b) work has to be done in bringing at a test charge from 
to the origin 1
(c) tan   (d) = 45°
(c) electric field at all point on y-axis is along x-axis 2
(d) the dipole moment is 2qd along the x-axis 10. The electric dipole is situated in an electric field as shown
4. The charge and -2are placed at some distance .The locus in adjacent figure. The dipole and the electric field are
of points in the plane of the charges where the potential both in the plane of the paper. The dipole is rotated about
is zero will be an axis perpendicular to the plane of the paper about its
axis at a point A in anti-clockwise direction. If the angle of
(a) straight line (b) circle rotation is measured with respect to the direction of the
(c) a parabola (d) an ellipse electric field, then the torque for different values of the
5. How should three charges q, 2and 8be arranged on a 9 cm angle of rotation will be represented in fig. given below by
long line such that the potential energy of the system is the (clockwise torque +ve)
minimum ?
(a) at a distance of 3 cm from 2
(b) at a distance of 5 cm from 2q
(c) 2at a distance of 7 cm from q
(d) 2at a distance of 9 cm from q
6. A proton and an -particle are situated at r distance apart.
At very large distance apart when released, the kinetic
(a) Curve (1) (b) Curve (2)
energy of proton will be (c) Curve (3) (d) Curve (4)
ELECTROSTATICS 70
11. An electric dipole is situated in an electric field of uniform 16. A particle of specific charge (q/m) enters into uniform
intensity E whose dipole moment is p and moment of inertia electric field E along the centre line, with velocity
is I. If the dipole is displaced slightly from the equilibrium
position, then the angular frequency of its oscillations is qE
v  2q . After how much time it will collide with one
md
1/ 2 3/ 2
 pE   pE  of the plates (figure)
(a)   (b)  
 I   I 
1/ 2 1/ 2
 I   p
(c)   (d)  
 pE   IE 
12. Two identical point charges are placed at a separation of
d. P is a point on the line joining the charges, at a distance
x from any one charge. The field at P is E, E is plotted
against x for values of x from close to zero to slightly less
than d. Which of the following represents the resulting
curve d
(a) (b) (a) Not possible (b) 2 V
md 2 md
(c) (d)
qE qE
17. A wire is bent in the form of a regular hexagon of side a
(c) (d) and a total charge is distributed uniformly over it. One
side of the hexagon is removed. The electric field due to
the remaining sides at the centre of the hexagon is
Q Q
(a) 2 (b)
12 3  0 a 16 3  0 a 2
13. A metallic solid sphere is placed in a uniform electric fied.
The lines of force follow the path (s) shown in figure as Q Q
(c) (d)
8 2  0 a 2 8 2 0 a 2
18. In the figure shown, if the linear charge density is , then the
net electric field at O will be
(a) 1 (b) 2
(c) 3 (d) 4
14. Two equal charges are separated by a distance d. A third
charge placed on a perpendicular bisector at x distance
will experience maximum coulomb force when k
(a) Zero (b)
d d R
(a) x  (b) x 
2 2
2 k 2 k
d d (c) (d)
R R
(c) x  (d) x 
2 2 2 3 19. An electron moves round a circular path of radius 0.1 m
15. If an electron has an initial velocity in a direction different about an infinite linear charge of density +1 C/m. The
from that of an uniform electric field, the path of the electron speed of the electron will be
is (a) 5.6 × 103 m/s (b) 2.8 × 105 m/s
(a) A straight line (b) A circle
(c) 5.6 × 107 m/s (d) 2.8 × 107 m/s
(c) An ellipse (d) A parabola
ELECTROSTATICS 71
20. An electron having charge e and mass m starts from lower 27. Figure shows two concentric, conducting shells of radii r
plate of two metallic plates separated by a distance d, if and 2r. The outer shell is given a charge Q. The amount of
the potential difference between the plates is V, the time charge that will appear on outer surface of inner shell if
taken by the electron to reach the upper plate is given by inner shell is grounded
(ignore gravity)
2md 2 md 2
(a) (b)
eV eV
md 2 2md 2
(c) (d)
2eV eV
21. A particle of mass ‘m’ and charge ‘q’ is accelerated through
a potential difference of V volt, its energy will be Q Q
(a)  (b) 
(a) qV (b) mqV 2 2
(c) – 2Q (d) + 2Q
q q
(c)   V (d) Comprehensive Type Questions
m mV
Passage -1
22. A ring of charge with radius of 50 cm has gap of 0.002  m.
Using the following passage, solve Q. 28
If the ring carries a charge of 1 C. What is the electric field Consider an evacuated cylindrical chamber of height h
at the centre. having rigid conducting plates at the ends and an
(a) 8.5 × 107 N/C (b) 7.2 × 107 N/C insulating curved surface as shown in the figure. A number
(c) 3.2 × 10 N/C
7
(d) 4.5 × 107 N/C of spherical balls made of a light weight and soft material
23. A thin conducting ring of radius r has an electric charge + Q, and coated with a conducting material are placed on the
if a point charge is placed at the centre of the ring, then bottom plate. The balls have a radius r << h . Now a high
tension of the wire of ring will be voltage source (HV) is connected across the conducting
plates such that the bottom plate is at + V0 and the top
Qq Qq plate at –V0. Due to their conducting surface, the balls
(a) 2 (b)
80 r 4 0 r 2 will get charged, will become equipotential with the plate
and are repelled by it. The balls will eventually collide
Qq Qq with the top plate, where the coefficient of restitution can
(c) 2 2 (d) be taken to be zero due to the soft nature of the material
8 0 r 4 2  0 r 2
of the balls. The electric field in the chamber can be
24. n small drops of same size are charged to V volt each. If considered to be that of a parallel plate capacitor. Assume
they coalesce to form a single large drop, then its potential that there are no collisions between the balls and the
will be interaction between them is negligible. (Ignore gravity)
–1
(a) Vn (b) V n
1/3 2/3
(c) V n (d) V n
25. A solid conducting sphere having a charge is surrounded
by an uncharged concentric conducting hollow spherical
shell. Let the potential difference between the surface of
the solid sphere and that of the outer surface of the hollow
shell be V. If the shell is now given a change of –3Q, the
new potential difference between the same two surfaces
is (a) V (b) 2V 28. Two identical thin rings, each of radius R metres, are
(c) 4V (d) –2V coaxially placed a distance R metres apart. If Q1 coul, and
26. A hollow sphere of radius 2R is charged to V volt and Q2 coul, are respectively the charges uniformly spread on
the two rings, the work done in moving a charge from the
another small sphere of radius R is charged to V/2 volt.
centre of one ring to that of the other is
Then the smaller sphere is placed inside the bigger sphere
without changing the net charge on each sphere. The (a) zero (b) q(Q1  Q 2 ) ( 2  1)
potential difference between the two spheres would be (4 20 R)
(a) 3V/2 (b) V/4
(c) V/2 (d) V (c) q 2(Q1  Q 2 ) (d) q(Q1  Q 2 ) ( 2  1)
(40 R) (4 2 0 R)
ELECTROSTATICS 72
Passage - 2 37. A charge of 1 C is given to one plate of a parallel-plate

Using the following passage, solve Q. 29 to 31 capacitor of capacitance 0.1 F and a charge of 2C is
Three large plates A,B and C are placed parallel to each given to the other plate. Find the potential difference, in
other and charges are given as shown below volts developed between the plates.
–3C 4C 5C
Subjective Questions
38. Three particles, each of mass 1 gm and carrying a charge
q, are suspended from a common point by insulated
massless strings, each 100 cm long. If the particles are in
equilibrium and are located at the corners of an equilateral
triangle of side length 3 cm, calculate the charge on each
2
particle. (Take g = 10 m/s ).
39. Two fixed, equal, positive charges, each of magnitude
–5
A B C 5 × 10 coulomb are located at points A and B separated
by a distance of 6 m. An equal and opposite charge moves
Then answer the following questions towards them along the line COD, the perpendicular
29. The charge that appears on the left surface of plate B is bisector of the line AB.
(a) –3C (b) 3C
(c) 6C (d) 5C
30. The charge on the inner surface of plate C if the plate B is
earthed
(a) –3C (b) 3C
(c) 6C (d) 5C
31. The charge on left surface of B if B and C are both earthed
(a) –3C (b) 3C
(c) 6C (d) 5C The moving charge, when it reaches the point C at a
True/False distance of 4m from O, has a kinetic energy of 4 joules.
Calculate the distance of the farthest point D which the
32. A small metal ball is suspended in a uniform electric field negative charge will reach before returning towards C.
with the help of an insulated thread. If high energy X- ray
40. A thin fixed ring of radius 1 metre has a positive charge
beam falls on the ball, the ball will be deflected in the –5
direction of the field. 1 × 10 coulomb uniformly distributed over it. A particle of
–6
33. A ring of radius R carries uniformly distributed charge + Q. mass 0. 9 gm and having a negative charge of 1 × 10
A point charge – is placed on the axis of the ring at a coulomb is placed on the axis at a distance of 1 cm from
distance 2R from the centre of the ring and released from the centre of the ring. Show that the motion of the
rest. The particle executes a simple harmonic motion along negatively charged particle is approximately simple
the axis of the ring. harmonic. Calculate the time period of oscillations.
Integer Type Questions 41. A non-conducting disc of radius a and uniform positive
surface charge density  is placed on the ground with its
34. A solid sphere of radius R has a charge distributed in its
axis vertical. A particle of mass m and positive charge is
volume with charge density = kra, where k and a are
constant and r is the distance from its centre. If the electric dropped, along the axis of the disc from a height H with zero
field are at r = R/2 is 1/8 times that at r = R. What is the initial velocity. The particle has q/m = 40g/.
value of a. (a) Find the value of H if the particle just reaches the disc.
35. Two point charges 4C and –10C are placed 10 cm apart (b) Sketch the potential energy of the particle as a function
in air. An dielectric slab of large length and breadth but of of its height and find its equilibrium position.
thickness 5 cm is placed between them. Calculate the force
(in newton) of attraction between the charges if the relative 42. Three concentric spherical metallic shells, A, B and C of
permittivity of the dielectric is 9. radii a, b and c (a < b < c) have surface charge densities
36. The linear charge density on a dielectric ring of radius R is , –  and  respectively.
 (i) Find the potential of the three shells A, B and C.

varying with angle  as    0 cos   where  0 is (ii) If the shells A and C are at the same potential, obtain
2
constant . What is potential at the centre O of the ring ? the relation between the radii a, b and c.
ELECTROSTATICS 73
43. (a) A charge of is uniformly distributed over a spherical 49. A charge is placed at the centre of the line joining two
volume of radius R. Obtain an expression for the energy of equal charges Q. The system of the three charges will be
the system. in equilibrium if is equal to :
(b) What will be the corresponding expression for the (a) – Q/2 (b) – Q/4
energy needed to completely disassemble the planet earth (c) + Q/4 (d) + Q/2
against the gravitational pull amongst its constituent 50. A conducting sphere S1 of radius r is attached to an insulating
particles ? handle. Another conducting sphere S2 of radius R is
Assume the earth to be a sphere of uniform mass density. mounted on an insulating stand, S2 is initially uncharged.
Calculate this energy, given the product of the mass and S1 is given a charge brought into contact with S2 and
31
the radius of the earth to be 2.5 × 10 kg-m. removed. S1 is recharged such that the charge on it is
(c) If the same charge as in part (a) above is given to a again and it is again brought into contact with S2 and
spherical conductor of the same radius R, what will be the removed. This procedure is repeated n times.
energy of the system ? (a) Find the electrostatic energy of S2 after n such contacts
44. A circular ring of radius R with uniform positive charge with S1.
density  per unit length is located in the y-z plane with its (b) What is the limiting value of this energy as n  ?
centre at the origin O. A particle of mass m and positive
Multiple Choice Questions
charge is projected from the point P (R 3, 0, 0) on the 51. A small sphere of mass m and having charge is suspended
positive x-axis directly towards O, with an initial speed v. by a light thread
Find the smallest (non-zero) value of the speed v such (a) Tension in thread must reduce if another charged
that the particle does not return to P. sphere is placed vertically below it
45. A charge is distributed over two concentric hollow spheres (b) Tension in thread is greater that weight mg if another
of radii r and R (> r) such that the surface densities are equal. charged sphere is held in same horizontal line in which
Find the potential at the common centre. first sphere stays in equilibrium
46. Two fixed charges – 2and are located at the points with (c) Tension in thread is always equal to weight mg
coordinates (–3a, 0) and (+3a, 0) respectively in the x-y (d) Tension may increase to double its original value if
plane. another charge is below it
(a) Show that all points in the x-y plane where the electric 52. The correct options is(are)
potential due to the two charges is zero, lie on a circle Find
(a) charge cannot exist without mass but mass can exist
its radius and the location of its centre.
without charge
(b) Give the expression V (x) at a general point on the x-axis
(b) charge is conserved but mass is not conserved
and sketch the function V (x) on the whole x-axis.
(c) charge is independent of state of rest or motion
(c) If a particle of charge +starts form rest at the centre of
(d) mass is independent of state of rest or motion
the circle, show by a short quantative argument that the
particle eventually crosses the circle. Find its speed when 53. A deuteron and an alpha particle are placed in same
it does so. uniform electric field .The forces acting on them are F1
and F2 and their acceleration are a1 and a2 respectively.
47. Three point charges q, 2and 8are to be placed on a 9 cm
long straight line. Find the positions where the charges (a) F1 = F2 (b) a1 = a2
should be placed such that the potential energy of this (c) F1  F2 (d) a1  a2
system is minimum. In this situation, what is the electric 54. The electric field in a region is directed outward and is
field at the position of the charge due to the other two proportional to the distance r from the origin. Taking
charges ? electric potential to be zero at origion
48. Two isolated metallic solid spheres of radii R and 2R are (a) it is uniform in the region
charged such that both of these have same charge density (b) it is propotional to r
. The spheres are located far away from each other and (c) it is proportional to r2
connected by a thin conducting wire. Find the new charge
(d) it decreases as one goes away from origin
density on the bigger sphere.
ELECTROSTATICS 74
55. Ring with uniform charge and radius R is placed in y–z 61. In a uniformly charge dielectric sphere a very thin tunnel
plane with its centre at origin. Then has been made along the diameter shown in figure. A
(a) the electric field at origin is maximum particle with charge –having mass m is released from rest
at one end of the tunnel for the situation described, mark
kQ out the correct statements
(b) The potential at origin is
R
(a) Charged particle will perform SHM about the centre of
kQ sphere as mean position
(c) the field at the point (x, 0, 0) is
R 2  X2
20 mR 3
(d) maximum value of electric field on the axis will be (b) The time period of the particle is 2
Qq
q (c) speed of the particle crossing the mean position is
6 3  0 R 2
Qq
56. Two metallic spheres have same radii. One of them is solid
40Rm
and other is hollow. They are charged to same potential.
The charge on former is q1 and on latter is q2. We have (d) Particle will perform oscillations but not SHM
(a) q1 = q2
62. An electric charge (= 20 × 10–9C) is placed at a point (1, 2, 4).
(b) Electric field inside both of them is zero. At the point (3, 2, 1) the electric
(c) Electrostatic potential in both the spheres at an inside
(a) Field will increase by a factor K if the space between
point is same as on surface
the points is filled with a dielectric of dielectric constant
(d) Charge in both is effectively concentrated at the centre K
for field strength at an external point.
(b) Field will be along y axis
57. A spherical charged conductor has surface charge
density. The electric field on its surface is E and electric (c) Potential will be approximately 50 V volt
potential of the conductor is V. Now the radius of the (d) Field will have no y component.
sphere is halved keeping the charge to be constant.The
63. In the circuit shown in steady state
new value of electric field and potential would be
(a) 4E (b) 2V
(c) 2E (d) 4V
58. In uniform electric field equipotential surfaces must
(a) be plane surfaces
(b) be normal to the direction of the field
(c) be spaced that surfaces having equal difference in
potential are equally spaced
(d) have decreasing potential along field
59. When the separation between two charges is increased (a) charge across 4F capacitor is 20 C
(a) electric potential energy increases (b) charge across 4F capacitor is 10 C
(b) electric potential energy decreases
(c) potential difference across 4F capacitor is 5 Volt
(c) force between them decreases
(d) potential difference across 4F capacitor is 10 Volt
(d) electric potential energy may increase or decreases
64. Two conducting spheres of unequal radii are given
60. Two point charges 2 and 8 are placed at distance d apart.
charges such that they have the same charge density. If
A third charge –is placed at distance d/3 from 2on line
they are brought in contact
joining the charges 2and 8q. Then
(a) Electric potential energy of the system is maximum (a) some heat will be produced
(b) Electric potential energy of system is minimum (b) charge will flow from larger to smaller sphere
(c) charge –is in unstable equilibrium (c) charge will flow from smaller to larger sphere
(d) charge –is in stable equilibrium (d) no charge will be exchanged between the spheres
ELECTROSTATICS 75
Match the Column Type Questions 68. Five point charges, each of value + coul, are placed on
65. Different shaped charged bodies and their corresponding five vertices of a regular hexagon of side L metres. The
electric fields are mentioned Match the Column 1 with magnitude of the force on the point charge of value –
Column 2. coul. placed at the centre of the hexagen is ............ newton.
Column-1 Column-2
(a) Spherical charged (P) At centre electric field
conductor is zero
(b) Infinite plane sheet of (Q) Electric field is uniform
charge
(c) Uniformly charged (R) Electric field is
ring discontiunous at thesurface
(d) Sphere with uniform (S) At the surface electric
volume distribution of field is continous and
charge maximum.
Fill in the blanks 69. An infinite number of electric charges each equal to 5
nano-coulomb (magnitude) are placed along X-axis at
66. A point charge moves from point P to point S along the x = 1cm, x = 2 cm, x = 4 cm, x = 8 cm ………. and so on. In
path PQRS (fig.) in a uniform electric field E pointing parallel the setup if the consecutive charges have opposite sign,
to the positive direction of the x-axis.The coordinates of then the electric field in Newton/Coulomb at x = 0 is
the points P, Q, R and S are (a, b, O), (2a, O, O) (a, –b, O)
and (O, O, O) respectively. The work done by the field in  1 
the above process is given by the expression..........   9  109 N  m 2 / c2 
 4  0 
(a) 12 × 104 (b) 24 × 104
(c) 36 × 104 (d) 48 × 104
70. Two small balls having equal positive charges (coulomb)
on each are suspended by two insulating strings of equal
length L (metre) from a hook fixed to a stand. The whole
set up is taken in a satellite into space where there is no
gravity (state of weightlessness). The angle between the
two strings is ............ and the tension in each string is
.......... newtons.
67. The electric potential V at any point x, y, z (all in metres) in
2
space is given by V = 4x volts. The electric field at the
point (1m, 0,2m) is ................ V/m.
ELECTROSTATICS 76
EXERCISE - 4 : PREVIOUS YEARS JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS

1. Three charges Q, +q and +q are placed at the vertices of a 5. Charges +q and –q are located at the corners of a cube of
right-angled isosceles triangle as shown. The net electrostatic side as show in the figure. Find the work done to separate
energy of the configuration is zero if Q is equal to the charges to infinite distance. (2003)
(2000)
6. A metallic shell has a point charge kept inside its cavity.

Which one of the following diagrams correctly represents
q  2q the electric lines of forces? (2003)
(a) (b) (a) (b)
1 2 2 2
(c) –2q (d) +q
2. Three positive charges of equal value are placed at the
vertices of an equilateral triangle. The resulting lines of force
should be sketched as in (2001)
(a) (b)
(c) (d)
(c) (d)
7. A positive point charge is fixed at origin. A dipole with a

dipole moment p is placed along the x-axis far away from

the origin with p pointing along positive x-axis. Find : (a)
the kinetic energy of the dipole when it reaches a distance d
3. A uniform electric field pointing in positve x-direction exists from the origin, and (b) the force experienced by the charge
in a region. Let A be the origin, B be the point on the x-axis at this moment. (2003)
at x = +1 cm and C be the point on the y-axis at y = +1 cm. 8. Consider the charge configuration and a spherical Gaussian
Then the potentials at the points A, B and C satisfy : surface as shown in the figure. When calculating the flux of
(2001) the electric field over the spherical surface, the electric field
(a) VA < VB (b) VA > VB will be due to (2004)
(c) VA < VC (d) VA > VC
–3
4. A small ball of mass 2 × 10 kg having a charge of 1 C is
suspended by a string of length 0.8 m. Another identical
ball having the same charge is kept at the point of
suspension. Determine the minimum horizontal velocity
which should be imparted to the lower ball, so that it can
make complete revolution. (2001) (a) q2 (b) only the positive charges
(c) all the charges (d) +q1 and –q1
ELECTROSTATICS 77
9. There are two large parallel metallic plates S1 and S2 carrying Then which option(s) are correct
surface charge densities 1 and 2 respectively (1 > 2) (a) Total charge within 2R0 is q
placed at a distance d apart in vacuum. Find the work done (b) Total electrostatic energy for r  R0 is zero
(c) At r = R0 electric field is discontinuous
by the electric field in moving a point charge a distance a (a
(d) There will be no charge anywhere except at r = R0
< d) from S1 towards S2 along a line making an angle /4 with
14. Positive and negative point charges of equal magnitude are
the normal to the plates. (2004)
 a 
kept at  0,0,  and  0,0,  respectively. The work done
a
10. Six charges of equal magnitude, 3 positive and 3 negative
 2  2 
are to be placed on PQRSTU corners of a regular hexagon,
such that field at the centre is double that of what it would by the electric field when another positive point charge is
moved from (–a, 0, 0) to (0, a, 0) is (2007)
have been if only one +ve charge is placed at R.
(a) positive
(2004) (b) negative
(c) zero
(d) depends on the path connecting the initial and final
positions
15. Consider a neutral conducting sphere. A positive point
charge is placed outside the sphere. The net charge on the
sphere is then (2007)
(a) +, +, +, –, –, – (b) –, +, +, +, –, – (a) negative and distributed uniformly over the surface of
the sphere
(c) –, +, +, –, +, – (d) +, –, +, –, +, –
(b) negative and appears only at the point on the sphere
11. A conducting bubble of radius a, thickness t (t << a) has closest to the point charge
potential V. Now the bubble collapses into a droplet. Find (c) negative and distributed non-uniformly over the entire
the potential of the droplet. surface of the sphere
(2005) (d) zero
16. A spherical portion has been removed from a solid sphere
12. Three infinitely long charge sheets are placed as shown in
having a charge distributed uniformly in its volume as shown
figure. The electric field at point P is (2005) in the figure. The electric field inside the emptied space is
( 2007)
2 2
(a) k̂ (b)  k̂
0 0
4 4 (a) zero everywhere (b) non-zero and uniform

(c) k̂ (d)  k̂
0 0 (c) non-uniform (d) zero only at its centre
17. A long, hollow conducting cylinder is kept coaxially inside
13. For spherical symmetrical charge distribution, variation of another long, hollow conducting cylinder of larger radius.
electric potential with distance from centre is given in Both the cylinders are initially electrically neutral.
diagram. Given that (2006) (2007)
q (a) a potential difference appears between the two cylinders
q
V for r  R 0 and V  for r  R 0 when a charge density is given to the inner cylinder
40 R 0 40 r (b) a potential difference appears between the two cylinders
when a charge density is given to the outer cylinder
(c) no potential difference appears between the two
cylinders when a uniform line charge is kept along the axis
of the cylinders
(d) no potential difference appears between the two
cylinders when same charge density is given to both the
cylinders
ELECTROSTATICS 78
18. Consider a neutral conducting sphere. A positive point PASSAGE

charge is placed outside the sphere. The net charge on the The nuclear charge (Ze) is non-uniformly distributed within
sphere is then a nucleus of radius R. The charge density (r) (charge per
(2007) unit volume) is dependent only on the radial distance r from
(a) negative and distributed uniformly over the surface of the centre of the nucleus as shown in figure. The electric
the sphere field is only along the radial direction.
(b) negative and appears only at the point on the sphere
closest to the point charge
(c) negative and distributed non-uniformly over the entire
surface of the sphere
(d) zero
q q 2q
19. Consider a system of three charges , and  placed
3 3 3
at points A, B and C respectively, as shown in the figure. 21. The electric field at r = R is (2008)
Take O to be the centre of the circle of radius R and angle (a) independent of a
CAB = 60° (2008) (b) directly proportional to a
(c) directly proportional to a2
(d) inversely proportional to a
22. For a = 0, the value of d (maximum value of as shown in the
figure) is (2008)
3Ze 3Ze
(a) (b)
4R 3 R 3
4Ze Ze
(c) (d)
q 3R 3 3R 3
(a) The electric field at point O is directed along
80 R 2 23. The electric field within the nucleus is generally observed
the negative x–axis to be linearly dependent on r. This implies
(b) The potential energy of the system is zero (2008)
(c) The magnitude of the force between the charges at C R
(a) a = 0 (b) a 
q 2 2
and B is
54  0 R 2 2R
(c) a = R (d) a 
3
q
(d) The potential at point O is 24. Three concentric metallic spherical shells of radii R, 2R and
12 0 R
3R are given charges Q1, Q2 and Q3, respectively. It is found
20. Statement I : For practical purposes, the earth is used as a that the surface charge densities on the outer surfaces of
reference at zero potential in electrical circuits. the shells are equal. Then, the ratio of the charges given to
Statement II : The electrical potential of a sphere of radius R the shells, Q1 : Q2 : Q3, is (2009)
with charge uniformly distributed on the surface is given by (a) 1 : 2 : 3 (b) 1 : 3 : 5
Q (c) 1 : 4 : 9 (d) 1 : 8 : 18
40 R . (2008) 25. Under the influence of the coulomb field of charge +Q, a
charge – is moving around it in an elliptical orbit. Find out
(a) Statement–I is true, Statement–II is true; Statement–II is the correct statement(s). (2009)
the correct explanation for Statement–I. (a) The angular momentum of the charge – is constant
(b) If Statement–I is true, Statement–II is true; Statement–II is (b) The linear momentum of the charge –is constant
not a correct explanation for Statement–I.
(c) The angular velocity of the charge –is constant
(c) If Statement–I is true; Statement–II is false.
(d) The linear speed of the charge – is constant
(d) If Statement–I is false; Statement–II is true.
ELECTROSTATICS 79
26. Three concentric metallic spherical shells of radii R, 2R and (a) |Q1| > |Q2|
3R are given charges Q1, Q2 and Q3, respectively. It is found (b) |Q1| < |Q2|
that the surface charge densities on the outer surfaces of
the shells are equal. Then, the ratio of the charges given to (c) at a finite distance to the left of Q1 the electric field is zero
the shells, Q1 : Q2 : Q3, is (2009)
(a) 1 : 2 : 3 (b) 1 : 3 : 5 (d) at a finite distance to the right of Q2 the electric field is
(c) 1 : 4 : 9 (d) 1 : 8 : 18 zero
29. A tiny spherical oil drop carrying a net charge is balanced in
a
27. A disk of radius having a uniformly distributed charge 6C still air with a vertical uniform electric field of strength
4
81
a  105 Vm 1 . When the field is switched off, the drop is
is placed in the x–y plane with its centre at  , 0, 0  . A 7
 2  observed to fall with terminal velocity 2×10–3 ms–1. Given
rod of length a carrying a uniformly distributed charge 8C is g=9.8 ms–2, viscosity of the air = 1.8×10–5 Ns m–2 and the
a 5a density of oil = 900 kg m–3, the magnitude of charge is
placed on the x–axis from x  to x  . Two point
4 4 (2010)
(a) 1.6×10 C–19
(b) 3.2×10 C –19
charges –7C and 3C are placed at  a , a , 0  and

4 4  (c) 4.8×10 C–19
(d) 8.0×10–19 C
30. A uniformly charged thin spherical shell of radius R carries
 3a 3a  , respectively. Consider a cubical surface uniform surface charge density of per unit area. It is made
 , ,0 
 4 4  of two hemispherical shells, held together by pressing them
with force F. F is proportional to (2010)
a a a
formed by six surfaces x   , y   , z   . The
2 2 2
electric flux through this cubical surface is
(2009)
1 2
(a) 1  2 R 2 (b) R
0 0
1 2
(c) 1 
2
(d)
0 R 0 R 2
2C 2C 31. A spherical metal shell A of radius RA and a solid metal sphere
(a) (b)
0 0 B of radius RB (<RA) are kept far apart and each is given
charge +Q. Now they are connected by a thin metal wire.
10C 12C Then (2011)
(c) (d)
0 0
(a) Einside
A 0 (b) QA > QB
28. A few electric field lines for a system of two charges Q1 and
Q2 fixed at two different points on the x–axis are shown in A R B
the figure. These lines suggest that (c)   R (d) E on
A
surface
 E on
B
surface
B A
(2010)
32. Two large vertical and parallel metal plates having a
separation of 1 cm are connected to a DC voltage source of
potential difference X. A proton is released at rest midway
between the two plates. It is found to move at 45° to the
vertical just after release. Then X is nearly
(a) 1 × 10–5 V (b) 1 × 10–7 V
(c) 1 × 10–9 V (d) 1 × 10–10 V
ELECTROSTATICS 80
33. A spherical metal shell A of radius RA and a solid metal 36. A cubical region of side a has its centre at the origin. It
sphere B of radius RB (<RA) are kept far apart and each is encloses three fixed point charges, –at (0, –a/4, 0), +3at (0,
given charge +Q. Now they are connected by a thin metal 0, 0) and –at (0, +a/4, 0). Choose the correct option(s).
wire. Then (2011) (2012)
(a) Einside
A 0
(b) QA > QB
A R B
(c)   R
B A
(a) The net electric flux crossing the plane x = + a/2 is

(d) E on
A
surface
 E on
B
surface
equal to the net electric flux crossing the plane x = –a/2
34. Which of the following statement(s) is/are correct? (b) The net electric flux crossing the plane y = + a/2 is more
than the net electric flux crossing the plane y = –a/2
(2011)
q
(a) If the electric field due to a point charge varies as r–2.5 (c) The net electric flux crossing the entire region is 
0
instead of r–2, then the Gauss’s law will still be valid
(d) The net electric flux crossing the plane z = + a/2 is
(b) The Gauss’s law can be used to calculate the field equal to the net electric flux crossing the plane x = + a/2
distribution around an electric dipole 37. An infinitely long solid cylinder of radius R has a uniform
(c) If the electric field between two point charges is zero volume charge . It has a sphererical cavity of radius R/2
somewhere, then the sign of the two charges is the same with its centre on the axis of the cylinders, as shown in the
figure. The magnitude of the electric field at the point P,
(d) The work done by the external force in moving a unit which is at a distance 2R from the axis of the cylinder, is
positive charge from point A at potential VA to point B at
23 R
potential VB is (VB – VA) given by the expression 16k . The value of k is


35. Consider an electric field E  E 0 x,
ˆ where E0 is a constant. (2012)
The flux through the shaded area (as shown in the figure)
due to this field is (2011)
38. Two non-conducting solid spheres of radii R and 2R, having

uniform volume charge densities 1 and 2 respectively,
touch each other. The net electric field at a distance 2 R
from the centre of the smaller sphere, along the line joining
1
the centre of the spheres, is zero. The ratio  can be
(a) 2E0a2 (b) 2 E0 a 2 2
(2013)
2
E0 a 32
(c) E0a2 (d) (a) –4 (b) 
2 25
32
(c) (d) 4
25
ELECTROSTATICS 81
39. Two non-conducting sphere of radii R1 and R2 and carrying 42. Four charges Q1, Q2, Q3 and Q4 of same magnitude are fixed
uniform volume charge densities + and –, respectively, along the x axis at x = – 2a, –a, +a and +2a, respectively. A
are placed such that they partially overlap, as shown in the positive charge is placed on the positive y axis at a distance
figure. At all points in the overlapping region. b > 0. Four options of the signs of these charges are given
in List I. The direction of the forces on the charge is given in
(2013)
List II. Match List I with List II and select the correct answer
using the code given below the lists. (2014)
(a) the electrostatic field is zero

(b) the electrostatic potential is contant List I List II
(c) the electrostatic field is constant in magnitude P. Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 all positive 1. +x
(d) the electrostatic field has same direction Q. Q1, Q2 positive; Q3, Q4 negative 2. –x
R. Q1, Q4 positive; Q2, Q3 negative 3. +y
40. Let E1 (r), E2 (r) and E3 (r) be the respective electric fields at
a distance r from a point charge Q, an infinitely long wire S. Q1, Q3 positive; Q2, Q4 negative 4. –y
with constant linear charge density  and an infinite plane Codes :
with uniform surface charge density  . If E1 (r0) = E2 (r0) = E3
(a) P -3, Q-1, R-4, S-2 (b) P-4, Q-2, R-3, S-1
(r0) at a given distance r0, then (2014)
(c) P-3, Q-1, R-2, S-4 (d) P-4, Q-2, R-1, S-3
(a) Q  4r02 43. The figure below depict two situations in which two
infinitely long static line charges of constant positive line
 charge density  are kept parallel to each other. In their
(b) r0  resulting electric field, point charges and –are kept in
2
equilibrium between them. The point charges are confined
(c) E1(r0/2) = 2 E2 (r0/2) to move in the x-direction only. If they are given a small
displacement about their equilibrium positions, then the
(d) E2 (r0/2) = 4E3 (r0/2) correct statement(s) is (are)
41. Charges Q, 2Qand 4Q are uniformly distributed in three (2015)
dielectric solid spheres 1, 2 and 3 of radii R/2, R and 2R
respectively, as shown in figure. If magnitudes of the electric
fields at point P at a distance R from the centre of spheres 1,
2 and 3 are E1, E2 and E3 respectively, then
(2014)
(a) Both charges execute simple harmonic motion

(b) Both charges will continue moving in the direction of
their displacement
(a) E1 > E2 > E3 (c) Charge +executes simple harmonic motion while charge
continues moving in the direction of its displacement.
(b) E3 > E1 > E2
(d) Charge –executes simple harmonic motion while charge
(c) E2 > E1 > E3 +continues moving in the direction of its displacement.
(d) E3 > E2 > E1
ELECTROSTATICS 82
44. Consider a uniform spherical charge distribution of radius 47. A length-scale (l) depends on the permittivity () of a
R1 centred at the origin O. In this distribution, a spherical dielectric material, Boltzmann constant (kB), the absolute
cavity of radius R2, Centred at P with distance OP = a = R1 – R2 temperature (T), the number per unit volume (n) of certain
(see figure) is made. If the electric field inside the cavity at charged particles, and the charge (q) carried by each of the
 
position r is E  r  , then the correct statement(s) is (are) particles. Which of the following expression(s) for l is(are)
dimensionally correct? (2016)
(2015)
 nq 2   k B T 
(a) l    (b) l   2 
 k B T   nq 
 q2   q2 
  
 n 2/3 k T  
 n1/3 k T 
(c) l (d) l
  B   B 
(a) E is uniform, its magnitude is independent of R2 but its
direction depend on r 48. The electric field E is measured at a point P(0, 0, d) generated

(b) E is uniform, its magnitude depends on R2 and its due to various charge distributions and the dependence of
direction depend on E on d is found to be different for different charge
 distributions. List-I contains different relations between E
(c) E is uniform, its r magnitude is independent of a but
and d. List-II describes different electric charge distributions,
its direction depend on a along with their locations. Match the functions in List-I
 with the related charge distributions in List-II.
(d) E is uniform and both its magnitude and direction
(2018)
depend on a
List-I List-II
45. An infinitely long uniform line charge distribution of charge
per unit length  lies parallel to the y-axis in the y-z plane at (P) E is independent of d 1. A point charge at the origin
3 1
z= a (see figure.) If the magnitude of the flux of the electric (Q) E 2. A small dipole with point
2 d
field through the rectangular surface ABCD lying in the xy charges at (0, 0, l) and –at
L (0, 0, –l). Take 2l <<d
plane with its centre at the origin is
n0 (0 = permittivity of 1
free space), then the value of n is (2015) (R) E 3. An infinite line charge
d2
coincident with the x-axis
with uniform linear charge
density .
1
(S) E 4. Two infinite wires carrying
d3
uniform linear charge density
parallel to the x-axis. The one
46. Which one of the following statements is correct?
along (y = 0, z = l) has a
(2016)
charge density + and and
(a) The balls will execute simple harmonic motion between the one along (y = 0, z = -l)
the two plates has a charge density –.
(b) The balls will bounce back to the bottom plate carrying Take 2l<<d.
the opposite charge they went up with 5.Infinite plane charge
(c) The balls will bounce back to the bottom plate carrying coincident with the xy-plane
the same charge they went up with with uniform surface charge
(d) The balls will stick to the top plate and remain there
density.
ELECTROSTATICS 83
49. An infinitely long thin non-conducting wire is parallel to

the z-axis and carries a uniform line charge density . It 51. An electric dipole with dipole moment
2
 
p0  
i  j is held
pierces a thin non-conducting spherical shell of radius R in fixed at the origin O in the presence of an uniform electric
such a way that the arc P subtends an angle 120° at the field of magnitude E-0. If the potential is constant on a circle
centre O of the spherical shell, as shown in the figure. The of radius R centered at the origin as shown in figure, then
permittivity of free space is  0 . Which of the following the correct statement(s) is/are: ( ε 0 is permittivity of free
statements is (are) true ? (2018) space. R>>dipole size) (2019)
(a) The electric flux through the shell is 3R / 0 (a) The magnitude of total electric field on any two points of
the circle will be same.
(b) The z-component of the electric field is zero at all the

points on the surface of the shell 
(b) Total electric field at point A is E A  2E0 i  j 
(c) The electric flux through the shell is 2R / 0 1/3
 p0 
(d) The electric field is normal to the surface of the shell at (c) R=  
all points  4πε 0 E 0 
50. A thin spherical insulating shell of radius R carries a 
(d) Total electric field at point B is EB  0
uniformly distributed charge such that the potential at its
surface is V0. A hole with small area  4 R 2 (   1) is 52. A charged shell of radius R carries a total charge Q. Given
made on the shell without affecting the rest of the shell.  as the flux of electric field through a closed cylindrical
Which one of the following statement is correct? surface of height h, radius r and with its centre same as that
(2019) of the shell. Here, centre of the cylinder is a point on the
axis of the cylinder which is equidistant from its top and
(a) The ratio of the potential at the center of the shell to that bottom surfaces. Which of the following option(s) is/are
1
of the point at R from center towards the hole will be correct? [ 0 is the permittivity of free space]
2
1  (2019)
1  2
(a) If h  2R and r 
4R Q
(b) The potential at the centre of shell is reduced by 2V0 . then  
5 50
(c) The magnitude of electric field at the center of the shell
 V0 3R Q
is reduced by (b) If h  2R and r  then  
2R 5 5 0
(d) The magnitude of electric field at a point, located on a
line passing through the hole and shell’s center, on a 8R 3R
(c) If h  and r  then   0
distance 2R from the center of the spherical shell will be 5 5
 V0
reduced by Q
2R (d) If h  2R and r  R then  
0
ELECTROSTATICS 84
 55. A point charge of mass m is suspended vertically by a

53. A uniform electric field, E   400 3yˆ NC 1 is applied in a
string of length l. A point dipole of dipole moment p is now
region. A charged particle of mass m carrying positive brought towards from infinity so that the charge moves
charge is projected in this region with an initial speed of away. The final equilibrium position of the system including
2 10  106 ms 1. This particle is aimed to hit a target T,, the direction of the dipole, the angles and distances is
which is 5 m away from its entry point into the field as shown in the figure below. If the work done in bringing
the dipole to this position is N × (mgh), where g is the
q acceleration due to gravity, then the value of N is _____ .
shown schematically in the figure. Take  1010 Ckg 1. (Note that for three coplanar forces keeping a point mass
m
F
Then – (2020) in equilibrium, sin  is the same for all forces, where F is
any one of the forces and  is the angle between the other
two forces) (2020)
56. Two identical non-conducting solid spheres of same mass

and charge are suspended in air from a common point by
(a) the particle will hit T is projected at an angle 45º from the two non-conducting, massless strings of same length. At
horizontal equilibrium, the angle between the strings is . The spheres
(b) the particle will hit T if projected either at an angle 30º or are now immersed in a dielectric liquid of density 800 kgm–3
60º from the horizontal and dielectric constant 21. If the angle between the strings
remains the same after the immersion, then (2020)
5 (a) electric force between the spheres remains unchanged
(c) time taken by the particle to hit T could be s as
6 (b) electric force between the spheres reduces
(c) mass density of the spheres is 840 kg m–3
5 (d) the tension in the strings holding the spheres remains
well as s
2 unchanged
5 57. Two point charge –Q and +Q / 3 placed in the xy-plane

(d) time taken by the particle to hit T is s
3 at the origin (0, 0) and a point (2, 0) respectively, as shown
54. Two large circular discs separated by a distance of 0.01 m in the figure. This results in an equipotential circle of radius
are connected to a battery via a switch as shown in the R and potential V = 0 in the xy-plane with its center at (b, 0).
figure. Charged oil drops of density 900 kg m–3 are released All lengths are measured in meters.
through a tiny hole at the center of the top disc.Once some
oil drops achieve terminal velocity, the switch is closed to
apply a voltage of 200 V across the discs. As a result,
an oil drop of radius 8 × 10–7m stops moving vertically
and floats between the discs. The number of electrons
The value of B is _ meter.
present in this oil drop is ________. (neglect the
58. A circular disc of radius R carries surface charge density
buoyancy force, take acceleration due to gravity =10 ms–2
and charge on an electron (e) 1.6 × 10–19 C)  r
 (r)   0  1   , where  is a constant and r is the
(2020)  R 0
distance from the center of the disc. Electric flux through a

large spherical surface that encloses the charged disc
completely is 0 . Electric flux through another spherical
R
surface of radius and concentric with the disc is .
4
0
Then the ratio is ………. . - (2020)

ELECTROSTATICS 85
Find Answer key and Detailed Solutions at the end of this book
ELECTROSTATICS
Please share your valuable feedback by

scanning the QR code.
CAPACITANCE 86
CAPACITANCE
SCAN CODE
CAPACITANCE
87
CAPACITANCE
Chapter 02
CAPACITANCE
1. CAPACITANCE
2.2 Symbol
1.1 Definition The symbols of capacitor are shown below
We know that charge given to a conductor increases it’s
potential i.e., Q  V  Q = CV or
Where C is a proportionality constant, called capacity or 2.3 Capacitance

capacitance of conductor. Hence capacitance is the ability of
The capacitance of a capacitor is defined as the magnitude
conductor to hold the charge (and associated electrical
of the charge Q on the positive plate divided by the
energy).
magnitude of the potential difference V between the plates
1.2 Unit and Dimensional Formula i.e., C = Q/V.
Coulomb
S.I. unit is = Farad (F) NOTE:
Volt
Smaller S.I. units are mF, F, nF and pF Capacitance of a capacitor is constant for the given
dimensions & medium.
1mF  10 3
F, 1F  10 F, 1nF  10 F, 1pF  10 F
6 9 12
2.4 Charge on Capacitor

C.G.S. unit is Stat Farad. 1F = 9× 1011 Stat Farad.
Net charge on a capacitor is always zero, but when we speak
Dimension: [C] = [M–1 L–2 T4A2].
of the charge Q on a capacitor, we are referring to the
2. CAPACITOR magnitude of the charge on each plate.
2.5 Energy Stored

2.1 Definition When a capacitor is charged by a voltage source (say
A capacitor is a device that stores electric energy. It is also
named condenser. battery) it stores the electric energy.
or
A capacitor is a pair of two conductors of any shape, which U 1
Energy density =  0 E 2
are close to each other and usually have equal and opposite volume 2
charge. If C = Capacitance of capacitor; Q = Charge on capacitor
and V = Potential difference across capacitor then energy
1 1 Q2
stored in capacitor U  CV 2  QV  .
2 2 2C
NOTE:
In charging an uncharged capacitor by a battery half the
energy supplied is stored in the capacitor and remaining
Fig. 2.1 half energy (1/2 QV) is lost in the form of heat.
SCAN CODE
CAPACITANCE
88
CAPACITANCE
2.6 Types of Capacitors

Capacitors are of mainly three types as described in given table:
Parallel Plate Capacitor Spherical Capacitor Cylindrical Capacitor

It consists of two parallel metallic It consists of two concentric conducting It consists of two concentric
plates (may be circular, rectangular, spheres of radii a and b (a < b). Inner cylinders of radii a and b (a < b),
square) separated by a small distance sphere is given charge +Q, while outer inner cylinder is given charge +Q
A = area of plate sphere is given charge –Q [by battery] while outer cylinder is given charge
Q = Magnitude of charge –Q. Common length of the
cylinders is l then
Fig. 2.2 Fig. 2.4

Fig. 2.3
0 A ab 20 
Capacitance: C  Capacitance: C  4  0 Capacitance: C 
d ba b
n 
In the presence of dielectric medium In the presence of dielectric medium a
(dielectric constant K) (dielectric constant K) In the presence of dielectric
K0 A ab medium (dielectric constant K)
C C  4 0 K
d ba 20 K
C 
b
ln  
a
SCAN CODE
CAPACITANCE
89
CAPACITANCE
2.7 Capacity of an Isolated Spherical Conductor

When charge Q is given to a spherical conductor of NOTE:
radius R, then potential at the surface of sphere is
1 Q
V .
4  0 R
.
Fig. 2.7
 Capacitance of a parallel plate capacitor depends

upon the effective overlapping area of plates,
Fig. 2.5 separation between the plates and the dielectric
medium filled between the plates. While it is
Hence it’s capacity independent of charge given, potential raised or
Q nature of metals and thickness of plates.
C  4 0 R
V  The distance between the plates is kept small to
1 avoid fringing or edge effect (non-uniformity of
 C  4 0 R  . R in the field) at the boundaries of the plates.
9  109
C.G.S. C = R
2.8 Force between the Plates of a Parallel Plate

Capacitor
Field due to charge on one plate on the other is

E ,
2 0
hence the force F = QE
Fig. 2.8
 Spherical conductor is equivalent to a spherical

capacitor with it’s outer sphere of infinite
radius.
 A spherical capacitor behaves as a parallel plate
capacitor if it’s spherical surfaces have large
radii and are close to each other.
 The intensity of electric field between the
Fig. 2.6
plates of a parallel plate capacitor (E = /  0 )
does not depends upon the distance between
   2 them.
F  A    A
 20  20 Radial and non-uniform electric field exists between the
spherical surfaces of spherical capacitor.
 | F |  A  Q
2 2
2 0 2 0 A
SCAN CODE
CAPACITANCE
90
CAPACITANCE
3. GROUPING OF CAPACITOR
Series Grouping Parallel Grouping
1. Charge on each capacitor remains same and equals to Potential difference across each capacitor remains
the main charge supplied by the battery
Q = Q1 + Q2 + Q3
V = V1 + V2 + V3
+Q1 – Q1
+ –
C1 C2 C3 + –
+Q +Q + –
+Q –Q –Q –Q + –
+ – + – + –
+ – + – + – Q1
+ – + – + – +Q2 – Q2
Q + – + – + – + –
+ –
V1 V2 V3 + –
Q2 + –
+ – Q Q3 +Q3 – Q3
+ –
V + –
+ –
+ –
Fig. 2.9 V
Fig. 2.10
2. Equivalent capacitance 1  1  1  1 Ceq = C1 + C2 + C3

C eq C1 C2 C3
3. If two capacitors having capacitances C1 and C2 are If two capacitors having capacitance C1 and C2
connected in series then respectively are connected in parallel then
 C2   C1   C1   C2 
V1    .V and V2   .V Q1    .Q and Q2   .Q
 C1  C2   C1  C2   C1  C2   C1  C2 
4. If n identical capacitors each having capacitances C If n identical capacitors are connected in parallel
are connected in series with supply voltage V then
C Equivalent capacitance Ceq = nC and Charge on each
Equivalent capacitance Ceq  and Potential
n Q
capacitor Q  .
V n
difference across each capacitor V  
n
NOTE:
NOTE:
 Two capacitors are in parallel when their
 Two capacitors are in series when charge leaving
positive plates are connected and negative plates
one capacitor directly enters into another capacitor,
are also connected with each other.
undivided and undisturbed.
 In parallel combination, equivalent capacitance
 In series combination equivalent capacitance is
is always greater than the individual capacitance
always lesser than that of either of the individual
capacitors.
SCAN CODE
CAPACITANCE
91
CAPACITANCE
3.1 Simple Circuits (Series & Parallel)

Suppose equivalent capacitance is to be determined in the following networks between points A and B
(i)
Fig. 2.11
(ii)
Fig. 2.12
(iii)
Fig. 2.13
SCAN CODE
CAPACITANCE
92
CAPACITANCE
4. KIRCHOFF'S LAWS FOR CIRCUIT SOLVING Final charges :

Q2F = (30 – 4) 2 = 52 C
4.1 Kirchoff's Junction Law
Q1F = (10 – 4) = 6 C
Kirchoff’s Current Law or KCL, states that the “total
current or charge entering a junction or node is exactly
Q2F = (4 – (–25)) 2 = 58 C
equal to the charge leaving the node” 4.2 Kirchoff's Voltage Law
Example: Kirchoff’s voltage law (2nd Law) states that in any complete
In the given circuit find out the charge on each loop within a circuit, the sum of all voltages across
components which supply electrical energy (such as cells or
capacitor. (Initially they are uncharged) generators) must equal the sum of all voltages across the
other components in the same loop.
Example:
Two capacitors of capacitance 1 μF and 2μF are charged to
potential difference 20 V and 15 V as shown in figure. If
now terminal B and C are connected together terminal A
with positive of battery and D with negative terminal of
battery then find out final charges on both the capacitor.
Fig. 2.14
Fig. 2.15
Sol. Let potential at A is 0, so at D it is 30 V, at F it is
Fig. 2.17
10 V and at point G potential is –25V. Now apply
Kirchhoff's Ist law at point E. (total charge of all Now applying Kirchoff voltage law
– 20  q 30  q
the plates connected to 'E' must be same as before –  30  0
1 2
i.e. 0) (x – 10) + (x – 30) 2 + (x + 25) 2 = 0 –40 – 2q – 30 – q = – 60
5x = 20 x=4 3q = – 10
10
Charge flow = – C
3
50
Charge on capacitor of capacitance 1F  20  q 
3
80
Charge on capacitor of capacitance 2F  30  q 
3
(Circuit Solving method)
Fig. 2.16
SCAN CODE
CAPACITANCE
93
CAPACITANCE
Sometimes it may not be easy to find the equivalent

5. WHEATSTONE BRIDGE BASED CIRCUIT
capacitance of a combination using the equations for series-
parallel combinations. We may then use the general method
If in a network five capacitors are arranged as shown the in
as follows:
Step 1: following figure, the network is called whetstone bridge
Identify the two points between which the equivalent C1 C3
type circuit. If it is balanced, then  hence C5 is
capacitance is to be calculated. Call any one of them as A C2 C4
and the other as B. removed and equivalent capacitance between A and B
(i)
Step 2:
Connect a battery between A and B with the positive
terminal connected to A and the negative terminal to B.
Send a charge +Q from the positive terminal of the battery
and –Q from the negative terminal of the battery.
Step 3:
Write the charges appearing on each of the plates of the
Fig. 2.18
capacitors. The charge conservation principle may be used.
The facing surfaces of a capacitor will always have equal
(ii)
and opposite charges. Assume variables Q1, Q2 .... etc. for
charges wherever needed. Mark the polarity across each
circuit element corresponding to higher (+) & lower (–)
potential ends.
Step 4:
The algebraic sum of all the potential differences along a
closed loop in a circuit is zero.
While using this rule, one starts from a point on the loop and
Fig. 2.19
goes along the loop, either clockwise or anticlockwise, to
reach the same point again. Any potential difference (iii)
encountered (from –ve to +ve) is taken to be positive and
any potential drop (from +ve to –ve) is taken to be negative.
The net sum of all these potential differences should be zero.
The loop law follows directly from the fact that electrostatic
force is a conservative force and the work done by it in any
closed path is zero.
Step 5:
Fig. 2.20
Number of variables Q1, Q2, etc. must be the same as the
number of equations obtained (loop equation). The C1C 2 CC

C AB   3 4
Q C1  C 2 C 3  C 4
equivalent capacitance Ceq  , where V is the potential
V
difference across the assumed battery terminals.
SCAN CODE
CAPACITANCE
94
CAPACITANCE
5.1 Ladder Problems Sol. Let equivalent capacitance x then capacitance after C,D
Example: point will be 2x because every capacitance becomes 2 times
as compared to A, B. So,
Fig. 2.21
Find equivalent capacitance between point A and B.
Fig. 2.24
Sol.
 x 
2x  C  C x
C
2x  C  C  2
5.2 Symmetric Circuits

Example:
Fig. 2.22
Let Capacitance is Ceq then after line CD capacitance

again will be equal to Ceq , because circuit is infinite.
Then
Fig. 2.25
Find equivalent Capacitance between A and B.
Sol. Because line CD is symmetric about A and B
so we remove it then
 Ceq =
C eq 
+C ×C
 C eq =
5–1
C
C + C + Ceq 2
Example:
Find equivalent capacitance between points A and B.
Fig. 2.26
 Ceq  2C
Example:
Fig. 2.23 Fig. 2.27
SCAN CODE
CAPACITANCE
95
CAPACITANCE
Find equivalent Capacitance between A and B.

Sol. Because line CD is symmetric about points A and B
so we remove it.
Fig. 2.31
Example:
Now Find out equivalent capacitance between A and B.
Fig. 2.28
3C
So, Ceq 
2
Example:
Fig. 2.32
Sol.
Fig. 2.29
Find equivalent Capacitance between point A and B if

Capacitance between any two plates is C.
There are total (n . 1) capacitors which are in series.
1 1 1
So,    .........(n – 1)times
Ceq C C
Fig. 2.33
1

n – 1   C  C There are only two capacitors. Ceq = C1 + C2
eq
C eq C n–1
Example:. 6. DIELECTRIC
Find out equivalent capacitance between A and B.
Dielectrics are insulating (non-conducting) materials which
transmits electric effect without conducting. We know that
in every atom, there is a positively charged nucleus and a
negatively charged electron cloud surrounding it. The two
Fig. 2.30
oppositely charged regions have their own centres of charge.
Sol. Put numbers on the plates The charges will be as shown
The centre of positive charge is the centre of mass of
in the figure.
positively charged protons in the nucleus. The centre of
V12 = V32 = V34 negative charge is the centre of mass of negatively charged
So all the capacitors are in parallel combination.
electrons in the atoms/molecules.
Ceq = C1 + C2 + C3
SCAN CODE
CAPACITANCE
96
CAPACITANCE
6.1 Polarization of a Dielectric Slab 6.3 Dielectric Breakdown and Dielectric Strength
It is the process of inducing equal and opposite charges If a very high electric field is created in a dielectric, the
on the two faces of the dielectric on the application of outer electrons may get detached from their parent
electric field. atoms. The dielectric then behaves like a conductor.
This phenomenon is known as dielectric breakdown.
The maximum value of electric field (or potential

gradient) that a dielectric material can tolerate without
it’s electric breakdown is called it’s dielectric strength.
S.I. unit of dielectric strength of a material is V/m but
practical unit is kV/mm.
6.4 Variation of Different Variables (Q, C, V, E and U)

of Parallel Plate Capacitor
Fig. 2.34 Suppose we have an air filled charged parallel plate
Suppose a dielectric slab is inserted between the plates capacitor having variables as follows:
of a capacitor. As shown in the figure. Charge: Q,
Induced electric field inside the dielectric is Ei, hence
Q
Surface charge density:   ,
this induced electric field decreases the main field E to A
E – Ei i.e., New electric field between the plates will be
0 A
Capacitance: C 
Enet = E – Ei. d
6.2 Dielectric Constant

After placing a dielectric slab in an electric field. The
net field is decreased in that region hence If E =
Original electric field and Enet = Net electric field.
E
Then  K where K is called dielectric constant. K
E net
is also known as relative permittivity (r) of the

material.
The value of K is always greater than one. For vacuum
Fig. 2.35
there is no polarization and hence
 1 Potential difference across the plates: V = E . d
E = E’ and K = 1 E i  E 1  
 k QA
Electric field between the plates: E 
 1 0
 i   1  
 k 1 Q2 1
Energy stored: U  CV 2   QV
2 2C 2
SCAN CODE
CAPACITANCE
97
CAPACITANCE
Quantity Battery is Removed Battery Remains Connected
Fig. 2.36 Fig. 2.37
Capacity C = KC C’ = KC
Charge Q = Q (Charge is conserved) Q’ = KQ
Potential V’ = V/K V’ = V (Since Battery maintains the potential
difference)
Intensity E’ = E/K E’ = E
Energy U’ = U/K U’ = KU
E
V  E  d  t   E t  E  d  t   .t
NOTE: K
If nothing is said it is to be assumed that battery is
 t 
disconnected.  V  E  d  t  
 K 
 t  Q  t 
 d  t    d  t  
7. WHEN DIELECTRIC IS PARTIALLY FILLED 0  K  A 0  K
BETWEEN THE PLATES
Now capacitance of the capacitor
If a dielectric slab of thickness t (t < d) is inserted Q 0 A
between the plates as shown below, then E = Main C   C 
V dt 
t
electric field between the plates, Ei= Induced electric
K
field in dielectric. E’ = (E – Ei) = The reduced value of
Dielectric slabs in series:
electric field in the dielectric. Potential difference
between the two plates of capacitor is given by
Fig. 2.39
Fig. 2.38
SCAN CODE
CAPACITANCE
98
CAPACITANCE
0 A ε0  A / 2
C 
 t t t  d/2 d/2
d   t1  t 2  t 3  ......   1  2  3  ......  d–d/2–d/2+ +
K
 1 K 2 K 3  K1 K3
ε0  A / 2 Kε 0 A
 
d/2 d/2 d
d–d/2–d/2+ +
K1 K3
K1 K 3 K 2 K 3
 +
K1 K 3 K 2 K 3
7.1 When a Metallic Slab is Inserted between the Plates
Fig. 2.40
0 A
Dielectric slabs in parallel C  
 t1 t2 t t 
   3  4 
 K1 K 2 K 3 K 4 
A parallel plate capacitor of area A, plate separation d and
capacitance C is filled with three different dielectric
materials having dielectric constants K1, K2 and K3 as Fig. 2.43
shown. If a single dielectric material is to be used to have
0A
the same capacitance C in this capacitor then its dielectric Capacitance C 
d  t 
constant K is given by
Fig. 2.44
Fig. 2.41
C’ =  (In this case capacitor is said to be short circuited)
ε0 A
Applying C =
t1 t
d – t1 – t 2 + + 2
k1 K 2 8. WHEN SEPARATION BETWEEN THE
PLATES IS CHANGING
We have,
If separation between the plates changes then it’s
1
capacitance also changes according to C  . The effect on
d
other variables depends on the fact that whether the charged
capacitor is disconnected from the battery or battery is still
connected.
Fig. 2.42
SCAN CODE
CAPACITANCE
99
CAPACITANCE
8.1 Separation is Increasing
Quantity Battery is Removed Battery remains Connected
Fig. 2.45
Fig. 2.46
1
Capacity Decreases because C  i.e. C’ < C Decreases i.e., C’ < C
d
Remains constant because a battery is not present i.e., Decreases because battery is present i.e., Q’
Charge
Q’ = Q <Q
Remaining charge (Q – Q’) goes back to the

Potential Q 1 V’ = V (Since Battery maintains the
difference Increases because V   V  i.e., V  V
C C potential.
 Q Q
Remains constant because E   i.e., Decrease because E   E  Q i.e.,
Electric Field  0 A 0 A 0
E’ = E E’ < E
Decreases because
Q2 1
Energy Increases because U   U  i.e., U’ > U 1
2C C U  CV2  U  C i.e., U’ < U
2
SCAN CODE
CAPACITANCE
100
CAPACITANCE
8.2 Separation is Decreasing
Quantity Battery is Removed Battery remains Connected
Capacity 1 Increases i.e., C’ > C

Increase because C  i.e. C’ > C
d
Increases because battery is present i.e., Q’
>Q
Charge Remains constant because battery is not present i.e.,
Remaining charge (Q’ – Q) is supplied by
Q’ = Q
the battery.
Potential Q 1 V’ = V (Since Battery maintains the

Decreases because V   V  i.e., V’ < V
difference C C potential difference)
Q
 Q Increases because E   E  Q i.e.,
Electric Field Remains constant because E   i.e., E’ = E A 0
 0 A 0
E’ > E
1
Increases because U  CV  U  C i.e.,
2
Q2 1
Energy Decreases because U   U i.e. U’ < U 2
2C C
U’ > U
Charge on capacitors redistributed and new charge on them

9. REDISTRIBUTION OF CHARGE BETWEEN
TWO CAPACITORS will be ,
When a charged capacitor is connected across an uncharged  C1   C2 

Q'1  Q   Q'2  Q  
capacitor, then redistribution of charge occur to equalize the  C1  C2   C1  C2 
potential difference across each capacitor. Some energy is Q = Q1+Q2
also wasted in the form of heat. Q1  Q 2 C1 V1  C 2 V2
The common potential V   and loss
C1  C 2 C1  C 2
Suppose we have two charged capacitors C1 and C2 after
C1C 2
of energy  U   V1  V2 
2
disconnecting these two from their respective batteries. 2  C1  C 2 
These two capacitors are connected to each other as shown
below (positive plate of one capacitor is connected to NOTE:
positive plate of other while negative plate of one is Two capacitors of capacitances C1 and C2 are charged
connected to negative plate of other) to potential of V1 and V2 respectively.
After disconnecting from batteries they are again
connected to each other with reverse polarity i.e.,
positive plate of a capacitor connected to negative
plate of other. So common potential
Q1  Q 2 C1 V1  C 2 V2 1 C1C2
 V  V2 
2
V  U 
C1  C 2 C1  C 2 2 C1  C2 1
Fig. 2.47
SCAN CODE
CAPACITANCE
CAPACITANCE 101
10. COMBINATION OF DROPS
Suppose we have n identical drops each having – Radius – r,

Capacitance – c, Charge – q, Potential – v and Energy – u.
If these drops are combined to form a big drop of – Radius –

R, Capacitance – C, Charge – Q, Potential – V and Energy –
U then –
(i) Charge on big drop: Q = nq
(ii) Radius of big drop: Volume of big drop
= n  volume of a single
drop i.e.,
4 3 4
R  n  r3 ,
3 3
R n r
1/3
(iii) Capacitance of big drop: C = n1/3 c
Q nq
(iv) Potential of big drop: V  1/3 V = n2/3 v
C n c
1
U  CV2
2
(v) Energy of big drop:
1
 (n1/3c)(n2/3v)2
2
U = n5/3 u
NOTE:
 It is a very common misconception that a
capacitor stores charge but actually a capacitor
stores electric energy in the electrostatic field
between the plates.
 Two plates of unequal area can also form a
capacitor but effective overlapping area is
considered.
SCAN CODE
CAPACITANCE
CAPACITANCE 102
SOLVED EXAMPLES
Example - 2
Example – 1
A charged air capacitor has stored energy U0. What
In the figure below, the capacitance of each
will be the energy stored when air is replaced by a
capacitor is 3F. The effective capacitance between
A and B is dielectric of dielectric constant K, charge Q
remaining the same.
2
Sol. Energy stored in dielectric filled capacitor U  Q .
2C
The capacitance of air capacitor = Cair
3 The capacitance of dielectric capacitor, C = K . Cair,

F
(a) 4 (b) 3F
(c) 6F (d) 5F 2
Energy stored in air capacitor, U  Q .
Ans. (d) 0
2Cair
Sol.
U 1 U
  U 0
U0 K K
That is, energy stored is reduced to 1 times.

K
Example – 3
Keeping the voltage of the charging source constant,

C1  C2  C3  C 4  3F (given) what would be the percentage change in the energy
  C4 and C3 are in parallel, i.e. stored in a parallel plate capacitor if the separation
Ceq  C4  C3   3  3 F  6F between its plates were to be decreased by 10%?
Now arrangement of capacitors will be as follows
Sol. Energy stored in a capacitor for a fixed voltage,
1
U CV 2 .
2
Capacitance of parallel plate capacitor C  0 A . If

d
 C1 is in parallel with the series combination of the separation between the plates is decreased by 10
C2 and Ceq.
%, new separation, d  10 d  0.9 d. .

C 2  Ceq
'
  C1 100
 C between A and B
"
eq
C2  C'eq
New capacitance C '  0 A  C  10 C
0.9d 0.9 9
 3 6 
   3  5F
 3 6 
% change in energy is   10  1  100 = 11.1%
 
9 
i.e., energy stored increases by 11.1 %.

CAPACITANCE 103
Sol. The equivalent capacitance of C1 and C2 in series

Example - 4 C1C 2 2 2
C'    1F
C1  C2 2  2
For circuit, the equivalent capacitance between P and
Q is C’ is in parallel with C3, so equivalent capacitance of
C1, C2 and C3 is
C” is in series with C4 ; their equivalent capacitance
(a) 6C (b) 4C C4 C" 2 2

C" '    1F
C4  C" 2  2
(c) 3C (d) 6C
2 11 This is in parallel with C5 ; So equivalent capacitance
Ans: (d) across AB is CAB = 1 + 1 = 2 mF

Sol:
Energy  1 C V 2  1  2  106  (6) 2
AB
2 2
stored = 36 × 10-6 J
Example- 6
Find the equivalent capacitance of the combination

between points A & B using charge distribution
method.
Sol.
1 1 1 1 2  3  6 11
    
Ceq 3C 2C C 6C 6C
6C
 Ceq 
11
Assume a battery of potential V across A & B. Do the
Example- 5
charge distribution in the circuit.
Find the total energy stored in the capacitors in the
given network:
Variables : Q, q
Loops : (ABCFA), (FCDEF)
Using Kirchhoff’s voltage law in
Loop (A → B → C → F → A)
CAPACITANCE 104
Qq q
0  0  0 Q  4q
3C C ⇒ ...(i) 1 1 2 8 3C
    C3 
Loop (F → C → D → E → F) C C 3C 3C 8
q Q
 V00
C 4C Þ 4 q  Q  4 CV ...(ii)
Using equations (i) and (ii) ;

CV
q , Q  2CV ⇒
2
Equivalent capacitance between A and B is, C 3C 7C 7C
   Ceq 
Q 2CV 2 8 8 8
C eq    2C
V V Example - 8
Example - 7 Charge Q on a capacitor varies with voltage V as
Find the equivalent capacitance between points A shown in the figure, where Q is taken along the X-
and B. axis and V along the Y-axis. The area of triangle
OAB represents.
Sol.
(a) Capacitance
(b) Capacitive reactance
(c) Magnetic field between the plates
(d) Energy stored in the capacitor
⇒ 11  2  C C Ans. (d)
1
C C C 2
Sol.
C 3C 3C Area of Triangle OAB = Area under V-Q graph

C   C2 
2 2 2 1 1
  OB  AB   QV
2 2
= U = Energy stored in Capacitor.
⇒
CAPACITANCE 105
Example - 9
The capacities of two conductors are C1 and C2 and

their respective potentials are V1 and V2. If they are
connected by a thin wire then the loss of energy will
be
C1C2 (V1  V2 ) C1C2 (V1 -V2 )

(a) 2(C1  C 2 ) (b) 2(C1 +C2 )
C1C2 (V1 -V2 )2 (C1 +C2 ) (V1 -V2 )

(c) 2(C1 +C2 ) (d) C1C2
Ans. (c)
Sol. Total energy before sharing charges:
1 1
U1 = C1 V12 + C 2 V22
2 2
Total energy after sharing charges:
1
U2 =  C1 +C 2  V 2
2
Common potential is given by:
C1V1 +C 2 V2
V=
C1 +C 2
 C V +C V   C V +C V 
2 2
1
U2 =  C1 +C2   1 1 2 2  = 1 1 2 2
2  C1 +C 2  2  C1 +C 2 
Loss in energy
C1C2  V1 -V2 
2
U = U 2 -U1 =
2  C1 +C2 
106
CAPACITANCE
Parallel Plate Capacitor & Spherical and cylindrical 7. In a parallel–plate capacitor, the region between the plates
capacitor is filled by a dielectric slab. The capacitor is charged from a
1. The capacity of a parallel plate capacitor is C. Its cell and then disconnected from it. The slab is now taken out.
capacitance when the separation between the plate is (a) The potential difference across the capacitor is reduced
halved will be (b) The potential difference across the capacitor is increased
(a) 4 C (b) 2 C (c) The energy stored in te capacitor is reduced
(c) C/2 (d) C/4 (d) No work is done by an external agent in taking the slab
2. The distance between two plates of a parallel plate out
capacitor is slowly increased. A graph is plotted between
capacitance C and the distance d. Which graph is correct? Dielectrics in capacitors
8. There are four capacitors which have same plate area,

dielectric medium but different distances between the plates.
A graph is plotted between charge and potential as shown.
Which one of them have the large plate separation ?
(a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D
3. A parallel plate capacitor is charged and the charging
(a) 1 (b) 2
battery is then disconected. If the plates of the capacitor
are moved farther apart by means of insulating handles (c) 3 (d) 4
(a) the charge on the capacitor increases 9. A parallel plate condenser has a capacity C. The space
between the plates is half filled by oil of dielectric constant k
(b) the voltage across the plates decreases
as shown in the figure. The ratio of new capacity to the
(c) the capacitance increases original capacity is :
(d) the electrostatic energy stored in the capacitor
increases
4. A parallel plate capacitor is made of two circular plates
separated by a distance of 5 mm and with a dielectric of
dielectric constant 2.2 between them. When the electric
field in the dielectric is 3 × 104 V/m, the charge density of
the positive plate will be close to : (a) k : 1 (b) (1 + k) : 1
(a) 3 × 10–7 C/m2 (b) 3 × 104 C/m2
1+ k 1
(c) 6 × 104 C/m2 (d) 6 × 10–7 C/m2 (c) :1 (d) (1 + k) :
2 2
5. A spherical conductor has a capacity of 2F. Its radius
will be (0 = 8.85 × 10–12 S.I. units) 10. The capacities of two conductors are C1 and C2 and their
respective potentials are V1 and V2. If they are connected by
(a) 1.8 m (b) 1800 m
4
a thin wire then the loss of energy will be
(c) 1.8 × 10 m (d) 0.018 m
6. Capacitance (in F) of a spherical conductor having radius C1C 2 (V1  V2 ) C1C 2 (V1  V2 )
(a) (b)
1 m, is 2(C1  C 2 ) 2(C1  C 2 )
–10 –6
(a) 1.1 × 10 (b) 10
–9 –3 C1C 2 (V1  V2 ) 2 (C1  C 2 ) (V1  V2 )
(c) 9 × 10 (d) 10 (c) (d)
2(C1  C 2 ) C1C2
CAPACITANCE 107
11. A capacitor connected to a 10 V battery collects a charge 16. A parallel plate capacitor is made of two plates of length
of 40 microcoulomb with air as dielectric and 100 l, width  and separated by distance d. A dielectric slab
microcoulomb with oil as dielectric. The dielectric constant (dielectric constant K) that fits exactly between the plates
of the oil is is held near the edge of the plates. It is pulled into the
(a) 4 (b) 0.4 U
capacitor by a force F = – where U is the energy of
(c) 2.5 (d) 1.0 x
the capacitor when dielectric is inside the capacitor up to
12. A parallel plate capacitor is made of two dielectric blocks
distance x (See figure). If the charge on the capacitor is
in series. One of the blocks has thickness d1 and dielectric then the force on the dielectric when it is near the edge is:
constant k1 and the other has thickness d 2 and dielectric
constant k2 as shown in the figure. This arrangement can
be thought as a dielectric slab of thickness d   d1  d 2 

and effective dielectric constant k . Then k is (Given:
Q2 Q2 
(a) (k  1) (b) k
2dl 2 0 2dl 2 0
13. A parallel plate capacitor with air between the plates has a
capacitance of 9 pF. The separation between its plates is d. Q2 d
(c) (k  1) (d) None
The space between the plate is now filled with two 2l 2 0
dielectrics. One of the dielectrics has dielectric constant k1
17. A parallel plate condenser with a dielectric of dielectric
= 3 and thickness d/3 while the other one has dielectric
constant K between the plates has a capacity C and is
constant k2 = 6 and thickness 2d/3. Capacitance of the
charged to a potential V volts. The dielectric slab is slowly
capacitor is now removed from between the plates and then reinserted. The
(a) 1.8 pF (b) 45 pF net work done by the system in this process is
(c) 40.5 pF (d) 20.25 pF 1
14. A parallel plate capacitor with a slab of dilectric constant 3 (a)  K  1 CV 2 2
(b) CV (K – 1)/K
2
filling the whole space between the plates is charged to 2
(c) (K – 1) CV (d) zero
certain potential and isolated. Then the slab is drawn out
and another slab of equal thickness but dielectric constant 18. Two parallel plates of area 0.1 m2 each are at separation of
2 is introduced between the plates. The ratio of the energy 10 mm . One-fourth of the space between them is filled
stored in the capacitor later to that stored initially is with a dielectric of dielectric constant 4 as shown in the
(a) 2 : 3 (b) 3 : 2 figure. The equivalent capacitance between terminals A
(c) 4 : 9 (d) 9 : 4 and B is given by  0 (in SI units). Find  .
15. An air capacitor of capacity C = 10 F is connected to a
constant voltage battery of 12 V. Now the space between
the plates is filled with a liquid of dielectric constant 5. The
charge that flows now from battery to the capacitor is
(a) 120 C
(b) 699 C
(c) 480 C
(d) 24 C
CAPACITANCE 108
19. A fully charged capacitor has a capacitance C. It is 23. In the figure, the equivalent capacitance between A and B is
discharged through a small coil of resistance wire embedded
in a thermally insulated block of specific heat capacity s
and mass m. If the temperature of the block is raised to T.
Then the potential difference V across the capacitor is
2mTC
(a)
s C1C 2  C 2C3  C3C1
(a) C1 + C2 + C3 (b)
C1  C 2  C3
2mTs
(b)
C C1C 2C3
(c) C C  C C  C C (d) none of these
1 2 2 3 3 1
3mTC
(c)
2s 24.
mTC
(d)
2s
Combination of Capacitors
20. In the given circuit below, the charge in C on the capacitor

having capacity of 5F (a) C/10 (b) 10C/3
(c) 3C/10 (d) 9C
25. In the given circuit, if charge on 6 F capacitor is 10 C,
then the charge (in  C  on 4  F capacitor will be
(a) 4.5 (b) 7

(c) 9 (d) 15
21. Two capacitors of capacitances 3F and 6F are connected 26. A 5 F capacitor is fully charged across a 12 V battery. It is
in series across a potential difference of 400 volt. The P.D. then disconnected from the battery and connected to an
across each condenser is respectively : uncharged capacitor. If the voltage across the capacitor
800 400 becomes 3 V then the capacitance of the uncharged
(a) Volt, Volt capacitor will be
3 3
(a) 3 F (b) 15 F
600 500 (c) 25 F (d) 60 F
(b) Volt, Volt
3 3 27. Four metallic plates, each having area A are placed as shown.
700 400 The distance between the consecutive plates is d. Alternate
(c) Volt, Volt plates are connected to points A & B. The equivalent
3 3
capacitance of the system is
(d) none of these
22. Two capacitors C1 and C2 are charged to 120 and 200 V
respectively. It is found that by connecting them together
the potential on each one can be made zero. Then
(a) 5C1 = 3C2 (b) 3C1 = 5C2 (a) 0A/d (b) 20A/d
(c) 3C1 + 5C2 = 0 (d) 9C1 = 4C2 (c) 30A/d (d) 40A/d
109
CAPACITANCE
Circuit laws & Miscellaneous problems in capacitors 33. A parallel plate capacitor of capacitance C is connected to
a battery and is charged to a potential difference V. Another
28. For the circuit shown, which of the following statements capacitor of capacitance 2C is connected to another battery
is true? and is charged to potential difference 2V. The charging
batteries are now disconnected and the capacitors are
connected in parallel to each other in such a way that the
positive terminal of one is connected to the negative terminal
of the other. The final energy of the configuration is–
(a) With S1 closed, V1 = 15 V, V2 = 20 V 25 CV2

(A) Zero (B)
(b) With S3 closed, V1 = V2 = 25 V 6
(c) With S1 and S2 closed, V1 = V2 = 0
(d) With S1 and S3 closed, V1 = 30 V, V2 = 20 V 3CV2 9 CV2
(C) (D)
2 2
29. A capacitor of 2  F is charged as shown in the diagram.
34. A capacitor of value 4 mF charged at 50V is connected with
When the switch S is turned to position 2, the percentage
another capacitor of value 2mF charged at 100V, in such a
of its stored energy dissipated is
way that plates of similar charges are connected together.
Before joining and after joining the total energy in multiples
10–2 J will be :–
(A) 1.5 and 1.33 (B) 1.33 and 1.5
(C) 3.0 and 2.67 (D) 2.67 and 3.0
35. Two conducting spheres of radii R1 and R2 are charged with
charges Q1 and Q2 respectively. On bringing them in contact
there is :–
(A) no change in the energy of the system
(B) an increase in the energy of the system if Q1R2 ¹ Q2R1
30. Two capacitors marked 10F, 400 volt and 4F, 100 volt are
connected in series. What is the maximum safe potential (C) always a decrease in energy of the system
that can be applied when these capacitor are joined in (D) a decrease in energy of the system if Q1R2 ¹ Q2R1
series. 36. The distance between plates of a parallel plate capacitor is 'd'.
Another thick metal plate of thickness d/2 and area same as
(a) 400 volt (b) 100 volt
that of plates is so placed between the plates, that it does not
(c) 200 volt (d) 140 volt touch the plates. The capacity of the resultant capacitor :–
31. An automobile spring extends 0.2 m for 5000 N load. The (A) remain same (B) becomes double
ratio of potential energy stored in this spring when it has (C) becomes half (D) becomes one fourth
been compressed by 0.2 m to the potential energy stored
37. Three parallel metallic plates, each of area A are kept as shown
in a 10 mF capacitor at a potential difference of 10000 V will in the figure and charges Q1, Q2 and Q3 are given to them.
be :– Edge effects are negligible. Calculate the charges on the two
(A) 1/4 (B) 1 outermost surfaces 'a' and 'f'.
(C) 1/2 (D) 2
32. A 40 µF capacitor in a defibrillator is charged to 3000 V. The
energy stored in the capacitor is sent through the patient a bc de f
during a pulse of duration 2 ms. The power delivered to
the patient is :–
(A) 45 kW
Q1  Q 2  Q 3 Q1  Q 2  Q 3
(B) 90 kW (A) (B)
2 3
(C) 180 kW
(D) 360 kW Q1  Q 2  Q 3 Q1  Q 2  Q 3
(C) (D)
3 2
CAPACITANCE 110
38. In the figure shown the plates of a parallel plate capacitor 41. N identical capacitor are joined in parallel and the
have unequal charges. Its capacitance is 'C'. P is a point combination is charged to a potential V. Now if they are
outside the capacitor and close to the plate of charge- separated and then joined in series then energy of
Q. The distance between the plates is 'd' then which combination will :–
statement is wrong (A) remain same and potential difference will also remain
same
2Q -Q
(B) remain same and potential difference will become NV
(C) increase N times and potential difference will
P become NV
(D) increase N time and potential difference will remains
same
42. The value of equivalent capacitance of the combination
(A) A point charge at point 'P' will experience electric force shown in figure between the points P and Q is :–
due to capacitor
2C 2C P
3Q
(B) The potential difference between the plates will be 2C
2C C
C C Q
(C) The energy stored in the electric field in the region
(A) 3 C (B) 2 C
9 Q2
between the plates is (C) C (D) C/3
8C
43. In the given circuit if point C is connected to the earth and a
(D) The force on one plate due to the other plate is potential of +2000 V is given to point A, the potential at B is
Q2 10F 10F
2
2  0 d
5F
39. Five identical plates are connected across a battery as 10F C
A B
follows :
1 (A) 1500 V (B) 1000 V

2 (C) 500 V (D) 400 V
3
44. An infinite number of identical capacitors each of
4
capacitance 1m F are connected as in adjoining fi gu r e .
5
T h e n t h e equivalent capacitance between A and B is
If the charge on plate 1 be +q, then the charges on the

plates 2,3,4 and 5 are
(A) –q, +q,–q,+q (B) –2q, +2q,–2q,+q
(C) –q, +2q,–2q,+q (D) None of the above 8capacitor
40. Three plates A,B and C each of area 0.1 m2 are separated 16 capacitor
by 0.885 mm from each other as shown in the figure. A
A B
10V battery is used to charge the system. The energy 
stored in the system is: (A) 1m F (B) 2m F
(C) 1/2 mF (D) None of these
A 45. A parallel plate capacitor is made by stacking n equally
B spaced plates connected alternatively. If the capacitance
C 10V between any two adjacent plates is C, then the resultant
capacitance is–
(A) 1 mJ (B) 10–1 mJ (A) (n – 1)C (B) (n + 1)C
(C) 10–2 mJ (D) 10–3 mJ (C) C (D) nC
CAPACITANCE 111
46. Two parallel plate capacitors whose capacities are C and 2 50. A fully charged capacitor has a capacitance C. It is
C respectively, are joined in parallel. These are charged by discharged through a small coil of resistance wire embedded
V potential difference. If the battery is now removed and in a thermally insulated block of specific heat capacity s
a dielectric of dielectric constant K is filled in between the and mass m. If the temperature of the block is raised by DT,
plates of the capacitor C, then what will be the potential the potential difference V across the capacitance is–
difference across each capacitor?
2mC T
V 2V (a)
(a) (b) s
K2 K2
mC T
3V 2 K (b)
(c) (d) s
K 2 3V
47. A parallel plate capacitor with air between the plates has a msT
(c)
capacitance of 9 pF. The separation between its plates is C
'd'. The space between the plates is now filled with two
dielectrics. One of the dielectric has dielectric constant 2msT
d (d)
K1= 3 and thickness while the other one has dielectric C
3
2d 51. The capacitance (C) for an isolated conducting sphere of
constant K2 = 6 and thickness . Capacitance of the radius (a) is given by 4a. This sphere is enclosed within
3
capacitor is now an earthed concentric sphere. The ratio of the radii of the
(A) 1.8 pF (B) 45 pF n
(C) 40.5 pF (D) 20.25 pF spheres being then the capacitance of such a
(n  1)
48. A parallel plate capacitor of capacitance C (without sphere will be increased by a factor-
dielectrics) is filled by dielectric slabs as shown in figure.
Then the new capacitance of the capacitor is (a) n
n
(b)
K=6
3
(n  1)
K=2 K=4 (n  1)
1 2
(c)
n
(a) 3.9 C (b) 4 C (d) a.n

(c) 2.4 C (d) 3 C 52. Two capacitor having capacitance 8 mF and 16mF have
49. Dielectric sheet placed between the plates of parallel plate breaking voltage 20V & 80 V. They are combined in series.
capacitor. Now capacitor is charged and battery is The maximum charge they can store individually in the
disconnected. Now t = 0 sheet is taken out very slowly then combination is-
which of the following is correct for the variation of (a) 160 mC
capacitance with time
(b) 200 mC
(A) (B)
C C (c) 1280 mC
(d) None of these
53. A capacitor of capacitance 1 mF withstands the maximum
voltage 6 kV while a capacitor of 2mF withstands the
O t O t
maximum voltage 4 kV. What maximum voltage will the
(C) (D) system of these two capacitor withstands if they are
C C connected in series ?
(a) 10 kV (b) 12 kV
(c) 8 kV (d) 9 kV
O t O t
CAPACITANCE 112
54. Four identical plates 1,2,3 and 4 are placed parallel to each
other at equal distance as shown in the figure. Plates 1
and 4 are joined together and the space between 2 and 3
is filled with a dielectric of dielectric constant k=2. The
capacitance of the system between 1 and 3 & 2 and 4 are
C1
C1 and C2 respectively. The ratio C is-
2
1
2
3
4
5
(a) (b) 1
3
3 5
(c) (d)
5 7
55. The equivalent capacitance across A & B is
23F 7F
13F 1F
A B
12F
10F 1F
28 15
(a) f (b) F
3 2
(c) 15 mF (d) None of these
CAPACITANCE 113
1. In figure is shown a system of four capacitors connected

across a 10 V battery. Charge that will flow from switch S
when it is closed is : (2015)
(a) 360 N/C

(b) 420 N/C
(c) 480 N/C
(d) 240 N/C
(a) 5 C from b to a (b) 20 C from a to b
4. Three capacitors each of 4 µF are to be connected in such
(c) zero (d) 5 C from a to b a way that the effective capacitance is 6 µF. This can be
2. In the given circuit, charge Q2 on the 2F capacitor done by connecting them : (2016)
changes as C is varied from 1F to 3F. Q2 as a function of (a) all in series
‘C’ is given properly by : (figures are drawn schematically
(b) two in series and one in parallel
and are not to scale) (2015)
(c) all in parallel
(d) two in parallel and one in series
5. Figure shows a network of capacitors where the numbers
indicate capacitances in micro Farad. The value of
capacitance C if the equivalent capacitance between point
A and B is to be 1 F is : (2016)
(a) (b)
31 32
(a) F (b) F
23 23
(c) (d)
33 34
(c) F (d) F
23 23
6. A capacitance of 2 F is required in an electrical circuit
across a potential difference of 1.0 kV. A large number of
1 F capacitors are available which can withstand a
3. A combination of capacitors is set up as shown in the
potential difference of not more than 300 V. The minimum
figure. The magnitude of the electric field, due to a point
number of capacitors required to achieve this is : (2017)
charge (having a charge equal to the sum of the charges
on the 4 F and 9 F capacitors), at a point distant 30 m (a) 32 (b) 2
from it, would equal: (2016) (c) 16 (d) 24
CAPACITANCE 114
7. A combination of parallel plate capacitors is maintained

at a certain potential difference. (2017)
When a 3 mm thick slab is introduced between all the (a) 40 C (b) 36 C

plates, in order to maintain the same potential difference,
the distance between the plates is increased by 2.4 mm. (c) 20 C (d) 54 C
Find the dielectric constant of the slab. 12. A parallel plate capacitor is made of two square plates of
(a) 3 (b) 4 side ‘a’, separated by a distance d (d<<a). The lower
(c) 5 (d) 6 triangular portion is filled with a dielectric of dielectric
constant K, as shown in the figure. Capacitance of this
8. A parallel plate capacitor of capacitance 90 pF is connected
capacitor is:
to a battery of emf 20V. If a dielectric material of dielectric
(2019)
5
constant k  is inserted between the plates, the
3
magnitude of the induced charge will be : (2018)
(a) 2.4 nC (b) 0.9 nC
(c) 1.2 nC (d) 0.3 nC
9. The equivalent capacitance between A and B in the circuit
given below, is : (2018)
K 0 a 2 K 0 a 2
(a) (b) ln K
2d  K  1 d  K  1
K 0 a 2 1 K 0 a 2
(c) ln K (d)
d 2 d
13. A parallel plate capacitor is of area 6 cm2 and a separation
(a) 2.4 F (b) 4.9 F 3 mm. The gap is filled with three dielectric materials of
(c) 3.6 F (d) 5.4 F equal thickness (see figure) with dielectric constants K1
= 10, K2 = 12 and K3 = 14. The dielectric constant of a
10. A parallel plate capacitor with area 200 cm2 and separation
single material which when fully inserted in the above
between the plates 1.5 cm, is connected across a battery capacitor gives the same capacitance would be: (2019)
of emf V. If the force of attraction between the plates is
25×10-6 N, the value of V is approximately:
 -12 C
2 
0 = 8.85×10  (2018)
 N.m 2 
(a) 250 V (b) 100 V (a) 4 (b) 14
(c) 300 V (d) 150 V (c) 12 (d) 36
11. A capacitor C1 = 1.0  F is charged up to a voltage V = 60 14. A parallel plate capacitor having capacitance 12 pF is
charged by a battery to a potential difference of 10 V
V by connecting it to battery B through switch (1). Now
between its plates. The charging battery is now
C1 is disconnected from battery and connected to a circuit
disconnected and a porcelain slab of dielectric constant
consisting of two uncharged capacitors C2 = 3.0  F and
6.5 is slipped between the plates. The work done by the
C3 = 6.0  F through switch (2), as shown in the figure. capacitor on the slab is: (2019)
The sum of final charges on C2 and C3 is : (a) 692 pJ (b) 508 pJ
(2018) (c) 560 pJ (d) 600 pJ
CAPACITANCE 115
15. Seven capacitors, each of capacitance 2 μF, are to be 17. Voltage rating of a parallel plate capacitor is 500 V. Its
connected in a configuration to obtain an effective dielectric can withstand a maximum electric field of
10 6 V/m. The plate area is 10–4 m2. What is the dielectric
capacitance of  6   F . Which of the combinations, constant if the capacitance is 15 pF? (given 0 = 8.86 ×
 
 13  10–12 C2 m2)
shown in figures below, will achieve the desired value? (2019)
(2019) (a) 3.8 (b) 8.5
(a) (c) 4.5 (d) 6.2
18. A parallel plate capacitor has 1μF capacitance. One of its
two plates is given + 2μC charge and the other plate,
+4μC charge. The potential difference developed across
the capacitor is :
(2019)
(a) 3 V (b) 1 V
(b)
(c) 5 V (d) 2 V
19. A capacitor with capacitance 5  F is charged to 5  C .
If the plates are pulled apart to reduce the capacitance to
2  F how much work is done?
(2019)
(a) 6.25  10 J
6 (b) 3.75  10 6 J
(c)
(c) 2.16  106 J (d) 2.55  10 6 J
20. The parallel combination of two air filled parallel plate
capacitors of capacitance C and nC is connected to a
battery of voltage, V. When the capacitors are fully
charged, the battery is removed and after that a dielectric
material of dielectric constant K is placed between the
two plates of the first capacitor. The new potential
(d)
difference of the combined system is:
(2019)
nV
(a) (b) V
K n
16. In the given circuit, after the switch ‘S’ is turned from
position ‘A’ to position ‘B’, the energy dissipated in the V  n  1 V
(c) (d)
circuit in terms of capacitance ‘C’ and the total charge ‘Q’ K n  K  n
is _____. (2019)
21. Figure shows charge (q) versus voltage (V) graph for
series and parallel combination of two given capacitors.
The capacitances are : (2019)
1 Q2 3 Q2
(a) (b)
8 C 8 C
5 Q2 3 Q2 (a) 40 μF and 10 μF (b) 60 μF and 40 μF

(c) (d)
8 C 4 C (c) 50 μF and 30 μF (d) 20 μF and 30 μF
CAPACITANCE 116
22. A simple pendulum of length L is placed between the 24. In the given circuit, the charge on 4  F capacitor will be:
plates of a parallel plate capacitor having electric field E, (2019)
as shown in figure. Its bob has mass m and charge q. The
time period of the pendulum is given by:
(2019)
(a) 5.4C (b) 9.6C

(c) 13.4C (d) 24C
25. A parallel plate capacitor has plates of area A separated
L L by distance ‘d’ between them. It is filled with a dielectric
(a) 2 (b) 2 which has a dielectric constant varies as k(x) = k(1 + ax)
 qE   2 q2 E 2 
g   g  2  where ’x’ is the distance measured from one of the plates.
 m  m 
If  d 1 , the total capacitance of the system is best
given by the expression:
(c) 2
L (d) 2 L
(2020)
 qE   2  qE 2 
1/2
g    g    
 m   m  

23. Two identical parallel plate capacitors, of capacitance C
each, have plates of area A, separated by a distance d.
The space between the plates of the two capacitor, is
filled with three dielectrics, of equal thickness and
dielectric constants K1, K2 and K3. The first capacitors is
filled as shown in Fig. I, and the second one is filled as A 0 k    d  
2
shown in Fig. II. If these two modified capacitors are 1 

(a) d   2  
charged by the same potential V, the ratio of the energy    
stored in the two, would be (E1 refers to capacitors (I) and
E2 to capacitors (II): Ak 0    d 
(b)
d 1   2  
(2019)   
A 0 k    2 d  
(c) d 1   2  
  
Ak 0
(d) 1   d 
d
E1 K1 K 2 K 3 26. Effective capacitance of parallel combination of two
(a)  capacitors C1 and C2 is 10 μF. When these capacitor are
E2  K1  K 2  K 3  K 2 K 3  K 3 K1  K1 K 2 
individually connected to a voltage source of 1 V, the
energy stored in the capacitor C2 is 4 times of that in C1. If
(b) E1   K1  K 2  K 3  K 2 K 3  K 3 K1  K1 K 2  these capacitors are connected in series, their effective
E2 K1 K 2 K 3
capacitance will be:
E1 9K1 K 2 K 3 (2020)
(c) 
E2  K1  K 2  K 3  K 2 K3  K3 K1  K1 K 2  (a) 1.6μF (b) 3.2μF
(c) 4.2μF (d) 8.4μF
(d) E1   K1  K 2  K 3  K 2 K3  K 3 K1  K1 K 2 
E2 9 K1 K 2 K 3
CAPACITANCE 117
27. A capacitor is made of two square plates each of side ‘a’ 31. A capacitor C is fully charged with voltage V0. After
making a very small angle  between them, as shown in disconnecting the voltage source, it is connected in
figure. The capacitance will be close to parallel with another uncharged capacitor of
(2020) C
capacitance . The energy loss in the process after the
2
charge is distributed between the two capacitors is:
(2020)
1 1
(a) CV02 (b) CV02
2 4
1 1
(c) CV02 (d) CV02
3 6
 0a2  a   0a2  3 a 
(a) 1   (b) 1   32. Two capacitors of capacitances C and 2C are charged to
d  2d  d  2d 
potential differences V and 2V, respectively. These are
then connected in parallel in such a manner that the
 0a2  a   0a 2  a 
(c) 1   (d) 1  
positive terminal of one is connected to the negative
d  2d  d  4d  terminal of the other. The final energy of this configuration
28. A 5F capacitor is charged fully by a 220V supply. It is is :
then disconnected from the supply and is connected in (2020)
series to another uncharged 2.5 F capacitor. If the energy 9
(a) zero (b) CV 2
X 2
change during the charge redistribution is J then
100
value of X to the nearest integer is ………….. . (2020) 25 3
(c) CV 2 (d) CV2
6 2
29. A 10 F capacitor is fully charged to a potential difference
of 50V. After removing the source voltage it is connected 33. In the circuit shown, charge on the 5 F capacitor is :
to an uncharged capacitor in parallel. Now the potential (2020)
difference across them becomes 20 V. The capacitance of
the second capacitor is :
(2020)
(a) 15 F (b) 20 F
(c) 10 F (d) 30 F
30. In the circuit shown in the figure, the total charge is
750 C and the voltage across capacitor C2 is 20 V. Then (a) 5.45  C (b) 18.00  C
the charge on capacitor C2 is :
(c) 10.90 C (d) 16.36 C
(2020)
34. A parallel plate capacitor has plate of length ‘l’, width ‘w’
and separation of plates is ‘d’. It is connected to a battery
of emf V.A dielectric slab of the same thickness ‘d’ and of
dielectric constant k = 4 is being inserted between the
plates of the capacitor. At what length of the slab inside
plates, will the energy stored in the capacitor be two times
the initial energy stored?
(2020)
(a) 650 C
21 1
(b) 450 C (a) (b)
3 2
(c) 590 C
1 1
(d) 160 C (c) (d)
4 3
CAPACITANCE 118
35. A parallel plate capacitor whose capacitance C is 14pF is 38. A parallel plate capacitor has plate area 100m2 and plate
charged by a battery to a potential difference V = 12V separation of 10m. The space between the plates is filled
between its plates. The charging battery is now up to a thickness 5 m with a material of dielectric constant
disconnected and a porcelain plate with k = 7 is inserted of 10. The resultant cpacitance of the system is pF. The
between the plates, then the plate would oscillate back value of  0  8.85  10 –12 F.m –1 The value of x to the
and forth between the plates with a constant mechanical
nearest integer is ................. .
energy of (in pJ). Find N. (Assume no friction)
(2021)
(2021)
39. For changing the capacitance of a given parallel plate
36. Four identical rectangular plates with length, l = 2m and
capacitor, a dielectric material of dielectric constant K is
3
breadth, b  m are arranged as shown in figure. The used, which has the same area as the plates of the capaci-
2
x0 3
tor. The thickness of the dielectric slab is d , where ‘d’ is
equivalent capacitance between A and C is . The 4
d
the separation between the plates of parallel plate capaci-
value of x is (Round off to the Nearest Integer)
tor. The new capacitance (C’) in terms of orginal capaci-
(2021)
tance (C0) is given by the following relation.
(2021)
4k 3 K
(a) C '  C0 (b) C '  C0
K 3 4K
4 4k
(c) C '  C0 (d) C '  C0
3 K 3
37. A 2F capacitor C 1 is first charged to a potential

difference of 10V using a battery. Then the battery is
removed, and the capacitor is connected to an uncharged
capacitor C2 of 8F. The chare in C2 atequilibrium
condition is ______ C .
(2021)
CAPACITANCE 119

Single Choice Questions 4. A finite ladder is constructed by connecting several
1. A parallel plate capacitor of capacitance C is connected to sections of 2F, 4F capacitor combinations as shown in
a battery and is charged to a potential difference V. Another the figure. It is terminated by a capacitor of capacitance C.
capacitor of capacitance 2C is similarly charged to a What value should be chosen for C such that the equivalent
potential difference 2V. The charging battery is now capacitance of the ladder between the points A and B
disconnected and the capacitors are connected in parallel becomes independent of the number of sections in between
to each other in such a way that the positive terminal of
one is connected to the negative terminal of the other. The
final energy of the configuration is
(a) zero
3
(b) CV 2 (a) 4 F (b) 2 F
2
(c) 18 F (d) 6 F
25 5. A capacitor of capacitance C1 = 1 F can with stand maximum
(c) CV 2 voltage V1 = 6kV (kilo-volt) and another capacitor of
6
capacitance C2 = 3 F can withstand maximum voltage
9 V2 = 4 kV. When the two capacitors are connected in series,
(d) CV 2 the combined system can withstand a maximum voltage of
2
(a) 4 kV (b) 6 kV
2. A parallel plate capacitor of capacity is charged to a (c) 8 kV (d) 10 kV
potential 6. Five identical plates are connected across a battery as
follows. If the charge on plate 1 be +q, then the charges on
(i) The energy stored in the capacitor when the battery is
the plates 2, 3, 4 and 5 are
disconnected and the separation is doubled E1
(ii) The energy stored in the capacitor when the charging
battery is kept connected and the separation between
the capacitor plates is doubled is E2. Then E1/E2 value is
(a) 4 (b) 3/2
(c) 2 (d) ½
3. An infinite number of identical capacitors each of (a) – q, + q, – q, + q (b) – 2q, + 2q, – 2q, +q
capacitance 1F are connected as in adjoining figure. Then
(c) – q, + 2q, – 2q, + q (d) None of these
the equivalent capacitance between A and B is
7. Four plates, each of area A and each side are placed parallel
to each other at a distance d. A battery is connected between
the combinations 1 and 3 and 2 and 4. The modulus of
charge on plate 2 is
(a) 1 F (b) 2 F
2 0 A 3 0 A
1 (a) E (b) E
(c) 2 F (d)  d d
2 0 A 0 A
(c) E (d) E
3d d
CAPACITANCE 120
8. Five capacitors are connected as shown in the diagram. If 13. Seven capacitors each of capacitance 2 F are connected
the p.d. between A and B is 22 V, the emf of the cell is in a configuration to obtain an effective capacitance
10/11 F. Which of the following combination will achieve
the desired result be ?
(a)
(a) 26 V (b) 42 V
(c) 38 V (d) 46 V
9. Find the equivalent capacitance between X and Y (Q.8
to Q.9)
(b)
(c)
(a) 3 F (b) 4 F (d)

(c) 5 F (d) 6 F
10.
14. A parallel plate capacitor is filled by a dielectric whose
permittivity varies with the applied voltage according to
the law r = V where  =1V–1.A similar capacitor without
dielectric is charged to voltage V 0=156 volt and is
connected in parallel with first nonlinear uncharged
capacitor. What is final voltage across the capacitors.
(a) C (b) 5C
(c) 12 volt (d) 4 volt
(c) 2C (d) 3C
15. A system of three parallel plates each of area A are
11. Two identical metal plates are given positive charges Q1 separated by distance d1 and d2. The space between them
and Q2 (< Q1) respectively. If they are now brought close is filled with dielectric of permittivities 1 and 2. The
together to form a parallel plate capacitor with capacitance permitivity of free space is 0. The equivalent capacitance
C, the potential difference between them is of system is
(a) (Q1 + Q2)/2C (b) (Q1 + Q2)/C 0 2 d
(c) (Q1 – Q2)/C (d) (Q1 – Q2)/2C (a)  d   d
1 1 2 2
12. A parallel plate capacitor is connected to a battery. The
plates are pulled apart with a uniform speed. If x is the 0 A
separation between the plates, the time rate of change of (b)  d   d
1 1 2 2
electrostatic energy of capacitor is proportional to
(a) x–2 (b) x 1 2 0 d
(c)  d   d
(c) x–1
(d) x2 1 1 2 2
12 A
(d)  d   d
2 1 1 2
CAPACITANCE 121
16. The space between two plates of a condenser is filled with 

20. The magnitude of electric field E in the annular region of
two dielectric media of thickness t1 and t2 and dielectric
constant k1 and k2 respectively. The capacity of the a charged cylindrical capacitor
condenser is given by : (a) is same throughout
(b) is higher near the outer cylinder than near the inner
cylinder
(c) varies as 1/r where r is the distance from the axis
2
(d) varies as 1/r where r is the distance from the axis
21. The capacitance of a parallel plate condenser is C1
(fig. a). A dielectric of dielectric constant K is inserted as
shown in figure (b) and (c). If C2 and C3 are the capacitances
in figure (b) and (c), then
 t1  t 2  (a) (b)
(a) C   0 A  
 K1  k 2 
(b) C   K1  K 2  ε0 A
 t1k1  t2 k3 
ε0 A
(c) C  (c)
 t1   t2 
     
 k1   k3 
A
(d) (K1 – K2) 0  K  K   (t1 + t2)
1 2
17. A parallel plate capacitor with air in between the plates
has capacitance of 9 F .The separation between the
(a) Both C2 and C3 > C1
plates is d .The space between the plates is now filled
with two dielectrics .One of the dielectric has dielectric (b) C3 > C1 but C2 < C1
constant k1=3 with thickness d/3 and other one has (c) Both C2 and C3 < C1
dielectric constant k2=6 and thickness 2d/3.The new (d) C1 = C2 = C3
capacitance will be 22. The expression for the capacity of the capacitor formed
(a)1.8 F (b) 20.25 F by compound dielectric placed between the plates of a
(c) 40.5 F (d) 45 F parallel plate capacitor as shown in figure, will be (area of
18. Condenser A has a capacity of 15F when it is filled with a plate = A)
medium of dielectric constant 15. Another condenser B
has a capacity of 1F with air between the plates. Both are
charged separately by a battery of 100 V. After charging,
both are connected in parallel without the battery and the
dielectric medium being removed. The common potential
now is
(a) 400 V (b) 800 V
(c) 1200 V (d) 1600 V
19. An uncharged capacitor with a solid dielectric is connected
to a similar air capacitor charged to a potential of V0. If the 0 A
0 A
common potential after sharing of charges becomes V, then (a) (b)
the dielectric constant of the dielectric must be  d1 d 2 d 3   d1  d 2  d 3 
     
 K1 K 2 K 3   K1  K 2  K 3 
V0 V
(a) (b) V
V 0 0 A  K1K 2 K 3   AK1 AK 2 AK 3 
(c) (d) 0    
 V0  V   V0  V  d1d 2 d3  d1 d2 d3 
(c) (d)
V V0
CAPACITANCE 122
23. The space between the plates of a parallel plate capacitor 29. A charge of 1 C is given to one plate of a parallel-plate
is filled completely with a dielectric substance having capacitor of capacitance 0.1 F and a charge of 2C is
dielectric constant 4 and thickness 3 mm. The distance given to the other plate. Find the potential difference, in
volts developed between the plates.
between the plates in now increased by inserting a second
sheet of thickness 5 mm and dielectric constant K. If the 30. A capacitor having a capacitance of 100F is charged to
a potential difference of 50 V. The charging battery is
capacitance of the capacitor so formed is one-half of the
disconnected and a dielectric slab of dielectric constant
original capacitance, the value of K is 2.5 is inserted. What charge in millicoloumb would have
(a) 10/3 (b) 20/3 produced this potential difference in absence of the
(c) 5/3 (d) 15/3 dielectric slab.
24. In a parallel–plate capacitor, the plates are kept vertical. Subjective Type Questions
The upper half of the space between the plates is filled
31. Two parallel plate capacitors of capacitances C and 2C are
with a dielectric with dielectric constant K and the lower
connected in parallel and charged to a potential difference
half with a dielectric with dielectric constant 2K. The ratio
V. The battery is then disconnected and the region between
of the charge density on the upper half of the plates to the the plates of capacitor C is completely filled with a material
charge density on the lower half of the plates will be equal to of dielectric constant K. The potential difference across
(a) 1 (b) 2 the capacitors now becomes ...........
(c) 1/2 (d) 3/2 32. The capacitance of a parallel plate capacitor with plate
area A and separation d, is C. The space between the plates
25. In a parallel–plate capacitor, the region between the plates
is filled with two wedges of dielectric constants K1 and K2
is filled by a dielectric also. The capacitor is connected to respectively (figure). Find the capacitance of the resulting
a cell and the slab is taken out. capacitor.
(a) Some charge is drawn from the cell
(b) Some charge is returned to the cell
(c) The potential difference across the capacitor is
reduced
(d) No work is done by an external agent in taking the
slab out
26. If we increase ‘d’ of a parallel plate condensor to ‘2d’ and
fill wax to the whole empty space between its two plate,
then capacitance increase from 1pF to 2pF. What is the
33. Three identical capacitors C1, C2 and C3 have a capacitance
dielectric constant of wax.
of 1.0 F each and they are uncharged initially. They are
(a) 2 (b) 4 connected in a circuit as shown in the figure and C1 is
(c) 6 (d) 8 then filled completely with a dielectric material of relative
27. A capacitor is connected across another charged capacitor. permittivity r. The cell electromotive force (emf) V0 = 8 V.
The energy in the two capacitors will: First the switch S1 is closed while the switch S2 is kept
(a) be equal to the energy in the initial capacitor open. When the capacitor C3 is fully charged, S1 is opened
(b) Be less than that in the initial capacitor and S2 is closed simultaneously. When all the capacitors
reach equilibrium, the charge on C3 is found to be 5C.
(c) Be more than that in the initial capacitor
The value of r = ________.
(d) Be more or less depending on the relative capacities of
the two capacitors
Integer Type Questions

28. A potential difference is applied to the plates of a capacitor
filled with an insulator with stored energy as U. The
capacitor is disconnected and the insulator is pulled out
now. The work done in pulling out the insulator against
the electric field is 4U.What is the dielectric constant of
the insulator.
CAPACITANCE 123
34. The figure shows two identical parallel plate capacitors 37. In the circuit shown in steady state
connected to a battery with the switch S closed. The switch
is now opened and the free space between the plates of
the capacitors is filled with a dielectric of dielectric constant
(or relative permittivity) 3. Find the ratio of the total
electrostatic energy stored in both capacitors before and
after the introduction of the dielectric
(a) charge across 4F capacitor is 20 C
(b) charge across 4F capacitor is 10 C
(c) potential difference across 4F capacitor is 5 Volt
(d) potential difference across 4F capacitor is 10 Volt
38. A dielectric slab is inserted between the plates of an
isolated charged capacitor. Which of the following
quantities will change.
35. Two parallel plate capacitors–4
A and B have the same (a) the electric field in the capacitor
separation d = 8.85 × 10 m 2between the2 plates. The
plate areas of A and B are 0.04 m and 0.02 m respectively. (b) the charge on the capacitor
A slab of dielectric constant (relative permittivity) K = 9 (c) the potential difference between the plates
has dimensions such that it can exactly fill the space
between the plates of capacitor B. (d) the stored energy in the capacitor
39. A parallel plate air capacitor is connected to a battery. The
quantities charge, voltage, electric field and energy
associated with this capacitor are given by Q0, V0, E0 and
U0 respectively. A dielectric slab is now introduced to fill
the space between the plates with the battery still in
connection. The corresponding quantities now given by
Q, V, E and U are related to the previous one as
(a) > Q0 (b) V > V0
(i) The dielectric slab is placed inside A as shown in figure (c) E > E0 (d) U > U0
(a). A is then charged to a potential difference of 110 V.
Calculate the capacitance of A and the energy stored in it. 40. A parallel plate capacitor is charged and the charging
battery is then disconnected. If the plates of the capacitor
(ii) The battery is disconnected and the dielectric slab is are moved farther apart by means of insulating handles
removed from A. Find the work done by the external agency
(a) the charge on the capacitor increases
in removing the slab from A.
(b) the voltage across the plates increases
(iii) The same dielectric slab is now placed inside B, filling
it completely. The two capacitors A and B are then (c) the capacitance increases
connected as shown in figure (c). Calculate the energy (d) the electrostatic energy stored in the capacitor
stored in the system. increases
More than one correct options 41. A parallel plate capacitor of plate area A and plate
separation d is charged to potential difference V and then
36. A dielectric slab of thickness d is inserted in a parallel the battery is disconnected. A slab of dielectric constant
plate capacitor whose negative plate is at x = 0 and K is then inserted between the plates of the capacitor so
positive plate is at x = 3d. The slab is equidistant from the as to fill the space between the plates. If Q, E and W
plates. The capacitor is given some charge. As x goes denote respectively, the magnitude of charge on each plate,
from 0 to 3d the electric field between the plates (after the slab is
(a) the magnitude of the electric field remains the same inserted), and work done on the system, in question, in
(b) the direction of the electric field remains the same the process of inserting the slab, then
(c) the electric potential increases continuously  0 AV  0 KAV
(a) Q  (b) Q 
(d) the electric potential increases at first then decreases d d
and again increases
V  0 AV 2  1
(c) E  (d) W  1  K 
Kd 2d  
CAPACITANCE 124
Match the Column Type Questions 44. Five identical capacitor plates, each of area A, are arranged
42. Consider the situation shown below. The switch S is open such that adjacent plates are at a distance d apart, the
for a long time and then closed. Then match the columns plates are connected to a source of emf V as shown in
the figure.
Column-1 Column-2
1
(a) Charge flown through (P) CE 2
2
battery when switch is closed The charge on plate 1 is ......... and on plate 4 is ..........
1 2
(b) Change in energy stored (Q) CE
4
in capacitor
1
(c) Heat developed in system (R) CE 2
8
CE
(d) Work done by battery (S)
2
43. In case of an isolated parallel plate capacitor there is effect
on its capacity when a dielectric is introduced or plate
separation is changed. Match Column-1 with column-2
for the statements in Column-1.
Column-1 Column-2
(a) When the plates of (P) Work done by external
parallel plate capacitor agent
is negative are pulled apart
keeping charge constant
(b) When the plates of (Q) Work done by battery
parallel plate capacitor is
positiveare pulled apart
keeping it potential constant
(c) When a dielectric slab (R) Electric potential is
gradually inserted energy of
the system between the
plates of decreasesparallel
plate capacitor and its
potential is kept constant
(d) When a dielectric slab (S) Work done by external is
gradually inserted agent is
positive between the plates
of an isolated parallel plate
capacitor
CAPACITANCE 125

1. A parallel plate capacitor of area A, plate separation d and
6 0 R (15d  9vt)  0 R
capacitance C is filled with three different dielectric (a) (b)
materials having dielectric constants k1, k2 and k3 as 5d  3vt 2d 2  3dvt  9v 2 t 2
shown. If a single dielectric material is to be used to have 6 0 R (15d  9vt)  0 R
the same capacitance C in this capacitor then its dielectric (c) (d)
constant k is given by (2000) 5d  3vt 2d 2  3dvt  9v 2 t 2
4. A 2F capacitor is charged as shown in the figure. The
percentage of its stored energy dissipated after the switch
S is turned to position 2 is (2011)
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 (a) 0% (b) 20%

(a) k  k  k  2 k (b) k  k  k  2 k
1 2 3 1 2 3 (c) 75% (d) 80%
5. In a given circuit a charge of 80C is given to the upper
1 k1 k 2 kk k k
(c) k  k  k  2 k 3 (d) k  1 3  2 3 plate of the 4F capacitor. Then in steady state, the charge
1 2 k1  k 2 k 2  k 3 on upper plate of the 3F capacitor is (2013)
2. Consider the situation shown in the figure. The capacitor
A has a charge on it whereas B is uncharged. The charge
appearing on the capacitor B a long time after the switch is
closed is (2001)
(a) + 32 C (b) + 40 C
(c) + 48 C (d) + 80 C
6. In the circuit shown in the figure, there are two parallel
plate capacitors each of capacitance C. The switch S1 and
(a) zero (b) q/2 pressed first to fully charge the capacitor C1 and then
released. The switched S2 is then pressed to charge the
(c) q (d) 2q
capacitor C2. After some time, S2 is released and then S3 is
3. A parallel plate capacitor C with plates of unit area and pressed. After some time. (2013)
separation d is filled with a liquid of dielectric constant
K = 2. The level of liquid is d/3 initially. Suppose the liquid
level decreases at a constant speed v, the time constant as
a function of time t is (2008)
(a) the charge on the upper plate of C1 is 2 CV0

(b) the charge on the upper plate of C1 is CV0
(c) the charge on the upper plate of C2 is 0
(d) the charge on the upper plate of C2 is –CV0
CAPACITANCE 126
7. A parallel plate capacitor has a dielectric slab of dielectric 9. A parallel plate capacitor of capacitance C has spacing d
constant K between its plates that covers 1/3 of the area between two plates having area A. The region between
of its plates, as shown in the figure. The total capacitance the plates is filled with N dielectric layers, parallel to its
of the capacitor is C while that of the portion with dielectric d
in between is C1. When the capacitor is charged, the plate plates, each with thickness   . The dielectric constant
N
area covered by the dielectric gets charge Q1 and the rest
of the mth layer is K m  K  1 
of the area gets charge Q2. The electric field in the dielectric m
 . For a very large N(>10 ),
3
is E1 and that in the other partion is E2. Choose the correct  N
option/options, ignoring edge effects. (2014)
 K 0 A 
the capacitance C is    .The value of α will be
 d In2 
________.[ 0 is the permittivity of free space]

(2019)
10. Two capacitors with capacitance values C1 = 2000  10pF
and C 2 = 3000  15pF are connected in series. The voltage
E1 E1 1
(a) E  1 (b) E  K applied across this combination is V = 5.00  0.02 V . The
2 2 percentage error in the calculation of the energy stored
in this combination of capacitors is _______.
Q1 3 C 2K (2020)
(c) Q  K (d) C  K
2 1
8. A parallel plate capacitor having plates of area S and plate

separated d, has capacitance C 1 in air. When two
dielectrics of different relative primitivities (and
) are introduced between the two plates as shown in the
C2
figure, the capacitance becomes C2. The ratio C is
1
(2015)
(a) 6/5 (b) 5/3

(c) 7/5 (d) 7/3
CAPACITANCE 127
CAPACITANCE

128
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
SCAN CODE
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
Chapter 03 129
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
9. Current due to translatory motion of charge: If n

1. ELECTRIC CURRENT
particle each having a charge q, pass through a given
“The flow of charge in a definite direction constitutes the area in time t then
electric current and the time rate of flow of charge through
any cross-section of a conductor is the measure of current”.
i.e.,
net charge flown q dq

Electric current , I=  
time taken t dt
Fig. 3.3
1. Though the “electric current represents the direction of
If n particles each having a charge q pass per second per
flow of positive charge”.
unit area, the current associated with cross-sectional area
2. Yet it is treated as a scalar quantity.
A is i = nqA
3. Current follows, the laws of scalar addition (added
If there are n particle per unit volume each having a
algebraically) and not the laws of vector addition.
charge q and moving with velocity v, the current
4. Because the angle between the wires carrying currents
thorough, cross section A is i = nqvA
does not affect the total current in the circuit.
10. Current due to rotatory motion of charge: If a
5. Ampere of current means the flow of 6.25  1018 point charge q is moving in a circle of radius r with
electrons/sec through any cross–section of the speed v (frequency , angular speed  and time
conductor.
period T) then corresponding current,
6. The conventional direction of current is taken to be the
q qv q
direction of flow of positive charge, i.e. field and is i  qv   
T 2 r 2
opposite to the direction of flow of negative charge as
shown below.
Fig. 3.1 Fig. 3.4

7. The net charge in a current carrying conductor is zero. 11. Current carriers: The charged particles whose flow
8. For a given conductor current does not change with in a definite direction constitutes the electric current
change in cross-sectional area. In the following figure are called current carriers. In different situation
i1 = i2 = i3 current carriers are different.
(i) Solids: In solid conductors like metals current
carriers are free electrons.
(ii) Liquids: In liquids current carriers are positive and
Fig. 3.2 negative ions.
SCAN CODE
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
130
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
(iii) Gases: In gases current carriers are positive ions and (b) Current carriers in liquids:
free electrons. 1. In an electrolyte like CuSO4, NaCl etc., there are
(iv) Semiconductor: In semiconductors current carriers positively and negatively charged ions
are holes and free electrons. (like C u   , SO 4  , Na  , Cl  ).
(v) The amount of charge flowing through a cross
2. These are forced to move in definite directions under
section of a conductor from t = ti to t = tf is given by :
the effect of an external electric field, causing electric
tf
current.
q   ti
I dt
3. Thus, in liquids, the current carriers are positively and
Graphs
negatively charged ions.
(i) Slope of Q vs t graph gives instantaneous current.
(c) Current carriers in gases:
1. Ordinarily, the gases are insulators of electricity.
2. They can be ionized by applying a high potential
difference at low pressure
3. Thus, positive ions and electrons are the current
carriers in gases.
Fig. 3.5
(ii) Area under the I vs t graph gives net charge flown. 3. DRIFT VELOCITY
   
“If u1 , u2 , u3 , ...un are random thermal velocities of n free
electrons in the metal conductor, then the average thermal
   
u1  u2  u3  ... un
velocity of electrons is 0
n
As a result, there will be no net flow of electrons of charge
in one particular direction in a metal conductor, hence no
Fig. 3.6 current”.
“Drift velocity is defined as the average velocity with which
2. CURRENT CARRIERS the free electrons get drifted towards the positive end of the
conductor under the influence of an external electric field ”.
(a) Current carriers in solid conductors: 4 –1
1. The drift velocity of electrons is of the order of 10 ms
1. In solid conductors like metals, the valence electrons
2. If V is the potential difference applied across the ends
of the atoms do not remain attached to individual
of the conductor of length l, the magnitude of electric
atoms but are free to move throughout the volume of
Potential difference V
the conductor which are also known as free electrons. field set up is E  
length 
2. Under the effect of an external electric field, the
E
valence electrons move in a definite direction causing
electric current in the conductors.
– +
3. Thus, free electrons are the current carriers in solid
conductors.
Fig. 3.7
SCAN CODE
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
131
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
3. Each free electron in the conductor experiences a 10. If cross-section is constant, I  J i.e. for a given cross-
 
force, F   e E. sectional area, greater the current density, larger will

 eE be current.
4. The acceleration of each electron is a  
m 11. The drift velocity of electrons is small because of the
5. At any instant of time, the velocity acquired by frequent collisions suffered by electrons.
 12. The small value of drift velocity produces a large
electron having thermal velocity u 1 will be
   amount of electric current, due to the presence of
v1  u1  a1
extremely large number of free electrons in a
where 1 is the time elapsed since it has suffered its
conductor. The propagation of current is almost at the
last collision with ion/atom of the conductor it is also
speed of light and involves electromagnetic process. It
known as relaxation time.
is due to this reason that the electric bulb glows
6. Similarly, the velocities acquired by other electrons in
immediately when switch is turned on.
the conductor will be
13. In the absence of electric field, the paths of electrons
        
v2  u 2  a2 , v3  u 3  a3 , ....., vn  u n  an . between successive collisions are straight line while in
7. The average velocity of all the free electrons in the presence of electric field the paths are generally
conductor under the effect of external electric field is curved.

the drift velocity v d of the free electrons. 14. Free electron density in a metal is given by
  
 v1  v2  ...  vn NA x d
Thus, vd  n
n A
     
 u1  a1    u2  a2   ... un  an  where N A = Avogadro number, x = number of

n free electrons per atom, d = density of metal
  
 u  u 2  ...  u n    1   2  ...   n   0  a  a and A = Atomic weight of metal.
 1 a
 n  n
3.1 Relaxation Time (τ)
1  2  ... n
where,   = average time that has
n The time interval between two successive collisions of
elapsed since each electron suffered its last collision electrons with the positive ions in the metallic lattice is
with the ion/atom of conductor and is called average defined as relaxation time
relaxation time. mean free path 
 
8. Its value is the order of 10
–14
second. r.m.s. velocity of electrons v rms
 With rise in temperature v rms increases consequently 
9. Putting the value of a in the above relation, we have

  e E decreases.
vd 
m
3.2 Mobility
eE
Average drift speed, vd   Drift velocity per unit electric field is called mobility of
m
The negative sign show that is opposite to the direction vd m2
 electron i.e.  It’s unit is
E volt  sec
of E .
SCAN CODE
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
132
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
1. Mobility of charge carrier (), responsible for current q Ane

Hence, current, dI   Or I  A n e vd
is defined as the magnitude of drift velocity of charge t 
per unit electric filed applied, i.e., vd
 e E 
drift velocity vd qE  / m q  7. Putting the value of  vd   , we have
     m 
electric field E E m
Ane2 E
I
e e m
2. Mobility of electron,  e 
me
3. The total current in the conducting material is the sum 4. OHM’S LAW
of the currents due to positive current carriers and
Ohm’s law states that “the current (I) flowing through a
negative current carriers. conductor is directly proportional to the potential difference
2 –1 –1 –1 –1
4. SI unit of mobility is m s V or ms N C (V) across the ends of the conductor”.
3.3 Relation between Current and Drift Velocity
1. Consider a conductor (say a copper wire) of length l

and of uniform area of cross-section
 Volume of the conductor = Al.
Fig. 3.9
2. If n is the number density of electrons, i.e., the number
i.e., I  V or V  I or V = RI or V  R  c o n s ta n t
of free electrons per unit volume of the conductor, then I
total number of free electrons in the conductor = Aln.
3. Then total charge on all the free electrons in the 4.1 Deduction of Ohm’s law
conductor, q  Ane eE
We know that vd  
m
4. The electric field set up across the conductor is given
by E = V/l (in magnitude) eV
But E = V/l vd  
5. Due to this field, the free electrons present in the
m
Also, I = A n e vd
conductor will begin to move with a drift velocity vd
 eV   Ane  
2
towards the left hand side as shown in figure
I=Ane     V
 m   m 
V m
or  = R = a constant for a given
I A n e2 
conductor for a given value of n, l and at a given
temperature. It is known as the electrical resistance of the
conductor.
Fig. 3.8 Thus, V = RI this is Ohm’s law.

6. Time taken by the free electrons to cross the 1. Ohm’s law is not a universal law, the substances,
conductors, t = l/vd
which obey ohm’s law are known as ohmic substance.
SCAN CODE
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
133
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
2. Graph between V and i for a metallic conductor is a 3. Dimensions of electric resistance

straight line as shown. At different temperatures V-i Pot. diff. work done/charge
 
curves are different. current current
ML2 T2 / AT
V    M1L2 T 3 A2 
V T1 A
1 T2 5.1 Electrical Resistivity or Specific Resistance
2
“The resistance of a conductor depends upon the
2
1
following factors :
i i
Fig. 3.10 (i) Length (l): The resistance (R) of a conductor is
(A) Slope of the line directly proportional to its length (l), i.e., R  l
(ii) Area of cross-section (A): The resistance (R) of a
V
(B) Here tan θ1 > tan θ2= tan    R conductor is inversely proportional to the area of
i
cross-section (A). of the conductor, i.e., R  1/A
So, R1 > R2 i.e., T1 > T2
(iii) The resistance of conductor also depends upon the
3. The device or substances which don’t obey ohm’s nature of material and temperature of the conductor.
law e.g. gases, crystal rectifiers, thermionic valve,  

From above; R  or R  .”
transistors etc. are known as non-ohmic or non-linear A A
conductors. For these V-i curve is not linear. 1. Where  is constant of proportionality and is known as
V 1 specific resistance or electrical resistivity of the

Static resistance Rst  
i tan  material of the conductor
V 1 2. Specific resistance (or electrical resistivity) of the

Dynamic resistance R dyn  
I tan  material of a conductor is defined as the resistance of a
unit length with unit areas of cross section of the
material of the conductor.
(i) It’s S.I. unit is ohm - m and dimension is [ML3T–3A–2]
m
(ii) It is given by formula :  
ne2
(iii) Resistivity is the intrinsic property of the substance. It
is independent of shape and size of the body (i.e. l and
Fig. 3.11 A).
(iv) For different substances their resistivity is also
5. ELECTRICAL RESISTANCE
different e.g.  s i l v er = minimum
“The electrical resistance of a conductor is the obstruction = 1.6  10 – 8  -m and

posed by the conductor to the flow of electric current
through it”.    f u s e d q u a r t z = maximum  10 1 6  -m
1. i.e., R = V/I ρinsulator >ρ alloy >ρ semi-conductor > ρ conductor
(M aximum for fused quartz) (M inim um for silver)
volt
2. The SI unit of electrical resistance is ohm or .
amp
SCAN CODE
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
134
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
(v) Resistivity depends on the temperature. For metals t Volume remains constant i.e., A1l1 = A2l2
= 0(1 + t) i.e. resistivity increases with After stretching length = l2, area of cross-section = A2,
l2
temperature.(where  is the temperature coefficient radius = r2, diameter = d2 and resistance  R 2  
A2
of resistance.)
Ratio of resistances before and after stretching
(vi) Resistivity increases with impurity and mechanical 2 2 4 4
R1 l1 A2  l1   A2   r2   d 2 
stress. = × =  =  =  = 
R 2 l2 A1  l2   A1   r1   d1 
(vii) Magnetic field increases the resistivity of all metals
2
except iron, cobalt and nickel. R l 
(1) If length is given then R  l  1   1 
2
R 2  l2 
(viii) Resistivity of certain substances like selenium,
4
cadmium, sulphides is inversely proportional to 1 R r 
intensity of light falling upon them. (2) If radius is given then R  4
 1  2 
r R 2  r1 
V m m 
3. We have, R    2 
I Ane  ne  A
2
comparing the above relation with the relation,

6. CURRENT DENSITY, CONDUCTANCE

R  . AND ELECTRICAL CONDUCTIVITY
A
4. We have, the resistivity of the material of a conductor,
6.1 Relation between J, s and E
m
 
ne2
 eE  n Ae E
2
We know, I = n Aevd = nAe   
m  m
5.2 Conductivity
I ne2 E 1
Reciprocal of resistivity is called conductivity () i.e. or  or J  E  J   E
A m 
1
 with unit mho/m and dimensions [M-1L-3T3 A2].
 1. Insulators: These are those materials whose electrical
conductivity is either very small or nil.
5.3 Conductance
Insulators do not conduct charges. When a small
1 potential difference is applied across the two ends of
Reciprocal of resistance is known as conductance. C 
R an insulator, the current through the insulator is zero.
1 Examples of insulators are glass, rubber, wood etc.
It’s unit is or –1 or “Siemen”.

2. Conductors: These are those materials whose
5.4 Stretching of Wire electrical conductivity is very high
If a conducting wire stretches, it’s length increases, area of Conductor conduct charges very easily. When a small
cross-section decreases so resistance increases but volume potential difference is applied across the two ends of
remain constant.
Suppose for a conducting wire before stretching it’s length = conductor, a strong current flow through the
l1, area of cross–section = A1, radius = r1, diameter = d1, and conductor. For super-conductor, the value of electrical
l1 conductivity is infinite and electrical resistivity is zero.
resistance = R 1  
A1 Examples of conductors are all metals like copper,
silver, aluminium, tungsten etc.
3. Semiconductors: These are those material whose
electrical conductivity lies in between that of
Fig. 3.12 insulators and conductors.
SCAN CODE
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
135
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
Semiconductors can conduct charges but not so easily

7. COLOUR CODE FOR CARBON RESISTOR
as is in case of conductors. When a small potential
difference is applied across the ends of a The colour code for carbon resistance is given in the
semiconductor, a weak current flow through following table.
semiconductor due to motion of electrons and holes. Colour Letter as No. Multi Colour Toler
Examples of semiconductors are germanium, silicon No. an plier ance
etc. Aid to
memory
The value of electrical resistance R increases with rise Black B 0 100 Gold 5%
of temperature. Brown B 1 101 Silver 10%
Red R 2 102 20%
R t  R0 increase in resistance
  Orange O 3 103 No
R0  t original resistance × rise of temp. Yellow Y 4 104 colour
Green G 5 105
Thus, temperature coefficient of resistance is defined
Blue B 6 106
as the increase in resistance per unit original resistance Violet V 7 107
per degree celsius or kelvin rise of temperature. Grey G 8 108
White W 9 109
1. For metals like silver, copper, etc., the value of  is
Gold 10-1
positive, therefore, resistance of a metal increases with Silver 10-2
rise in temperature.
–1 –1 To remember the value of colour coding used for carbon
The unit of  is K or °C .
resistor, the following sentences are found to be of great
2. For insulators and semiconductors  is negative, help (where bold letters stand for colours).
therefore, the resistance decreases with rise in B B ROY Green, Britain Very Good Wife Gold Silver.
Way of finding the resistance of carbon resistor from its
temperature.
colour coding.
In the system of colour coding, Strips of different colours
6.2 Non-Ohmic Devices are given on the body of the resistor, figure. The colours on
strips are noted from left to right.
Those devices which do not obey Ohm’s law are
called non-ohmic devices. For example, vaccum tubes,
semiconductor diode, liquid electrolyte, transistor etc.
For all non-ohmic devices (where there will be failure
A B C R
of Ohm’s law), V–I graph has one or more of the
Fig. 3.14
following characteristics:
(i) Colour of the first strip A from the end indicates the
1. The relation I and V is non-linear, first significant figure of resistance in ohm.
(ii) Colour of the second strip B indicate the second
significant figure of resistance in ohm.
(iii) The colour of the third strip C indicates the
multiplier, i.e., the number of zeros that will follow
after the two significant figure.
(iv) The colour of fourth strip R indicates the tolerance
limit of the resistance value or percentage accuracy of
resistance.
Fig. 3.13
SCAN CODE
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
136
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
8.2 Kirchhoff’s Second law or Kirchhoff’s loop Law or

8. KIRCHHOFF’S LAW Kirchhoff’s voltage law.
8.1 Kirchhoff’s first law or Kirchhoff’s junction law or 1. The algebraic sum of changes in potential around any
Kirchhoff’s current law. closed path of electric circuit (or closed loop)
1. The algebraic sum of the currents meeting at a junction involving resistors and cells in the loop is zero, i.e.,
in a closed electric circuit is zero, i.e., I  0 V  0.
2. Consider a junction O in the electrical circuit at which 2. In a closed loop, the algebraic sum of the emfs and
the five conductors are meeting. Let I1, I2, I3, I4 and I5 algebraic sum of the products of current and resistance
be the currents in these conductors in directions, in the various arms of the loop is zero, i.e.,
shown in figure, IR  0.
3. Kirchhoff’s second law supports the law of
I3 I2 conservation of energy, i.e., the net change in the
energy of a charge, after the charge completes a closed
path must be zero.
I1 4. Kirchhoff’s second law follows from the fact that the
electrostatic force is a conservative force and work
I4
I5 done by it in any closed path is zero.
5. Consider a closed electrical circuit as shown in figure.
containing two cells of emfs. 1 and 2 and three
3.28
resistors of resistances R1, R2 and R3.
3. Let us adopt the following sign convention: the current
flowing in a conductor towards the junction is taken as
positive and the current flowing away from the
junction is taken as negative.
4. According to Kirchhoff’s first law, at junction O
(–I1) + (–I2) + I3 + (–I4) + (–I5)= 0
or –I1 – I2 + I3 – I4 – I5 = 0
or I  0
or I3 – I5 = I1 + I2 + I4
5. Total current flowing towards the junction is equal to Fig. 3.29
We adopt the following sign convention:
total current flowing out of the junction.
1  I3R2  I1R1  0 ......(1)
6. Current cannot be stored at a junction. It means, no
point/junction in a circuit can act as a source or sink of 2  I3R2  I2 R3  0 ......(2)
charge.
7. Kirchhoff’s first law supports law of conservation of 1 2  I2 R3  I1R1  0 ......(3)
charge. Traverse a closed path of a circuit once completely in
clockwise or anticlockwise direction.
SCAN CODE
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
137
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
8.3 Difference between Kirchhoff’s I and II Laws 4. If Rs is the equivalent resistance of the given series
combination of resistances, then the potential
First Law Second Law
difference across A and B is, V = IRs. We have
1. This law supports the This law supports the law
IRs = I (R1 + R2 + R3) or R s  R1  R 2  R 3
law of conservation of conservation of energy.
of charge. NOTE:
2. According to this law According to this law (i) If t In a series resistance circuit, it should be noted
 I0    iR that the current is same in every resistor.
3. This law can be used This law can be used in (ii) The current in the circuit is independent of the
relative positions of the various resistors in the series.
in open and closed closed circuit only.
circuits. (iii) The voltage across any resistor is directly
proportional to the resistance of the resistor.
(iv) The total resistance of the circuit is equal to the sum
9. COMBINATION OF RESISTORS of the individual resistances, plus the internal resistance
of a cell if any.
9.1 Resistances in Series (v) When the total resistance in the series circuit is
obviously more than the greatest resistances in the
Resistors are said to be connected in series, if the same
circuit
current is flowing through each resistor when some potential
difference is applied across the combination. 9.2 Resistances in Parallel
Any number of resistors are said to be connected in parallel

if potential difference across each of them is the same and is
equal to the applied potential difference.
Fig. 3.15
1. Let V be the potential difference applied across A and
B using the battery . In series combination, the same
current (say I) will be passing through each resistance.
2. Let V1, V2, V3 be the potential difference across R1, R2
and R3 respectively. According to Ohm’s law Fig. 3.17
V1 = IR1, V2 = IR2, V3 = IR3 1. Let V be the potential difference applied across A and
B with the help of a battery of e.m.f. .
3. Here, V = V1 + V2 + V3 = IR1 + IR2 + IR3 = I (R1 + R2 +
R3) 2. Let I be the main current in the circuit from battery. I
divides itself into three unequal parts because the
resistances of these branches are different and I1, I2, I3
be the current through the resistances R1, R2 and R3
respectively. Then,
Fig. 3.16 I = I1 + I2 + I3
SCAN CODE
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
138
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
3. Here, potential difference across each resistor is V, 9.3 Special problems

therefore We wish to determine equivalent resistance between A and
V = I1R1 = I2 R2 = I3R3 B. In figure shown points (1,2) (3, 4, 5) and (6, 7) are at
V V V same potential Equivalent circuit can be redrawn as in figure
or I1  , I2  , I3 
R1 R2 R3 shown.
Putting values, we get The equivalent resistance of this series combination is
V V V r r r r 3r
I   R eq. = + + + =
R1 R 2 R 3 2 4 4 2 2
4. If Rp is the equivalent resistance of the given parallel
combination of resistance, then
Fig. 3.19
In the figure shown, the resistances specified are in ohms.
We wish to determine the equivalent resistance between
Fig. 3.18 point A and D. Point B and C, E and F are the the same
V = IRp or I = V/Rp potential so the circuit can be redrawn as in figure shown.
we have Thus the equivalent resistance is Ω
1 1 1 1
V

V

V

V or   
Rp R1 R 2 R3 R p R1 R 2 R3
Thus, the reciprocal of equivalent resistance of a number

of resistor connected in parallel is equal to the sum of the
reciprocals of the individual resistances.
NOTE: Fig. 3.20 Fig. 3.21

In a parallel resistance circuit, it should be noted that: In the network shown in figure shown all the resistances are
(i) the potential difference across each resistor is the equal, we wish to determine equivalent resistance between
same and is equal to the applied potential A and E. Point B and D have same potential, similarly F and
difference. H have same potential.
(ii) the current through each resistor is inversely The equivalent circuit is shown in figure shown. The
proportional to the resistance of that resistor. equivalent resistance of network is 7R/2.
(iii) total current through the parallel combination is
the sum of the individual currents through the
various resistors.
(iv) The reciprocal of the total resistance of the
parallel combination is equal to the sum of the
reciprocals of the individual resistances.
(v) The total resistances are connected in series, the
current through each resistance is same. When the
resistance are in parallel, the pot-diff. across each
resistance is the same and not the current. Fig. 3.22
SCAN CODE
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
139
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
9.3.1 Ladder Problem
Fig. 3.26
Fig. 3.23 Find the effective resistance between A & B?
Example: In the circuit shown in figure (a) find the current Sol. Let the effective resistance between A & B be RE since
flowing through the 100 resistor connecting points U and the network is infinite long, removal of one cell from the
chain will not change the network. The effective resistance
S.
between points C & D would also be RE.
Sol. Figure (b) shows simplified circuit. The battery is
The equivalent network will be as shown below
directly attached to resistor 90 hence current in it is 2 A,
see figure (c), The total resistance of second branch is also
90, hence current divides equally. Now current through
45 resistor is 2 A and it is a combination of two equal 90
resistors. Once again current divides equally. 90 resistor is
a series combination of 40 and 50, hence current through Fig. 3.27
The original infinite chain is equivalent to R in series with R
them is equal, i.e.,
RR E
& RE in parallel R E = R +
R + RE
RER + RE2 = R2 + 2RRE RE2 – RRE – R2 = 0
RE =

R 1 5 
2
Example: Find the equivalent resistance between A & B?
Fig. 3.24
Fig. 3.28
Sol. As moving rom one section to next one, resistance is
increasing
Fig. 3.25 Fig. 3.29

by k times. Since the network is infinitely long, removal of
As 50 resistor is a parallel combination of two equal 100
one section from the chain will bring a little change in the
resistors, they must have the same current i.e., 0.5 A network.
SCAN CODE
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
140
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
The effective resistance between points C & D would be II Method : Folding Symmetry
kRE (where RE is the effective resistance)
∴ The potential difference in R between (B, C) and between
R  kR E  (B, D) is same VC = VD
∴ Effective R between A & B R E = R +
kR E + R
On solving we get
 R – 2kR 
2
2kR – R + + 4R 2
RE =
2k
9.3.2. Symmetrical Circuits : Fig. 3.32
Some circuits can be modified to have simpler solution by Hence the point C and D are same hence circuit can be
using symmetry if they are solved by traditional method of simplified as. This called folding.
KVL and KCL then it would take much time. Now , it is Balanced Wheatstone bridge
Example: Find the equivalent Resistance between A and B
Fig. 3.33
Fig. 3.30
2R × R 2R
Sol. I Method : Mirror Symmetry R eq = =
2R + R 3
The branches AC and AD are symmetrical
In II Method it is not necessary to know the currents in CA
∴ current through them will be same.
and DA
The circuit is also similar from left side and right side like
Example:
mirror images with a mirror placed alone CD therefore
Find the equivalent Resistance between A and B
current distribution while entering through B and an exiting
from A will be same. Using all these facts the currents are as
shown in the figure. It is clear that current in resistor
between C and E is 0 and also in ED is 0. It's equivalent is
shown in figure (b)
Fig. 3.34
In this case the circuit has symmetry in the two branches
AC and AD at the input
∴ current in them are same but from input and from exit the
Fig. 3.31 circuit is not similar (∵ on left R and on right 2R)
2R
R eq =
3
SCAN CODE
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
141
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
∴ on both sides the distribution of current will not be

similar.
Fig. 3.38
Here VA = VC and VB = VD
Here the circuit can be simplified as
Fig. 3.35
Here Vc = Vd
hence C and D are same point
So, the circuit can be simplified as
Now it is balanced wheat stone bridge.
Fig. 3.39
Sol.
Fig. 3.36
3R 9
3R × R Fig. 3.40
R eq = 2 = 2 = R
3R 9
3R +
2 2
Example: Find the equivalent Resistance between A and B
Fig. 3.41
Example:
Twelve equal resistors each R are connected to form the
edges of a cube. Find the equivalent resistances of the
network.
Fig. 3.37
Sol.
SCAN CODE
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
142
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
Fig. 3.42
(a) When current enters at 1 & leaves at 6 (body diagonal)
Sol. Here 2, 4, 8 are equipotential points (if we move from
1 2, 4, 8 it comes along the edge & 62, 4, 8 it comes along
face diagonal). Similarly 3, 5, 7 are equipotential points.
Fig. 3.45
10. CELL
Fig. 3.43 The device which converts chemical energy into electrical
(b) When current enters at 1 and leaves at 2 energy is known as electric cell.
Sol. Here 3, 7 are equipotential surface (if we move from 1 Cell is a source of constant emf but not constant current.
3, 7 we have along face and 2,3, 7 wemove along edge)
similarly 4, 8 are equipotential surface.
Fig. 3.46
1. Emf of cell (E) : The potential difference across the
terminals of a cell when it is not supplying any
current is called it’s emf.

Fig. 3.44
2 Potential difference (V) : The voltage across the
(c) When current enters at 1 and leaves at 3
terminals of a cell when it is supplying current to
Sol. If we cut the cube along the plane passing through 2, 4,
external resistance is called potential difference or
5, 7 then by mirror symmetry, the final configuration will be
terminal voltage. Potential difference is equal to the
product of current and resistance of that given part
i.e. V = iR.
SCAN CODE
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
143
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
3 Internal resistance (r) : In case of a cell the

opposition of electrolyte to the flow of current
through it is called internal resistance of the cell. The
internal resistance of a cell depends on the distance
between electrodes (r  d), area of electrodes [r 
(1/A)] and nature, concentration (r  C) and
temperature of electrolyte [r  (1/ temp.)]. Fig. 3.48

A cell is said to be ideal, if it has zero internal (i) Current through the circuit i = 0
resistance. (ii) Potential difference between A and B, VAB = E
(iii) Potential difference between C and D, VCD
10.1 Cell in Various Positions =0
1. Closed circuit: Cell supplies a constant current in the

circuit. 3. Short circuit: If two terminals of cell are join together
by a thick conducting wire
R=0
E, r
Fig. 3.47 Fig. 3.49

E
(i) Current given by the cell i  (i) Maximum current (called short circuit current) flows
Rr E
momentarily isc 
(ii) Potential difference across the resistance V = iR r
(ii) Potential difference V = 0
(iii) Potential drop inside the cell = ir
NOTE:
(iv) Equation of cell E = V + ir (E > V)
(i) It is important to note that during charging of a cell,
E  the positive electrode of the cell is connected to
(v) Internal resistance of the cell r   1 .R
V  positive terminal of battery charger and negative
electrode of the cell is connected to negative
(vi) When the cell is being charged i.e. current is given
terminal of battery charger. In this process, current
to the cell then E = V – ir and E < V.
flows from positive electrode to negative electrode
2. Open circuit: When no current is taken from the cell through the cell. Refer figure
it is said to be in open circuit.
SCAN CODE
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
144
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
Charger 4 It is a cause It is an effect

+ –
I I 10.3 Grouping of Cells
In series grouping of cells their emfs are additive or

subtractive while their internal resistances are always
Fig. 3.50 additive. If dissimilar plates of cells are connected together
 V =  + Ir their emfs are added to each other while if their similar
Hence, the terminal potential difference becomes plates are connected together their emf’s are subtractive.
greater than the emf of the cell.
(ii) The difference of emf and terminal voltage is called E1 E1
E2 E2
lost voltage as it is not indicated by a voltmeter. It Eeq = E1 + E2 Eeq = E1 – E2 (E1 > E2)
is equal to Ir. r = r1 + r2 r = r1 + r2
Fig. 3.51
1. Series grouping: In series grouping anode of one
cell is connected to cathode of other cell and so on. If
n identical cells are connected in series
10.2 Distinction between E.M.F. and Potential
Difference
E, r E, r E, r E, r
E.M.F. of a Cell Potential Difference

1 The emf of a cell is the The potential difference i
maximum potential between the two points R
difference between the is the difference of

two electrodes of a cell potential between those Fig. 3.52
when the cell is in the two points in a closed (i) Equivalent emf of the combination Eeq = nE
open circuit. circuit. (ii) Equivalent internal resistance req = nr
(iii) Main current = Current from each cell
2 It is independent of the It depends upon the nE
i 
resistance of the circuit resistance between the R  nr
and depends upon the two points of the circuit (iv) Potential difference across external resistance V = iR
nature of electrodes and and current flowing V
(v) Potential difference across each cell V ' 
the nature of electrolyte through the circuit. n
of the cell. (vi) Power dissipated in the external circuit
3 The term emf is used for The potential difference  nE 
2
  .R
the source of electric is measured between  R  nr 
current. any two points of the (vii) Condition for maximum power R = nr and
circuit.  E2 
Pmax  n  
 4r 
SCAN CODE
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
145
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
(viii) This type of combination is used when nr << R.

E, r E, r E, r
1
1 2 n
2. Parallel grouping: In parallel grouping all anodes
are connected at one point and all cathodes are 2
connected together at other point. If n identical cells i

are connected in parallel m
E, r V
E, r R
E, r
Fig. 3.54
i
R (i) Equivalent emf of the combination Eeq = nE
(ii) Equivalent internal resistance of the combination
Fig. 3.53 nr
req 
(i) Equivalent emf Eeq = E m
(ii) Equivalent internal resistance Req = r/n
(iii) Main current flowing through the load
E
(iii) Main current i 
Rr/ n nE mnE
i 
(iv) Potential difference across external resistance = p.d. nr mR  nr
R
across each cell = V = iR m
i (iv) Potential difference across load V = iR
(v) Current from each cell i ' 
n V
(v) Potential difference across each cell V ' 
(vi) Power dissipated in the circuit P   E 
2
n
 .R
R r/n i
(vi) Current from each cell i ' 
(vii) Condition for max. power is n
nr
 E2  (vii) Condition for maximum power R  and
R  r / n and Pmax  n  m
 4r  E2
Pmax  (mn)
(viii) This type of combination is used when nr >> R 4r
(viii) Total number of cell = mn
Generalized Parallel Battery
E1 E 2 E NOTE:
  ... n
r r2 rn
E eq  1 and 1  1  1  ... 1 . (i) If the two cells connected in parallel are of the same
1 1 1 req r1 r2 rn
  ... emf  and same internal resistance r, then
r1 r2 rn
2. Mixed Grouping: If n identical cells are connected r r

eq  
in a row and such m rows are connected in parallel as r r
shown. r
1 1 1 2
   req 
req r r r 2
or
(ii) If n identical cells are connected in parallel, then the
SCAN CODE
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
146
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
equivalent emf of all the cells is equal to the emf of one 11.1 Electric Power
cell. The rate at which electrical energy is dissipated into other
1 1 1 n or r = r/n forms of energy is called electrical power i.e.
   ...  n term s  eq
req r r r W V2
P= = Vi = i2 R =
t R
1. Units: It’s S.I. unit is Joule/sec or Watt. Bigger S.I.
11. HEATING EFFECT OF CURRENT units are KW, MW and HP, remember 1 HP = 746 Watt
2. Rated values: On electrical appliances (Bulbs, Heater
When some potential difference V is applied across a … etc.)
resistance R then the work done by the electric field on
charge q to flow through the circuit in time t will be
40 W
V2 t
W = qV = Vit = i2Rt .  Joule 220 V
R
Fig. 3.56
Wattage, voltage, ……. etc. are printed called rated
3.55
values e.g. If suppose we have a bulb of 40 W, 220 V
This work appears as thermal energy in the resistor.
then rated power (PR) = 40 W while rated voltage (VR)
Heat produced by the resistance R is
= 220 V. It means that on operating the bulb at 220 volt,
2 2
W Vit i Rt V t the power dissipated will be 40 W or in other words 40
H    Cal. This relation is called
J 4  2 4  2 4  2R
J of electrical energy will be converted into heat and
Joules heating. light per second.
Some important relations for solving objective questions are 3. Resistance of electrical appliance: If variation of
as follow:
resistance with temperature is neglected then resistance
Condition Graph
If R and t are constant of any electrical appliance can be calculated by rated
H  i2 and H  V2 2
power and rated voltage i.e. R = V R by using e.g.
PR
Resistance of 100W, 220 volt bulb is

If i and t are constant
(series grouping) H  R 220  220
R  484 
100
4. Power consumed (illumination) : An electrical

If V and t are constant
1 appliance (Bulb, heater, …. etc.) consumes rated power

(Parallel grouping) H 
R (PR) only if applied voltage (VA) is equal to rated
If V, i and R constant voltage (VR) i.e. If VA = VR so Pconsumed = PR. If VA < VR
VA2 V R2
then Pconsumed  also we have R 
R PR
SCAN CODE
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
147
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
 VA2   Resistance R25 > R100 > R1000

So, Pconsumed (Brightness)   .P
2  R
 VR   Thickness of filament t1000 > t100 > t40
Pconsumed  (Brightness) e.g.  Brightness B1000 > B100 > B25
If 100 W, 220 V bulb operates on 110 volt supply then 11.2 Maximum power transfer theorem
2
 110 
Pconsum ed  
Power dissipated in external resistance (load)
  10 0  25 W
 220  2
V2  E 
P  Vi  i2 R    .R
R Rr
NOTE:
Power delivered will be maximum when
If VA < VR then % drop in output power
E2
(P  P ) R = r so Pmax  .
 R consumed  100 4r
PR
This statement is called “maximum power transfer
For the series combination of bulbs, current through
theorem”.
them will be same so they will consume power in the
ratio of resistance i.e., P  R {By P = i2R) while if they
are connected in parallel i.e. V is constant so power
consumed by them is in the reverse ratio of their
1
resistance i.e. P  .
R
Fig. 3.57
5. Thickness of filament of bulb: We know that resistance
of filament of bulb is given by VR2 also
R , 11.3 Electric Energy
PR
l 1 The total electric work done or energy supplied by the

R  , hence we can say that A  PR  i.e.
A  Thickness R source of emf in maintaining the current in an electric circuit
If rated power of a bulb is more, thickness of it’s for a given time is called electric energy consumed in the
filament is also more and it’s resistance will be less.
circuit.
1
If applied voltage is constant then P(consumed)  Electric energy, W = VIt = P.t
R
Electric energy = electric power × time
VA2
(By P  ). Hence if different bulbs (electrical SI unit of electric energy is joule, where
R
1 joule = 1 volt × 1 ampere × 1 second = 1 watt × 1 second
appliance) operated at same voltage supply then
The commercial unit of electric energy is called a kilowatt-
1
Pconsumed  PR  thickness  hour (kWh) or Board to Trade Unit (BOT) or UNIT of
R:
Electricity, in brief, where
NOTE: 1 kWh = 1 kilo watt × 1 hour = 1000 watt × 1 hour
25W 100W 1000W Thus 1 kilo watt hour is the total electric energy consumed
220V 220V 220V
Different bulbs when an electrical appliance of power 1 kilo-watt works for
one hours.
6
1 kWh = 1000 Wh = (1000 W) × (60 × 60 s) = 3.6 × 10 J.
SCAN CODE
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
148
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
Note that the number of units of electricity consumed = No. 1 i.e. in parallel combination
V  R 
watt  hour Prated bulb of greater wattage will
of kWh =
1000 give more bright light and
Electric energy  VI t  I 2 Rt  V 2 t / R i.e. in series more current will pass
combination bulb of through it.
11.4 Electricity Consumption
lesser wattage will
1. The price of electricity consumed is calculated on the give more bright light
basis of electrical energy and not on the basis of and p.d. appeared
electrical power. across it will be
2. The unit Joule for energy is very small hence a big more.
practical unit is considered known as kilowatt hour
(KWH) or board of trade unit (B.T.U.) or simple
12. EXPERIMENTS
unit.
3. 1 KWH or 1 unit is the quantity of electrical energy 12.1 Galvanometer
which dissipates in one hour in an electrical circuit It is an instrument used to detect small current passing
when the electrical power in the circuit is 1 KWH through it by showing deflection. Galvanometers are of
thus 1 KWH = 1000 W  3600 sec = 3.6  10 J. 6
different types e.g. moving coil galvanometer, moving
3. Important formulae to calculate the no. of consumed magnet galvanometer, hot wire galvanometer. In dc circuit
units is usually moving coil galvanometer is used.
Total watt  Total hours
n (i) It’s symbol: ; where G is the total
1000 internal resistance of the galvanometer.
(ii) Full scale deflection current: The current required
11.5 Combination of Bulbs (or Electrical Appliances) for full scale deflection in a galvanometer is called
Bulbs (Heater etc.) Bulbs (Heater etc.) full scale deflection current and is represented by ig.
are in series are in parallel (iii) Shunt: The small resistance connected in parallel to
(1) Total power Total power consumed galvanometer coil, in order to control current flowing
consumed Ptotal = P1 + P2 + P3 .... + Pn through the galvanometer is known as shunt.
1 1 1 P1 TABLE: Merits and demerits of shunt
   ....
Ptotal P1 P2 Merits of shunt Demerits of shunt
P2
P1 P2 To protect the galvanometer Shunt resistance
Supply
coil from burning. decreases the
Supply It can be used to convert any sensitivity of
galvanometer into ammeter galvanometer.
(2) In ‘n’ bulbs are If ‘n’ identical bulbs are in of desired range.
identical, parallel. Ptotal = nP
12.2 Ammeter
P Pconsumed  Brightness  It is a device used to measure current and is always
Ptotal 
N connected in series with the ‘element’ through which current
1 is to be measured.
Pconsumed  Brightness   PR  i 
R
SCAN CODE
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
149
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
R
V
i A R
+ – + –
V V
Fig. 3.58 Fig. 3.60

1. The reading of an ammeter is always lesser than (i) The reading of a voltmeter is always lesser than true
actual current in the circuit. value.
2. Smaller the resistance of an ammeter more accurate (ii) Greater the resistance of voltmeter, more accurate
will be its reading. An ammeter is said to be ideal if will be its reading. A voltmeter is said to be ideal if
its resistance r is zero. its resistance is infinite, i.e., it draws no current from
3. Conversion of galvanometer into ammeter: A the circuit element for its operation.
galvanometer may be converted into an ammeter by (iii) Conversion of galvanometer into voltmeter: A
connecting a low resistance (called shunt S) in galvanometer may be converted into a voltmeter by
parallel to the galvanometer G as shown in figure. connecting a large resistance R in series with the
galvanometer as shown in the figure.
S
R
i – ig G
i
G Vg= i G (V – Vg)
ig ig
Ammeter
V
Fig. 3.59
Fig. 3.61
GS
1. Equivalent resistance of the combination  (a) Equivalent resistance of the combination = G + R
G S
(b) According to ohm’s law Maximum reading of V
2. G and S are parallel to each other hence both will
which can be taken V = ig (G + R); which gives
have equal potential difference i.e. i g G  (i  i g ) S ;
V V 
which gives Required shunt S = ig Required series resistance R = – G =  –1 G
G
ig V 
(i – i g )  g 
i (c) If nth part of applied voltage appeared across

3. To pass nth part of main current (i.e. ig  ) V
n
galvanometer (i.e. Vg  ) then required series
G n
through the galvanometer, required shunt S =
(n –1) resistance R = (n – 1) G.
12.4 Wheatstone Bridge Principle

12.3 Voltmeter
Wheatstone Bridge Principle states that if four resistances P,
It is a device used to measure potential difference and is
Q, R and S are arranged to form a bridge as shown in figure,
always put in parallel with the ‘circuit element’ across
if galvanometer shows no deflection, the bridge is balanced.
which potential difference is to be measured.
SCAN CODE
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
150
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
P R P R
In that case  Dividing (3) by (4), we get 
Q S Q S
Note that in Wheatstone bridge circuit, arms AB and BC
having resistances P and Q form ratio arm. The arm AD,
having a resistance R, is a known variable resistance arm
and arm DC, having a resistance S is unknown resistance
arm.
1. Balanced bridge: The bridge is said to be balanced
when deflection in galvanometer is zero i.e. no current
flows through the galvanometer or in other words VB =

Fig. 3.62
P R
Proof: VD. In the balanced condition = , on mutually
Q S
Let I be the total current given out by the cell. On reaching
the point A, it is divided into two parts : changing the position of cell and galvanometer this
I1 is flowing through P
condition will not change.
(I – I1) through R.
2. Unbalanced bridge: If the bridge is not balanced
At B, the current I1 is divided into two parts, Ig through the
current will flow from D to B if VD > VB i.e.(VA - VD) <
galvanometer G and (I1 – Ig) through Q.
A current (I – I1 + Ig) through S. (VA - VB) which gives PS > RQ.
Applying Kirchhoff’s Second Law to the closed circuit 3. Applications of whetstone bridge: Meter bridge, post
ABDA, we get
office box and Carey Foster bridge are instruments
I1P + Ig G – (I – I1) R = 0 ...(1)
based on the principle of Wheatstone bridge and are
where G is the resistance of galvanometer.
used to measure unknown resistance.
Again applying Kirchhoff’s Second Law to the closed
12.5 Slide Wire Bridge or Meter Bridge
circuit BCDB, we get
1. A slide wire bridge is a practical form of Wheatstone
(I1 – Ig) Q – (I – I1 + Ig) S – IgG = 0 ...(2)
bridge.
The value of R is adjusted such that the galvanometer shows 2. It consists of a wire AC of constantan or manganin of
1 metre length and of uniform area of cross-section.
no deflection, i.e., Ig = 0. Now, the bridge is balanced.
3. A meter scale is also fitted on the wooden board
Putting Ig = 0 in (1) and (2) we have parallel to the length of the wire.
4. Copper strip is fitted on the wooden board in order to
I1P – (I – I1) R = 0 or I1P = (I – I1) R ...(3)
provide two gaps in strips.
and I1Q – (I – I1) S = 0 or I1Q = (I – I1) S ...(4)
SCAN CODE
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
151
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
5. Across one gap, a resistance box R and in another gap length of the wire. The potentiometer is provided with
the unknown resistance S are connected. a jockey J with the help of which, the contact can be
6. The positive pole of the battery E is connected to made at any point on the wire, figure. A battery 
terminal A and the negative pole of the battery to (called driving cell), connected across A and B sends
terminal C through one way key K. the current through the wire which is kept constant by
7. The circuit is now exactly the same as that of the using a rheostat Rh.
Wheatstone bridge figure.
Fig. 3.64
Fig. 3.63 Principle: The working of a potentiometer is based on
Adjust the position of jockey on the wire (say at B) the fact that the fall of potential across any portion of
where on pressing, galvanometer shows no deflection. the wire is directly proportional to the length of that
Note the length AB ( = l say) to the wire. Find the portion provided the wire is of uniform area of cross-
length BC ( = 100 – l) of the wire. section and a constant current is flowing through it.
P R Suppose A and  are respectively the area of cross-

According to Wheatstone bridge principle 
Q S section and specific resistance of the material of the
If r is the resistance per cm length of wire, then wire.
P = resistance of the length l of the wire AB = lr Let V be the potential difference across the portion of
Q = resistance of the length (100 – l) of the wire BC = the wire of length l whose resistance is R.
(100 – l) r. If I is the current flowing through the wire, then from
r R  1 00    Ohm’s law; V = IR; As, R = l/A

  or S    R
1 00    r S   
  I 
 V  I  K,  where K  
Knowing l and R, we can calculate S. A  A
or V  l (if I and A are constant)
12.6 Potentiometer and its Principle of Working
i.e., potential difference across any portion of
1. Potentiometer is an apparatus used for measuring the
potentiometer wire is directly proportional to length of
emf of a cells or potential difference between two
points in an electrical circuit accurately. the wire of that protion.
2. A potentiometer consists of a long uniform wire Here, V/l = K = is called potential gradient, i.e., the
generally made of manganin or constantan, stretched fall of potential per unit length of wire.
on a wooden board.
3. Its ends are connected to the binding screws A and B.
12.7 Determination of Potential Difference using
A meter scale is fixed on the board parallel to the Potentiometer
SCAN CODE
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
152
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
A battery of emf  is connected between the end terminals A 3. If r is the resistance of potentiometer wire of length L,
and B of potentiometer wire with ammeter A1, resistance 
then current through potentiometer wire is I 
box R and key K in series. This circuit is called an auxillary Rr
circuit. The ends of resistance R1 are connected to terminals Potential drop across potentiometer wire. Potential
A and Jockey J through galvanometer G. A cell 1 and key gradient of potentiometer wire, i.e., fall of potential per
K1 are connected across R1 as shown in figure.   r   r

unit length is K    . V  Rr  L
Rr L  
Hence, V can be calculated.
12.8 Comparison of emfs of two Cells using

Potentiometer
A battery of emf  is connected between the end terminals
A and B of potentiometer wire with rheostat Rh, ammeter
A1 and key K in series.
The positive terminals of both the cells are connected to
point A of the potentiometer. Their negative terminals are
connected to two terminals 1 and 2 of two ways key, while
Fig. 3.65 its common terminal 3 is connected to jockey J through a
Working and Theory: Close key K and take out galvanometer G.
suitable resistance R from resistance box so that the Insert the plug in the gap between the terminals 1 and 3 of
fall of potential across the potentiometer wire is two way key so that the cell of emf 1 is in the circuit.
greater than the potential difference to be measured. Adjust the position of jockey on potentiometer wire, where
if pressed, the galvanometer shows no deflection. Let it be
1. It can be checked by pressing, firstly the jockey J on when jockey be at J1. Note the length AJ1 (= l1 say) of the
potentiometer wire near end A and later on near end B,
wire.
the deflections in galvanometer are in opposite
directions. There is no current in arm AJ1. It means the potential of
2. Close key K1. The current flows through R1. A positive terminal of cell = potential of the point A, and the
potential difference is developed across R1. Adjust the potential of negative terminal of cell = potential of the
position of jockey on potentiometer wire where if point J1.
pressed, the galvanometer shows no deflection. Let it
be when jockey is at J. Note the length AJ (= l) of
potentiometer wire. This would happen when potential
difference across R1 is equal to the fall of potential
across the potentiometer wire of length l. If K is the
potential gradient of potentiometer wire, then potential
difference across R1, i.e., V = Kl
Fig. 3.66
SCAN CODE
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
153
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
Therefore, the e.m.f. of the cell ( =1) is equal to potential

difference between the points A and J1 of the potentiometer
wire. i.e., 1 = Kl1 ...(1)
where K is the potential gradient across the potentiometer
wire.
Now remove the plug from the gap between 1 and 3 and
insert in the gap between 2 and 3 of two way key so that
cells of emf 2 comes into the circuit. Again find the position
Fig. 3.67
of jockey on potentiometer wire, where galvanometer shows
Close key K and maintain suitable constant current in the
no deflection. Let it be at J2. Note the length of the wire AJ2
potentiometer wire with the help of rheostat Rh. Adjust the
( = l2 say). Then 2 = Kl2 ...(2) position of jockey on the potentiometer wire where if
1  pressed, the galvanometer show no deflection. Let it be

Dividing (1) by (2), we get  1
2  2 when jockey is as J1. Note the length AJ1 (= l1) of the
12.9 Precautions of Experiment potentiometer wire. Now emf of the cell,  = potential
1. The current in the potentiometer wire from driving cell difference across the length l1 of the potentiometer wire.
must be kept constant during experiment. or  = Kl1 ...(1)

2. While adjusting the position of jockey on where K is the potential gradient across the wire.
potentiometer wire, the edge of jockey should not be Close key K1 and take out suitable resistance R from the
rubbed on the wire, otherwise area of cross-section of resistance box in the cell circuit. Again find the position of
wire will not be uniform and constant. the jockey on the potentiometer wire where galvanometer
3. The current in the potentiometer wire from driving cell shows no deflection. Let it be at J2. Note the length of the
should not be passed for long time as this would cause
wire AJ2 ( = l2 say). As current is being drawn from the cell,
heating effect, resulting the change in resistance of
its terminal potential difference V is balanced and not emf .
wire.
Therefore, potential difference between two poles of the
NOTE: cell, V = potential difference across the length l2 of the
A balance point is obtained on the potentiometer wire if
potentiometer wire
the fall of potential along the potentiometer wire, due to
driving cell is greater than the e.m.f. of the cells to be i.e. V = Kl2 ...(2)
balanced. Dividing (1) by (2), we have
 1
12.10 Determination of Internal Resistance of a Cell by  ...(3)
Potentiometer V 2
We know that the internal resistance r of a cell of emf ,

To find the internal resistance r of a cell of emf  using
potentiometer, set up the circuit as shown in figure. when a resistance R is connected in its circuit is given by
V  
r  R    1 R ...(4)
V V 
Putting the value (3) in (4), we get
SCAN CODE
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
154
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
    13.CHARGING AND DISCHARGING OF

r   1 1 R  1 2  R
 2  2 CAPACITOR IN SERIES RC CIRCUIT
Thus, knowing the values of l1, l2 and R, the internal
As shown in the following figure (A) when switch S is
resistance r of the cell can be determined. closed, capacitor starts charging. In this transient state
12.11 Sensitiveness of Potentiometer potential difference appears across capacitor as well as
The sensitiveness of potentiometer means the smallest resistor. When capacitor gets fully charged the entire
potential difference that can be measured with its help. potential difference appears across the capacitor and nothing
The sensitiveness of a potentiometer can be increased by is left for the resistor. [Shown in figure (B)]
decreasing its potential gradient. The same can be achieved. (i) Charging:
1. By increasing the length of potentiometer wire.
Q Q dQ
2. If the potentiometer wire is of fixed length, the V = VC + VR   IR   R
C C dt
potential gradient can be decreased by reducing the
Charge at any instant
current in the potentiometer wire circuit with the help
of rheostat and using a single cell. Q  CV 1  et RC 
 Q0 1  et RC 
   
12.12 Difference between Potentiometer and Voltmeter
At t = = RC = time constant
Potentiometer Voltmeter
Q = Q0 [1 – e–1] = 0.632 Q0
1. It measures the emf It measures the emf of a
So, in charging, charge increases to 63.2% of charge in the
of a cell very cell approximately.
time equal to .
accurately. Current at any instant
2. While measuring While measuring emf, it i = dQ/dt =  i0 e  t / RC {i0 = Q0/RC}
emf it does not draw draws some current from Potential at any instant
any current the source of emf. V  V0 (1  et RC )

from the source of In transient state of charging charge on the capacitor at any
 t

instant Q  Q 0  1  e RC  and potential difference across the
 
known emf.
3 While measuring While measuring emf capacitor at any instant
emf, the resistance resistance of voltmeter is  t


V  V0  1  e RC 
of potentiometer high but finite.  
becomes infinite. (Here Q and V are the instantaneous values of charge and
4. Its sensitivity is Its sensitivity is low. potential difference while maximum charge on capacitor is
high. Q0  CV0 )
5. It is based on null It is based on deflection (ii) Discharging:
deflection method. method. VC + V R = 0
6. It can be used for It can be used only to Charge at any instant
Q = Q0e–t/RC
various purposes. measure emf or potential
At t = = RC = time constant
difference.
Q = Q0 e–1 = 0.368 Q0
SCAN CODE
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
155
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
So, in discharging, charge decreases to 36.8% of the initial

charge in the time equal to . Q0 Q0
Current at any instant  Q Q = Q0(1 – e –t/RC
) Q Q = Q0 e–t/RC
i = dQ/dt =  i0 e  t / RC {i0 = Q0/RC}
O t O t
Potential at any instant
Charge on the capacitor increases with Charge on the capacitor decreases with
V  V0 et RC time during charging time during discharging
After the completion of charging, if battery is removed

capacitor starts discharging. In transient state charge on the
Fig. 3.69
capacitor at any instant Q  Q 0 e  t / RC and potential
(iii) Time constant () : The quantity RC is called the time
 t / CR
difference cross the capacitor at any instant V  V0 e . constant as it has the dimension of time during charging if
C R C R t    RC , Q  Q 0 (1  e 1 )  0.63Q 0 = 63% of Q0
+ – + –
V V V0 1
(  0.37 ) or during discharging it is defined as the time
i e
– + – during which charge on a capacitor falls to 0.37 times (37%)

S + S
V0 V0
of the initial charge on the capacitor.
(A) Transient state (B) Steady state
Fig. 3.678
SCAN CODE
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
156
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
SOLVED EXAMPLES
The charge flowing in a conductor varies with time as, A wire of resistance 5  is drawn out so that its length is
1 1
q  at  bt 2  ct 3
increased by twice its original length. Calculate its new
2 6
where a, b, c are positive constants.
resistance.
Then, f ind
Sol. Here, R1 = 5; l1 = l say ; A1 = A, say
(i) the initial current
(ii) the time after which the value of curent reaches a R2 = ? ; l2 = 2l + l = 3l; A2 = ?
maximum value
If V is the volumne of the wire of length l and area of cross-
(iii) the maximum or minimum value of current.
section A, then
Sol.
(i) Current, V = Al or A = V/l
dq d  1 1  1
i   at  bt 2  ct 3   a  bt  ct 2 ...(i)   2
dt dt  2 6  2 Now R     R  2
A V/ V
When t = 0,  i = a
di [  and V are constants]
(ii)   b  ct.
dt
or R 2   3   9
R 2  22 2
For i to be maximum or minimum, Hence, 
R1 12 5 2
di b
 0   b  ct or t 
dt c or R2 = 5 × 9 = 45 .
(iii) Putting this value of t in (i), we have
Example - 4
b 1 b2 b2 b2 b2
i = a – b ×  c   a   a .
c 2 c c 2c 2c A copper wire is stretched to make it 0.2% longer. What is
As this value of i is less than that at t = 0, it must be minimum. the percentage change in its resistance ?
b2 Sol. The mass m of the wire of length  , area of cross section A

So minimum value of current = a –
2c and density d is given by
Example - 2 m
m = A d or A 
d
The current in a wire varies with time according to the
relation : i = (4 + 2t2)A The resistance R of the wire of resistivity  is given by
(a) How many coulombs pass a cross–section
  2 d
of the wire in the time interval between t = 5 R   k 2
and t = 10 s ? A m
(b) What constant current could transport the where k =  d/m is a constant of the wire.
same charge in same time interval ?
dR 2d
Sol. i (t) = 4 + 2 t2   ;
R 
  4  2t  dt  603.33 C
10 10
(a) q   i dt  2
5 5 dR 2  0.2
% increase in resistance   100   100
q 603.33 R 100
(b) i c    120.67 A.
t 10  5 = 0.4 %
157
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
Example - 5 Sol. We know that number for brown colour is 1, for violet colour
is 7 and that of yellow is 4. For gold, accuracy is 5%.
1 kg piece of copper is drawn into a wire 1 mm thick, and
another piece into a wire 2 mm thick. Compare the resistance  Resistance of resistor shown in figure.
of these wires. 4
= 17 × 10 ± 5%
(a) 2 : 1 (b) 4 : 1
(c) 8 : 1 (d) 16 : 1 = 0.17 Megaohm ± 5%
Ans. (d) Example - 8
Sol. As volume will remains same in case of both plese.
The resistance of a tungsten filament at 150° C is 133.
A1  l1  A2  l2
What will be its resistance at 500°C ? The temperature
–1
l1   106  l2  4 106 coefficient of resistance of tungsten is 0.0045°C at 0°C.
–1
l1  4l2 Sol. Here; R150 = 133 , R500 = ?,  = 0.0045°C
l We know, Rt = R0 (1 + t)
 1
R1 A1 l A 4l 4 106 16
  1  2  2   R150 = R0 (1 +  × 150)
R2  l2 A1 l2 l2  10 6 1
A2
or 133 = R0 (1 + 0.0045 × 150) ...(i)
Example - 6
And R500 = R0 (1 +  × 500)
A wire of resistance R is cut into n equal parts. These parts
or R500 = R0 (1 + 0.0045 × 500) ...(ii)
are then connected in parallel. The equivalent resistance of
the combination will be Dividing (ii) by (i) we get
(a) nR (b) R/n
2
(c) n/R (d) R/n . R 500 1  0.0045  500 3.25
Ans. (d)  
133 1  0.0045  150 1.675
Sol. Resistance of wire=R
If the wire is cut into n equal parts, resistance of each wire is
3.25
R or R 500  133  258.1
and connected in parallel 1.675
n
R Example - 9
R eq 
n2
A uniform wire or resistance R is shaped into a regular n
Example - 7 sided polygon where n is even. Find the equivalent
resistance between (i) opposite corners of polygon (ii)
The colour coded resistor is shown in figure. Compute adjacent corners of polygon.
the resistance in megaohm.
Sol. Let the polygon be as shown in figure. The resistance of
each side of polygon = R/n.
158
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
(i) For resistance between opposite corners C and G, we have Example - 11

two resistance in parallel each of value R/2.
(a) Given n resistors each of resistance R. How will you
Therefore, the equivalent resistance between opposite
combine them to get the (i) maximum effective
corner is
resistance ? What is the ratio of the maximum to minimum
R / 2 R / 2 R resistance ?
  .
 R / 2   R / 2 4 (b) Given the resistances of 1, 2, 3, how will you
combine them to get an equivalent resistance of (i) (11/
(ii) For resistance between adjacent corner A and H, we have
3)  (ii) (11/5)  (iii) 6 (iv) (6/11)  ?
two resistance of R/n and (n – 1) R/n in parallel. The
 R / n   n  1 R / n  n  1 Sol.
equivalent resistance is  R
 R / n    n  1 R / n n2 (a) For maximum effective resistance, the n resistors must be
connected in series.
Example - 10
Maximum effective resistance, in Rs = nR.
Six equal resistances each of 4 ohm are connected to form
a network as shown in figure. What is the resistance For minimum effective resistance, the n resistors must be
between A and B ? connectedd in parallel
minimum effective resistance, Rp = R/n
Rs nR
   n2
Rp R / n
(b) It is to be noted that the effective resistance of parallel

combination of resistors is less than the individual resistance
and the effective resistance of series combination of
resistors is more than individual resistance.
Sol. The upper five resistances between A and B will form a Case (i) Parallel combination of 1 and 2  is connected in
balanced. Wheatstone bridge. Hence there will be no current series with 3.
in arm CO. The equivalent circuit will be as shown in figure.
Here, resistances of arm ACB, AOB and AB are all in parallel. Effective resistance of 1 and 2  in parallel will be given
The effective resistance R is given by by R p  1  2  2 
1 2 3
2
 Equivalent resistance of  and 3 in series
3
2 11
 3  
3 3
Case (ii) : Parallel combination of 2  and 3  is connected

in series with 1  .
1 1 1 1
   Equivalent resistance of 2  and 3  in parallel
R  4  4 4  4 4
23 6
11 2 4 1   
   or R = 2 23 5
8 8 2
159
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
6 Let R be the equivalent resistance of the network between

Equivalent resistance of  and 1  in series A and B. The circuit starts repeating again to the right of
5
first 3 resistances. Hence R is also the resistance to the
6 11 right of C and D.
 1  
5 5
Case (iii) : All the resistance are to be connected in series.
Now
 Equivalent resistance = 1 + 2 + 3 = 6.
Case (iv): All the resistance are to be connected in parallel
 3R
1 1 1 1 R AB  2 
   R 3
 Equivalent resistance (R) is given by
R 1 2 3
3R
 R  2
6  3  2 11 6 R 3
  or R  .
6 6 11  R2 – 2R – 6 = 0
Example - 12  
R  1  7 . 
Explain why resistance becomes more in series Example - 15
combination.
State the factors on which (i) internal resistance
Sol. In series combination of resistors, the effective length of
the conductor increases. As R  l, therefore resistance (ii) emf of a cell depend.
increases.
Sol. Internal resistance of a cell depends upon; (i) distance
Example - 13 between the plates (ii) the nature of electrolyte (iii) the nature
of electrodes (iv) area of the plates, immersed in the
Explain why resistance becomes less in parallel electroyle. If area increases, internal resistance decreases.
combination.
E.M.F. of a cell depends upon; (i) nature of electrodes (ii)
Sol. In parallel combination of resistors, the effective area of nature and concentration of electrolyte used in the cell (iii)
cross-section of the conductor increases. As R  1/A, temperature of electrolyte.
therefore, resistance decreases.
Example - 16
Example - 14
In the circuit shown, the EMF of the cells are :
Find the resistance of the infinite network between A E1 = 10 V; E 2 = 40 V; R = 15; internal resistances are
and B in the figure. r1 = 1 ; r2 = 2. Calculate the current through R and
the potential difference across the terminals of each
cell.
Sol.
Sol. The two cells are equivalent to a single cell of emf
E = E2 – E1 = 40 V – 10V = 30 V
160
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
Applying Kirchhoff’s Second Law to the closed circuit

ARBE1A,
(I1 + I2) × 12 + I1 × 0.5 – 6 = 0
or 12.5 I1 + 12 I2 = 6 ...(i)
Applying Kirchhoff’s Second Law to the closed circuit
ARBE2 A, we get
(I1 + I2) × 12 + I2 × 1 – 10 = 0
or 12 I1 + 13 I2 = 10 ...(ii)
Multiplying (i) by 13 and (ii) by 12, we get
162.5 I1 + 156 I2 = 78. ...(iii)
144 I1 + 156 I2 = 120 ...(iv)
Substracting (iv) from (iii), we get
As E2 > E1, the net emf follows the direction of E2 42
18.5 I1 = – 42 or I1    –2.27 A
Current through each resistance (all are in series) is 18.5
Negative sign shows that I1 actually flows in a direction
i = 30/18 = 5/3 A.
opposite to what is shown in figure. Substituting the value
p.d. across cells : of I1 in (ii), we get
p.d. across the terminals of cell E1 is 42 12  42 185  504

12   13 I 2  10 or 13I 2  10  
18.5 18.5 18.5
= VA – VB = E1 + ir1 = 10 + 5/3 × 1 = 35/3 V.
or I 2  689
p.d. across the terminals of cell E2 is  2.86 A.
18.5  13
= VC – VD = E2 – ir2 = 40 – 5/3 × 2 = 110/3 V.
Example - 18
Example - 17 Four identical cells each of emf 2V, are joined in parallel
providing supply of current to external circuit consisting of
A battery of 6 V and internal resistance 0.5  is joined in two 15  resistors joined in parallel. The terminal voltage of
parallel with another of 10 V and internal resistance 1. the cells as read by an ideal voltmeter is 1.6 V. Calculate the
The combination sends a current through an external internal resistance of each cell.
resistance of 12. Find the current through each battery.
Sol. The four cells are connected in parallel to the parallel
Sol. The arrangement of the two batteries and the external
combination of two 15  resistors as shown in figure.
resitance is shown in figure. Let I1 and I2 be the circuit given
by the two batteries so that the current through the external
resistance is (I1 + I2) as shown in the figure.
161
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
Let r be the internal resistance of each cell. As cells are in Example - 20

parallel, the effective emf of all the cells,  = emf of one
cell = 2V. A battery of 10 V and negligible internal resistance is
Terminal voltage, V = 1.6 V, connected across the diagonally opposite corners of a
Total internal resistance r’ of four cells in parallel is obtained cubical network consisting of 12 resistors each of
from resistance 1. Determine the equivalent resistance of
the network and the current along each edge of the
1 1 1 1 1 4 r
     or r   cube.
r r r r r r 4
Total external resistance, R  15  15  7.5 
15  15
By formula E = I(R + r’)
 r r
2  I  7.5   ..... 1 & 2 1.6  I
 4 4
I.r
 0.4 
4
1.6
 I=
r
Putting I in ...(i), we get
1.6  r
2  7.5  
r  4
Sol. The network is not reducible to a simple series and parallel
r 7.5
or  or r  7.5  combinations of resistors. There is, however, a clear
4 4
symmetry in the problem which we can exploit to obtain the
Example - 19 equivalent resistance of the network.
The paths AA’, AD and AB are obviously symmetrically

A cell of emf  and internal resistance r gives a current of 0.5
placed in the network. Thus, the current in each must be the
A with an external resistance of 12  and a current of 0.25 A
same, say, I. Further, at the corners A’, B and D, the incoming
with an external resistance of 25 . Calculate (a) internal
current I must split equally into the two outgoing branches.
resistance of the cell and (b) emf of the cell.
In this manner, the current in all the 12 edges of the cube are
Sol. Let R be external resistance in the series with the cell of emf easily written down in terms of I, using Kirchhoff’s first rule
and the symmetry in the problem.

 and internal resistance r. The current in circuit is I 
Rr Next take a closed loop, say ABCC’ EA, and apply Kirchhoff’s
In first case , second rule :
I = 0.5 A, R = 12  –IR – (1/2) IR – IR +  = 0
 where R is the resistance of each edge and  the emf of
0.5  or  = (12 + r) × 0.5 = 6.0 + 0.5 r ...(i)
12  r battery. Thus,
In second case,
I = 0.25 A, R = 25  5
 IR
2

 0.25  or  = (25 + r) × 0.25 = 6.25 + 0.25 r ...(ii)
25  r The equivalent resistance Req of the network is
From (i) and (ii), 6.0 + 0.5 r = 6.25 + 0.25 r

 5
or r = 1 R eq   R
3I 6
From (i),  = 6.0 + 0.5 × 1 = 6.5 V
For R = 1, Req = (5/6) and for  = 10 V, the total current
162
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
(=3I) in the network is Example - 22

3I = 10 V /(5/6)  = 12 A, i.e., I = 4A Calculate the current through the 5 resistance. The
The current flowing in each edge can now be read off from cell has negligible internal resistance.
the figure.
Example - 21
In the adjoining circuit, figure
Sol. Net resistance across the cell

20  5
 10 
20  5
R1 = 100 Ω , R2 = R3 = 50 Ω ,
R4 =75 Ω , ε = 4.75 V..
Work out the equivalent resistance of the circuit and the
current in each resistor.
Sol. Here R2, R3 and R4 are connected in parallel. Their effective

resistance Rp will be given by
1 1 1 1 1 1 1
     
R p R 2 R 3 R 4 50 50 75
emf
current through the cell will be = i =
net resistance
6  6  4 16 4
  
300 300 75
50 25
i=  A.
or Rp = 75/4  . 20×5 7
10+
20+5
Total resistance of circuit = R1 + Rp = 100 + 75/4 = 475/4 
25 100
Voltage across 5 = 50 – × 10 =
4.75 7 7
Current, i1   0.04 A;
475 / 4
100 20
 I2   A
Pot drop across R1 = i1R1 = 0.04 × 100 = 4V 75 7
Pot. drop. across all other resistances = 4.75 – 4 V = 0.75 V Example - 23

Current through R2 or R3, i2 = i3 = 0.75/50 = 0.015 A; When is a Wheatstone bridge said to be balanced ?
Current through R4, i4 = 0.75/75 = 0.01 A. Sol. Wheatsone bridge is said to be balanced, when no current
flows through the galvanometer arm of Wheatstone bridge.
163
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
Mark the correct option. A resistance of R  draws current from a potentiometer.

the potentiometer has a total resistance R0  (figure). A
(a) an ammeter should have small resistance
voltage V is supplied to the potentiometer. Derive an
(b) an ammeter should have high resistance experssion for the voltage across R when the sliding contact
is in the middle of the potentiometer.
(c) a voltmeter has low resistance
(d) galvanometer has low resistance than a voltmeter
Ans. (a)
Sol. Ammeter is an instrument used to measure the current, so it

should has small resistance so that it couldn’t affect the
total resistance.
Example - 25
A voltmeter has a resistance of 20000. When connected Sol. While the slide is in the middle of the potetiometer only half
in series with a large resistance R across 110 V line, the of its resistance R0/2) will be between the points A and B.
meter reads 5 V. Find the resistance R. Hence, the total resistance between A and B, say, R1, will be
Sol. p.d. across voltmeter is 5 V. given by the following expression :
1 1 1
 
R1 R  R 0 / 2 
R0R
R1 
R 0  2R
The total resistance betwen A and C will be sum of resistance
between A and B and B and C, i.e., R1 + R0/2
 The current flowing through the potentiometer will be
Rv 20000 V 2V
 5  110   110 I 
R  Rv R  20000 R1  R 0 / 2 2R1  R 0
 R = 420000 = 420 k  The voltage V1 taken from the potentiometer will be the
product of current I and resistance R1.
Example - 26
 2V 
V1  IR1     R1
Why do we prefer a potentiometer to measure emf of a cell
 2R1  R 0 
rather than a voltmeter ?
Substituting for R1, we have a
Sol. A potentiometer does not draw any current from the cell
2V R0  R
whose emf is to be determined, wheereas a voltmeter always V1  
draws some little current. Therefore, emf measured by voltmeter  R R  R 0  2R
2 0   R0
is slightly less then actual value of emf of the cell.  R 0  2R 
2VR
V1 
2R  R 0  2R
or V1  2VR
R 0  4R
164
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
When two known resistance R and S are connected in the Name the physical quantity which has its unit joule
left and right gaps of a metre bridge, the balance point is –1
coulomb . Is it a scalar or vector quantity ?
found at a distance l1 from the zero end of the metre bridge –1
wire. An unknown resistance X is now connected in Sol. A physical quantity with unit, Jc = workdone/charge =
parallel to the resistance S and the balance point is now potential difference. It is a scalar quantity.
found at a distance l2 from the zero end of the metre bridge
wire figure. Obtain a formula for X in terms of l1, l2 and S. Example - 30
Two bulbs are marked 220 V – 100 watt and 220 V – 50 watt
respectively. They are connected in series to 220 V mains.
Find the ratio of heats generated in them.
Sol. Here, P1 = 100 W, P2 = 50 W, V = 220 V
Let R1, R2 be the resistances of 100 watt bulb and 50 watt

2
bulb respectively. As R = v /P, therefore,
Sol. When resistance R and S are connected to the left and right 2 2
R1 = (200) /100 = 484  and R2 = (220) /50 = 968 .
gaps of metre bridge and bridge is balanced at length l1 from
zero end, then
When bulbs are connected in series to mains, there will be
R 1 same current I in each bulb. Then
 ...(i)
S 100  1 
2 2 –1 2 2 –1
H1 = I R1 = I × 484 Js and H2 = I R2 = I × 968 Js
When unknown resistance X is connected in parallel to S,
then effective resistance in right gap is S  SX

S X H1 484 1
  
H 2 968 2
Now, balance point is obtained at length l2,
R 2
  Example - 31
S 100   2 
In figure, the emf of the cell is 1.8 V and internal resistance is
Putting the value of S’, we have
2/3 , calculate the current in the 3 resistance and the
R S  X  2 power dissiplated in the whole circuit.
 ...(iii)
SX   2 
100
Dividing (iii) by (i), we get
S X 2 100  1  or S  100  1 
  1  2
X 100   2  1 X 1 100   2 
S 100  2  1 2  100 1  1 2 100   2  1 

or  
X 1 100   2  1 100   2 
1 100   2 
or X S
100   2  1 
165
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
Sol. The equivalent circuit is shown in the figure 12

I 8
I
I 2  12  8 I
I 2  8 I  12  0
I  2A
Example - 34
A steady beam of –particles travelling with kinetic energy

E = 83.5 keV carries a current of I = 0.2 A. Mass of –
–27
Effective resistance Rp between A and B will be particle = 6.68 × 10 kg.
1 1 1 1 1 31 42 (i) If this beam strikes a plane surface at an angle 
     or R p   = 60° with normal to the surface, how many –
R p 3 14 6 6 42 31
particles strike the surface in t = 4 second ?
E 1.8
Current from the cell, I    0.89 A (ii) How many –particles are there in length l = 20 cm of
R p  r 42 2
 the beam ?
31 3 –6
Potential diff. between A and B, VA – VB = I Rp Sol. Here, I = 0.2 A = 0.2 × 10 A,
3 3 –19
E = 83.5 keV = 83.5 × 10 eV = 83.5 × 10 × 1.6 × 10 J
42
 0.89   1.21 V = 83.5 × 1.6 × 10 J
–16
31 –19
(i) Charge on –particle, q = 2e = 2 × 1.6 × 10 C
1.21
Current in 3 resistance   0.4 A No. of –particles crossing per second a cross-secton of
3
Power dissipated in the whole circuit (including the cell) is beam,
2 
42 2  1 0.2  106
P = I (R + r) = (0.89)    = 1.6 watt
2
n   6.25  1011 / s .
 31 3  q 2  1.6  1019
Example - 32 No. of –particles striking a surface in time 4 second
11 12
To reduce the brightness of a light bulb, should an = nt = 6.25 × 10 × 4 = 2.5 × 10 .
auxiliary resistance be connected in series with it or in Note :
parallel ? There is no significance of angle  (= 60°) for finding the
number of –particles striking the surface.
Sol. To reduce the brightness of a light bulb, we should decreases
the current flowing through the bulb, which is possible when (ii) If v is the velocity of –particle while travelling towards a
an auxiliary resistance is connected in series with the bulb. surface, then
1 2E 2  83.5  1.6 1016
Example - 33 E mv 2 or v  
6
= 2 × 10 m/s
2 m 6.68  1027
Three resistances are connected in series across 12 volt 6
It means a beam of length v = 2 × 10 m crosses a section in
battery. The first resistor has value of 1 ohm second has one second. But number of –particle passing through a
voltage drop of 4 volt and third has power dissipation of 11
section in one second is, n = 6.25 × 10
12 watt. What is circuit current.
(a) 1A (b) 2A n
 No. of –particles in until length of the beam 
(c) 3A (d) 4A v
Ans. (b) No. of –particles in length l of the beam
Sol. V  V1  V2  V3
n 6.25 1011
   0.20 = 6.25 × 104
12 v 2 106
12  I 1  4  { Since, P=VI}
I
166
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
Introduction to Electric Current & Ohm's Law 5. The Kirchhoff’s first law ( = 0) and second law ( = SE)

where the symbols have their usual meanings, are
1. A non-conducting wire of radius R has charge q
respectively based on
distributed unevenly over it. If it is rotated with an angular
velocity of , the equivalent current will be (a) conservation of charge, conservation of momentum
(a) zero (b)  (b) conservation of energy, conservation of charge
(c) conservation of momentum, conservation of charge
q q
(c) (d) (d) conservation of charge, conservation of energy
2 2 R
6. A 5 V battery with internal resistance 2  and a 2 V battery
2. What is the value of R so that ammeter reads zero in the with internal resistance 1  are connected to a 10  resistor
circuit shown below. as shown in the figure.
(a) 600  (b) 300  The current in the 10  resistor is

(c) 250  (d) 150  (a) 0.28 A, P2 to P1 (b) 0.03 A, P1 to P2
3. In the circuit shown in figure potential difference between (c) 0.03 A, P2 to P1 (d) 0.28 A, P1 to P2
X and Y will be 7. Find out the value of current through 2 resistance for the
given circuit.
(a) zero (b) 2A
(c) 5A (d) 1 A
(a) zero (b) 20 V
Resistance & Variation with Temperature
(c) 60 V (d) 120 V
4. In figure, if the potential at point P is 100 V, what is the 8. Thermistors are usually made of
magnitude of potential(in V) at point Q ? (a) metals with low temperature coefficient of resistivity
(b) metals with high temperature coefficient of resistivity
(c) metal oxides with high temperature coefficient of
resistivity
(d) semiconductors with low temperature coefficient of
resistivity
9. A conductor behaves as a super conductor
(a) above critical temperature
(b) at critical temperature
(c) at 40 C°
(d) at boiling point of that metal
167
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
2
10. Which of the following material has negative temperature 18. A nichrome wire 1 m long and 1 mm in cross-section area
coefficient of resistance. draws 4 A current at 2 volt. The resistivity of nichrome is
–7 –7
(a) brass (b) copper (a) 1 × 10 –m (b) 2 × 10 –m
–7 –7
(c) porcelain (d) carbon (c) 4 × 10 –m (d) 5 × 10 –m
11. Which of the following material has nearly zero temperature 19. The temperature coefficient of resistance for a wire is
–1
0.00125°C . At 300 K its resistance is 1 ohm. The
coefficient of resistance.
temperature at which the resistance becomes 1.5 ohm is
(a) carbon (b) porcelain
(a) 450 K (b) 727 K
(c) copper (d) manganin
(c) 454 K (d) 900 K
12. A piece of copper and silicon are cooled from room
20. You need to produce a set of cylindrical copper wires 3.50
temperature to 100 K. The resistance of
m long that will have a resistance of 0.125 each. What
(a) each of them increases
will be the mass (in gram) of each of these wires? Given
(b) each of them decreases
that resistivity of copper is 1.72  108   m, density of
(c) copper increases and that of silicon decreases
(d) copper decreases and that of silicon increases copper  8.9 103 kg / m3 .
13. On increasing the temperature of a conductor, its resistance 21. Two plates of same material R and S are in the form of a
increases because square and have the same thickness. A side of S is twice
(a) relaxation time decreases the side of R. Compare their resistances. The direction of
current is shown by an arrow head.
(b) mass of the electron increases
(c) electron density decreases
(d) none of the above
14. A resistance of 2  is to be made from a copper wire
–8 (a) The resistance of R is twice that of S
(specific resistance 1.7 × 10  m) using a wire of length
(b) Both have the same resistance
50 cm. The radius of the wire is
(c) The resistance of S is four times that of R
(a) 0.0116 mm (b) 0.0367 mm
(d) The resistance of R is half to that of S.
(c) 0.116 mm (d) 0.367 mm
3 22. The resistance of a 10 m long wire is 10 . Its length is
15. The specific resistance of a wire is , its volume is 3 m and
increased by 25% by stretching the wire uniformly. The
its resistance is 3 ohm, then its length will be
resistance of wire will change to (approximately)
(a) 1/  (b) 3 /  (a) 12.5  (b) 14.5 
(c) 15.6  (d) 16.6 
(c) 3 /  (d)  / 3
23. The length of conductor is doubled and its radius is halved,
16. The heating element of an electric heater should be made its specific resistance is
with a material which should have (a) unchanged (b) halved
(a) High specific resistance and high melting point (c) doubled (d) uadrupled
(b) High specific resistance and low melting point 24. A coil has resistance of 18  when its mean temperature
(c) Low specific resistance and high melting point is 20oC and of 20  when its mean temperature is 50 oC.
(d) Low specific resistance and low melting point What will be mean temperature rise when its resistance is
17. As the temperature of a conductor increases, its resistivity 21  and the surrounding temperature is 15oC.
and conductivity changes .The ratio of resistivity to (a) 40oC (b) 50oC
conductivity (c) 60oC (d) 70oC
(a) Increases 25. All the edges of a block with parallel faces are unequal. Its
(b) decreases longest edge is twice its shortest edge. The ratio of the
(c) remains constant maximum to minimum resistance between parallel faces is
(d) may increase or decrease depending on material (a) 2 (b) 4
(c) 8 (d) 16
CURRENT ELECTRICITY 168
Combination of Resistors 31. A wire of resistance 6  is cut into three equal pieces,
which are joined to form a triangle. The equivalent
26. The approx effective resistance between A and B in figure resistance between any two corners of the triangle is
is (a) (3/4)  (b) (4/3) 
(c) 2  (d) 4 
32. Two resistances are joined in parallel whose resistance is
3/5 . One of the resistance wire is broken and the effective
resistance becomes 3 . The resistance in ohm of the wire
that got broken was
(a) 10  (b) 12  (a) 4/3 (b) 2
(c) 9.81  (d) 10.85  (c) 6/5 (d) 3/4
33. You are given three eual resistors. How many resistances
can be obtained by joining them in series and parallel
27. What is the total resistance of the circuit ?
grouping ?
(a) 6 (b) 4
(c) 3 (d) 2
34. What is the equivalent resistance between A and B in the
circuit of figure, if R = 3 ,
(a) 6  (b) 7 
(c) 8  (d) 9 
28. What will be the resistance between P and Q in the
following circuit?
(a) 8  (b) 9 
(c) 12  (d) 15 
35. One end of copper wire of length 2L and cross sectional
area A is attached to one end of another copper wire of
length L and cross section area 2A. If the free end of the
(a) (1/3)  (b) (2/3)  longer wire is at electric potential of 8 volt and free end of
(c) 2  (d) 5  longer wire is at potential of 1 volt ,what is the potential of
29. What is the current I in the circuit as shown in figure junction of two wires.
(a) 1.2 V (b) 2.1 V
(c) 2.4 V (d) 3.6 V
36. Consider the following statements regarding the network
shown in the figure
(a) 2A (b) 1.2 A

(c) 1 A (d) 0.5 A
30. Determine the value of resistance R if the current in branch
OA is zero.
(i) The euivalent resistance of the network between A and

B is independent of the value of R’
(ii) The euivalent resistance of the network between points
A and B is 4 R/3
(iii) The current flowing through R’ is zero
Which of the above statement(s) is/are correct?
(a) 6  (b) 8 
(a) (i) alone (b) (ii) alone
(c) 10  (d) 12 
(c) (ii) and (iii) (d) (i), (ii) and (iii)
37. Calculate battery current (in amp) of the network shown 42. In a Wheatstone’s bridge, three resistances P, Q and R are
in figure. connected in the three arms and the fourth arm is formed by
two resistances S1 & S2 connected in parallel. The condition
for the bridge to be balanced will be
P 2R P R  S1  S2 
(a)  (b) 
Q S1  S2 Q S1S2
P R  S1  S2  P R
(c)  (d) Q  S  S
Q 2S1S2 1 2
38. Total current supplied to the circuit by the battery is
43. The Wheatstone’s bridge shown in figure is balanced. If
the position of the cell E and galvanometer G are now
interchanged, G will show zero deflection
(a) 4A (b) 6A
(c) 2A (d) 1A
39. A uniform wire of resistance 36  is bent in the form of a
circle. The effective resistance across the points A and B
is (a) only if all resistor are equal
(b) only if R1 = R3 and R2 = R4
R1 R
(c) only if = 2
R4 R3
(d) in all cases
44. An electric circuit is shown in figure. Calculate the potential
(a) 36  (b) 18 
difference (in V) across the resistor of 400 , as it will be
(c) 9  (d) 2.75 
measured by the voltmeter V of resistance 400 .
40. The figure shows currents in a part of an electric circuit,
then current I is
2A
1A
1.3A
2A
I
(a) 1.7 A (b) 3.7 A
(c) 1.3 A (d) 1 A
41. In the figure shown below, the electric current flowing
through 2R resistor is 45. The figure shows a network of currents. The magnitude of
currents is shown here. The current I will be
B
A D
R 2R C R
(a) from left to right

(b) from right to left
(c) no current flows
(a) – 3A (b) 3A
(d) double to that through any other resistors
(c) 13 A (d) 20 A
46. An infinite ladder network of resistances is constructed 52. For a cell terminal potential difference is 2.2 volt when
with 1  and 2  resistances, as shown in figure.The 6 V circuit is open and reduces to 1.8 volt when cell is
battery between A and B has negligible internal resistance : connected to an external resistance of 5 ohm.What is the
internal resistance of the cell ?
 10   10 
(a)    (b)   
9  19 
1 5
(i) Show that the effective resistance between A & B is 2 . (c)    (d)   
9 9
(ii) What is the current that passes through the 2 
resistance nearest to the battery ? 53. Two identical cells connected in series send 1.0 amp of
current through a 5 ohm resistance.When they are
47. In the circuit shown, some potential difference is applied connected in parallel, they send current of 0.8 amp through
between A & B. The euivalent resistance between A & B is the same resistor. What is the internal resistance of the cell ?
(a) 0.5  (b) 1
(c) 2.5  (d) 4
A B
54. A d.c. main supply of e.m.f. 220 V is connected across a
storage battery of e.m.f 200 V through a resistance of 1.
The battery terminals are connected to an external
(a) 14  (b) 12.5  resistance ‘R’. The minimum value of ‘R’, so that a current
(c) 3.6  (d) 2.1  passes through the battery to charge it is:
(a) 7 (b) 9
Cells
(c) 11 (d) Zero
48. Two real batteries are connected in series. Consider the 55. A battery of EMF 5V and internal resistance 20 is
following statements (i) The euivalent e.m.f. is larger than
connected with a resistance R1  50 and a resistance
either of two emf’s (ii) The euivalent internal resistance is
smaller than either of two internal resistances. R2  40. A voltmeter of resistance 1000 is used to
(a) Both statements are correct measure the potential difference across R1 . What
(b) Statement (i) is correct but statement (ii) is wrong percentage error is made in the reading.
(c) Statement (ii) is correct but statement (i) is wrong
(d) Both are wrong statements Heating Effects of Current
49. How will you connect 24 cells each of internal resistance 56. In a large building, there are 15 bulbs of 40 W, 5 bulbs of
of 1so as to get maximum power output across a load of 100 W, 5 fans of 80 W and 1 heater of 1 kW. The voltage of
1.50  the electric mains is 220 V. The minimum capacity of the
(a) 4 rows, 6 cells in a row main fuse of the building will be :
(b) 12 rows, two cells in a row (a) 10 A (b) 12 A
(c) 2 rows, 12 cells in a row (c) 14 A (d) 8 A
(d) 3 rows, 8 cells in a row 57. If two bulbs of wattage 25 and 30 watt each rated at 220
50. An idealized voltmeter is connected across the terminals volt are connected in series with 440 volt supply. Which
bulb will fuse ?
of a 15 volt battery and a 7.5 ohm appliance is also
connected across its terminals .If the voltmeter reads 12.5 (a) 25 watt bulb (b) 30 watt bulb
volt .What is the internal resistance of the battery. (c) neither of them (d) both of them
(a) 1.0  (b) 1.2  58. A 200 volt,1000 watt bulb is connected across 100 volt
main supply.What will be power consumed.
(c) 1.4  (d) 1.5 
(a) 200 watt (b) 250 watt
51. Five cells each of e.m.f. E and internal resistance r are
connected in series. If due to oversight one cell gets (c) 500 watt (d) 750 watt
connected wrongly ,then the euivalent e.m.f. and internal 59. When three identical bulbs of 60 watt, 200 volt rating are
resistance of this combination is connected in series to a 200 volt supply, the power drawn
by them
(a) 5E,5r (b) 4E,4r
(a) 60 watt (b)180 watt
(c) 3E,4r (d) 3E,5r
(c) 10 watt (d) 20 watt
171
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
60. In the circuit diagram shown below each resistance is of 67. A battery is charged at a potential of 15 volt for 8 hours

value 1 ohm, what is the euivalent resistance between the when current flowing is 10 A.The battery on discharge
points A and B. supplies a current of 5A for 15 hours .The mean terminal
voltage during discharge is 14 volt. What is watt hour
efficiency of the battery.
(a) 50% (b) 67.8%
(c) 89.6% (d) 87.5%
Measuring Instruments in Current Electricity & R-C Circuits

(a) 4/7  (b) 8/7 
(c) 3/14  (d) 16/7  68. The net resistance of an ammeter should be small to ensure
61. A 100 watt,110 volt and a 50 watt,110 volt lamps are (a) it does not get overheated
connected in series across 220 volt d.c. source. If the (b) it does not draw excessive current
resistances of two lamps are assumed to remain constant, (c) it does not appreciably change the current to measure
the voltage across 100 watt lamps is (d) it can measure large current
(a) 100 volt (b) 143.3 volt 69. In a potentiometer experiment, there is no current at the
(c) 73.3 volt (d) 200 volt balance point in
62. Two electric bulbs marked 25 W–220 V and 100 W-220 V (a) main battery circuit
are connected in series to a 440 V supply. Which of the
(b) galvanometer circuit
bulbs will fuse ?
(c) potentiometer circuit
(a) Both (b) 100 W
(d) both main and galvanometer circuit
(c) 25 W (d) Neither
70. The infinity resistance plug in a post office box (resistance
63. 50 electric bulbs are connected in series across 200 volt
box) has
supply and illumination produced is I1. 5 bulbs get fused.
If the remaining bulbs are again connected across the (a) an air gap only
source in series, the illumination produced is I2.Which of (b) a resistance coil of infinite resistance
the following is true. (c) largest resistance value in box
(a) I1= I2 (b) I1> I2 (d) resistance of value –100 ohm
(c) I1< I2 (d) anything is possible 71. In meter bridge or wheatstone bridge for measurement of
64. A coil takes 15 minutes to boil certain amount of water, resistance, the known and the unknown resistances are
another coil takes 20 minutes for the same process .Time interchanged. The error so removed is
taken to boil the same amount of water when both the (a) end correction (b) index error
coils are connected in series across same source is
(c) due to temperature effect (d) random error
(a) 5 min (b) 8.6 min
72. In the meter bridge circuit shown in figure, find the length
(c) 35 min (d)12 min (in cm) AC at null deflection in galvanometer.
65. A battery has an open circuit potential difference of 6 V
between its terminals. When a load resistance of 60 is
connected across the battery, the total power dissipated
by the battery is 0.4 W. What should be the load resistance
R(in ohm), so that maximum power will be dissipated in R.
66. The supply voltage in a room is 120 V. The resistance of
the lead wires is 6. A 60W bulb is already switched on.
What is the decrease of voltage across the bulb, when a
240 W heater is switched on in parallel to the bulb ?
(a) zero (b) 2.9 V
(c) 13.3 V (d) 10.04 V
172
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
73. Figure shows a 200 cm potentiometer wire AB with 78. The current in the primary circuit of a potentiometer wire is
–7
resistance 15 , find the balancing length (in cm) for a 3V 0.5 A, specific resistance of wire is 4 × 10 –m and area of
–6 2
cell. cross-section of wire is 8 × 10 m . The potential gradient
in the wire would be
(a) 2.5 mV/metre (b) 25 mV/metre
(c) 25 V/metre (d) 10 V/metre
79. A candidate connects a moving coil voltmeter V, a moving
coil ammeter A and a resistor R as shown in figure. If the
voltmeter reads 20 volt and the ammeter reads 4 A, the
value of R is
74. Figure shows a potentiometer with length of wire 1m and

resistance 10 . In this system find length (in cm) PC
when galvanometer shows null deflection.
(a) equal to 5 ohm
(b) greater than 5 ohm
(c) less than 5 ohm
(d) may be greater or less than 5 ohm
80. A resistance of 2  is connected across one gap of a
meter bridge, the length of wire is 1 meter, and an unknown
resistance, greater than 2  is connected across the other
gap. When these resistances are interchanged, the balance
75. The length of a potentiometer wire is 5 metres. An electron
–19 point shifts by 20 cm. Neglecting any correction, find the
in this wire experiences a force of 4.8 × 10 newton, e.m.f.
unknown resistance.
of the main cell used in potentiometer is
(a) 3  (b) 4 
(c) 5  (d) 6 
(c) 1.5 volt (d) 5 volt
81. A wire connected in the left gap of a meter bridge balance
76. In a potentiometer, experiment, the balancing length is at
a 10 in the right gap at a point which divides the bridge
240 cm with a cell. On shunting the cell with a resistance
wire in the ratio of 3:2.What is the resistance of the wire
of 2 the balancing length becomes 120 cm .What is the
internal resistance of the cell. (a) 10 (b) 1.2
(a) 0.5  (b) 1 (c) 15 (d) 1
(c) 2 (d) 4 82. What shunt resistance (in ohm) is required to make the
77. In the following circuit figure, the resistance of wire AB 1.00 mA, 20 galvanometer into an ammeter with a range
is 10  and its length is 1m. Rest of the quantities are shown of 0 to 50.0 mA ?
in the figure. The potential gradient on potentiometer wire will 83. A galvanometer having a coil of resistance 100 gives a
be
full scale deflection when a current of one milli- ampere is
passed through it. What is the value of resistance (in ohm)
which can convert this galvanometer into ammeter giving
a full scale deflection for a current of 10A ?
84. A galvanometer of coil resistance 20 gives a full scale
deflection with a current of 5 mA. What arrangement should
be made in order to measure current upto 1.0 A.
(a) add a series resistance of 2
(b) add a parallel resistance of 2
(a) 0.8 V/m (b) 0.08 V/m (c) add a series resistance of 0
(c) 0.008 V/m (d) none of the above (d) add a parallel resistance of 0.1
173
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
R-C Circuits
85. A resistor R and 2F capacitor in series are connected 88. The heat produced in the capacitors on closing the switch
through a switch to 200 V direct supply. Across the S is
capacitor is a neon bulb that lights up at 120V. Calculate
4F 5F
the value of R to make the bulb light up 5 s after the switch
has been closed (log10 2.5 =0.4)
20V 2
(a) 1.7×105  (b) 2.7×106 R 2
(c) 3.3×107 (d) 1.3×104 S
86. Let C be the capacitance of a capacitor discharging through 4
a resistor R. Suppose t1 is the time taken for the energy (a) 0.0002 J (b) 0.0005 J
stored in the capacitor to reduce to half its initial value and
(c) 0.00075 (d) Zero
t2 is the time taken for the charge to reduce to one-fourth
89. Four identical capacitors are connected in series with a
t1 battery of emf 10V. The point X is earthed. Than the
its initial value. Then the ratio will be
t2 potential of point A is–
1 10V
+ -
(a) 1 (b)
2
1
(c) (d) 2 C C C X C
4
A B
87. The time constant of the shown circuit for charging
is
(a) 10 V (b) 7.5 V
R C (c) –7.5 V (d) 0 V
90. A conducting solid sphere is joined in an electrical circuit
V1
V2 R as shown in figure. Two imaginary points A and B are taken
2R inside the sphere. For given conditions-
R
5 5
(a) RC (b) RC
3 2
7 7
(c) RC (d) RC
4 3
(a) VA > VB (b) VA < VB

(c) VA = VB (d) Data insufficient

1. When 5V potential difference is applied across a wire of 6. In the circuit shown, the resistance r is a variable
length 0.1 m, the drift speed of electrons is 2.5 × 10–4 ms–1. resistance. If for r = f R, the heat generation in r is maximum
If the electron density in the wire is 8 × 1028 m–3, the then the value of f is : (2016)
resistivity of the material is close to : (2015)
(a) 1.6 × 10–6 m (b) 1.6 × 10–5 m
(c) 1.6 × 10–8 m (d) 1.6 × 10–7 m
2. In the circuit shown, the current in the 1 resistor is :
(2015)
1 1
(a) (b)
4 2
3
(c) (d) 1
4
7. A 50  resistance is connected to a battery of 5 V. A
(a) 0.13 A, from Q to P (b) 0.13 A, from P to Q
galvanometer of resistance 100  is to be used as an
(c) 1.3 A, from P to Q (d) 0A ammeter to measure current through the resistance, for
3. In the electric network shown, when no current flows this a resistance rs is connected to the galvanometer. Which
through the 4 resistor in the arm EB, the potential of the following connections should be employed if the
difference between the points A and D will be : measured current is within 1% of the current without the
(2015) ammeter in the circuit? (2016)
(a) rs = 0.5 in parallel with the galvanometer
(b) rs = 0.5 in series with the galvanometer
(c) rs = 1  in series with galvanometer
(d) rs = 1  in parallel with galvanometer
8. To know the resistance G of a galvanometer by half
deflection method, a battery of emf VE and resistance R is
used to deflect the galvanometer by angle θ. If a shunt of
resistance S is needed to get half deflection then G, R and
(a) 6 V (b) 3 V S are related by the equation: (2016)
(c) 5 V (d) 4 V (a) 2S (R + G) = RG (b) S (R + G) = RG
4. A galvanometer having a coil resistance of 100  gives a (c) 2S = G (d) 2G = S
full scale deflection, when a current of 1 mA is passed 9. The resistance of an electrical toaster has a temperature
through it. The value of the resistance, which can convert
dependence given by R(T) = R0 [1 +  (T  T0 ) ] in its range
this galvanometer into ammeter giving a full scale deflection
for a current of 10 A, is : (2016) of operation. At T0  300K, R  100 and at T = 500 K,
(a) 2  (b) 0.1 R = 120 . The toaster is connected to a voltage source at
(c) 3  (d) 0.01  200 V and its temperature is raised at a constant rate from
5. The temperature dependence of resistance of Cu and 300 to 500 K in 30 s. The total work done in raising the
undoped Si in the temperature range 300–400 K, is best temperature is : (2016)
described by : (2016)
2
(a) 60000 l n   J
6
(a) Linear increase for Cu, exponential increase for Si. (b) 200 ln J
5 3
(b) Linear increase for Cu, exponential decrease for Si.
5
(c) Linear decrease for Cu, linear decrease for Si. (c) 400 ln J (d) 300 J
6
(d) Linear increase for Cu, linear increase for Si
10. A galvanometer having a coil resistance of 100  gives a 15. A 9 V battery with internal resistance of 0.5 is connected
full scale deflection when a current of 1 mA is passed across an infinite network as shown in the figure. All
through it. The value of the resistance which can convert ammeters A1, A2, A3 and voltmeter V are ideal.
this galvanometer into ammeter giving full scale deflection (2017)
for a current of 10 A is: (2016)
(a) 0.1  (b) 0.01 
(c) 100  (d) 0.001 
11. In a meter bridge experiment resistances are connected as
shown in the figure. Initially resistance P = 4 and the
neutral point N is at 60 cm from A. Now an unknown
resistance R is connected in series to P and the new
position of the neutral point is at 80 cm from A. The value Choose correct statement.
of unknown resistance R is : (2017)
(a) Reading of A1 is 2A (b) Reading of A2 is 18 A
(c) Reading of V is 9 V (d) Reading of V is 7V
16. A potentiometer PQ is set up to compare two resistances
as shown in the figure. The ammeter A in the circuit reads
1.0 A when two way key K3 is open. The balance point is
at a length l1 cm from P when two way key K3 is plugged in
between 2 and 1, while the balance point is at a length l2
33 cm from P when key K3 is plugged in between 3 & 1. The
(a)  (b) 6
5 R1
ratio of two resistances , is found to be : (2017)
20 R2
(c) 7 (d) 
3
12. In the below circuit, the current in each resistance is:
(2017)
(a) 1A (b) 0.25A

(c) 0.5 A (d) 0A
13. When a current of 5 mA is passed through a galvanometer
having a coil of resistance 15 , it shows full scale
deflection. The value of the resistance to be put in series 1 2
(a)    (b)   
with the galvanometer to convert it into a voltmeter of 1 2 2 1
range 0-10 V is : (2017)
1 1
(a) 1.985  103  (b) 2.045 103  (c)    (d)   
1 2 2 1
(c) 2.535 103  (d) 4.005 103  17. A uniform wire of length l and radius r has resistance of
14. Which of the following statements is false? (2017)
r
(a) Wheatstone bridge is the most sensitive when all the 100. It is recast into a wire of radius . The resistance of
2
four resistances are of the same order of magnitude
new wire will be : (2017)
(b) In a balanced Wheatstone bridge if the cell and the
(a) 1600  (b) 400 
galvanometer are exchanged, the null point is disturbed
(c) A rheostat can be used as a potential divider (c) 200  (d) 100 
(d) Kirchhoff’s second law represents energy conservation
18. The figure shows three circuits I, II and III which are 22. On interchanging the resistances, the balance point of a
connected to a 3V battery. If the powers dissipated by the meter bridge shifts to the left by 10 cm. The resistance of
configurations I, II and III and P1, P2 and P3 respectively, their series combination is 1k. How much was the
then : (2017) resistance on the left slot before interchanging the
resistances? (2018)
(a) 500 (b) 910
(c) 990 (d) 505
23. In the given circuit all resistances are of value R ohm
each. The equivalent resistance between A and B is :
(2018)
(a) P1  P2  P3 (b) P1  P3  P2
(c) P2  P1  P3 (d) P3  P2  P1
19. In the given circuit diagram when the current reaches
steady state in the circuit, the charge on the capacitor of
capacitance C will be : (2017) (a) 2R (b) 3R
5R 5R
(c) (d)
3 2
24. In a meter bridge, as shown in the figure, it is given that
resistance Y =12.5  and that the balance is obtained at a
distance 39.5 cm from end A (by Jockey J). After
interchanging the resistances X and Y, a new balance point
is found at a distance  2 from end A. What are the values
r1
(a) CE (b) CE
 r1  r  of X and  2 ? (2018)
r1 r2
(c) CE (d) CE
 r2  r   r  r2 
20. Two batteries with e.m.f 12V and 13V are connected in
parallel across a load resistor of 10. The internal
resistance of the two batteries are 1 and 2 respectively.
The voltage across the load lie between: (2018)
(a) 11.4 V and11.5 V
(b) 11.7 V and11.8 V
(a) 8.16 and 60.5 cm (b) 19.15 and 39.5 cm
(c) 11.6 V and 11.7 V (c) 8.16 and 39.5 cm (d) 19.15 and 60.5 cm
(d) 11.5 V and 11.6 V 25. A copper rod of cross-sectional area A carries a uniform
21. In a potentiometer experiment, it is found that no current current I through it. At temperature T, if the volume charge
passes through the galvanometer when the terminals of density of the rod is , how long will the charges take to
the cell are connected across 52cm of the potentiometer travel a distance d ? (2018)
wire. If the cell is shunted by resistance of 5, a balance is
2 d A 2 d A
found when the cell is connected across 40 cm of the wire. (1) (2)
I IT
Find the internal resistance of the cell. (2018)
(a) 2 (b) 2.5 d A d A
(c) 1 (d) 1.5 (3) (4) I T
I
26. A constant voltage is applied between two ends of a 31. Determine the charge on the capacitor (in C ) in the
metallic wire. If the length is halved and the radius of the following circuit:
wire is doubled, the rate of heat developed in the wire will (2019)
be : (2018)
(a) Doubled (b) Halved
(c) Unchanged (d) Increased 8 times
27. A heating element has a resistance of 100  at room
temperature. When it is connected to a supply of 220 V, a
steady current of 2 A passes in it and temperature is 5000C 32. A resistance is shown in the figure. Its value and tolerance
more than room temperature. What is the temperature are given respectively by: (2019)
coefficient of resistance of the heating element? (2018)
(a) 0.5×10-4 0 C -1 (b) 5×10-4 0 C -1
(c) 1×10-4 0 C -1 (d) 2×10-4 0 C -1
28. A galvanometer with its coil resistance 25 requires a

current of 1 mA for its full deflection. In order to construct
an ammeter to read up to a current of 2 A, the approximate (a) 270 × 103 ±10% (b) 27 × 103 ± 10%
value of the shunt resistance should be : (2018) (c) 27 × 104 ±20% (d) 270× 104 ± 5%
(a) 2.5×10-3  (b) 1.25×10-2  33. A potentiometer wire AB having length L and resistance
12 r is joined to a cell D of emf ε and internal resistancer .
(c) 1.25×10-3  (d) 2.5×10-2  A cell C having emf ε/2 and internal resistance 3r is
connected. The length AJ at which the galvanometer as
29. In a circuit for finding the resistance of a galvanometer by shown in fig. shows no deflection is: (2019)
half deflection method, a 6V battery and a high resistance
of 11k  are used. The figure of merit of the galvanometer
is 60  /division. In the absence of shunt resistance, the
galvanometer produces a deflection of  = 9 divisions
when current flows in the circuit. The value of the shunt

resistance that can cause the deflection of , is closest
2
to : (2018) 11
(a) 11 L (b) L
(a) 550  (b) 220  12 24
(c) 55  (d) 110  13 5
(c) L (d) L
30. In the following circuit, the switch S is closed at t =0. The 24 12
charge on the capacitor C1 as a function of time will be 34. In the given circuit the cells have zero internalresistance.
The currents (in Amperes) passing throughresistance R1
 C1C2 
given by  Ceq = C + C  (2018) and R2 respectively, are: (2019)
 1 2 
(a) C1E [1-exp (-tR/C1)] (b) C2E [1-exp (-t/RC2)]

(a) 1, 2 (b) 2, 2
(c) CeqE [1-exp (-t/RCeq)] (d) CeqE exp (-t/RCeq)
(c) 0.5, 0 (d) 0, 1
35. A uniform metallic wire has a resistance of 18 and is 39. The resistance of the meter bridge AB in given figure is
bent and ends joined into an equilateral triangle. Then, 4. With a cell of emf ε = 0.5 V and rheostat resistance Rh
the resistance between any two vertices of the triangle = 2 the null point is obtained at some point J. When the
(in ) is: cell is replaced by another one of emf ε = ε2 the same null
(2019) point J is found for Rh = 6. The emf ε2 is: (2019)
36. The actual value of resistance R, shown in the figure
is 30 U. This is measured in an experiment as shown using
V
the standard formula R  , where V and I are the reading
I
of the voltmeter and ammeter, respectively. If the measured
value of R is 5% less, then the internal resistance of the
voltmeter is:
(2019)
(a) 0.4 V (b) 0.3 V
(c) 0.6 V (d) 0.5 V
40. Two equal resistances when connected in series to a
battery, consume electric power of 60 W. If these
resistances are now connected in parallel combination to
the same battery, the electric power consumed will be:
(a) 600 U (b) 570 U
(2019)
(c) 35 U (d) 350 U
(a) 60 W (b) 240 W
37. A current of 2 mA was passed through an unknown
(c) 120 W (d) 30 W
resistor which dissipated a power of 4.4 W. Dissipated
power when an ideal power supply of 11. V is connected 41. In a Wheatstone bridge (see fig.), Resistances P and Q
across it is: (2019) are approximately equal. When R = 400 , the bridge is
balanced.On interchanging P and Q, the value of R, for
(a) 11105 W (b) 11103 W balance is 405 . The value of X is close to: (2019)
(c) 11104 W (d) 11105 W

38. The Wheatstone bridge shown in the figure. here, gets
balanced when the carbon resistor used as R1 has the
colour code (Orange, Red, Brown). The resistors R2 and
R4 are 80 Ω and 40 Ω, respectively. Assuming that the
colour code for the carbon resistors gives their accurate
values, the colour code for the carbon resistor, used as R3,
would be: (2019)
(a) 401.5 ohm (b) 404.5 ohm

(c) 403.5 ohm (d) 402.5 ohm
42. In the circuit shown, the potential difference between A
and B is:
(2019)
(a) Brown, Blue, Brown (b) Brown, Blue, Black

(c) Red, Green, Brown (d) Grey, Black, Brown (a) 1 V (b) 2 V
(c) 3 V (d) 6 V
43. A galvanometer having a resistance of 20  and 30 division

on both sides has a figure of merit 0.005 ampere/division.
The resistance that should be connected in series such
that it can be used as a voltmeter upto 15 V, is: (2019)
(a) 100  (b) 120 
(c) 80  (d) 125 
44. In the experimental set up of metre bridge shown in the
figure, the null point is obtained at a distance of 40 cm (a) 0.2 m (b) 0.3 m
from A. If a 10 resistor is connected in series with R1, the
null point shifts by 10 cm. The resistance that should be (c) 0.25 m (d) 0.35 m
connected in parallel with (R1 + 10) such that the null 47. An ideal battery of 4 V and a resistance R are connected
point shifts back to its initial position is (2019) in series in the primary circuit of a potentiometer of length
1 m and resistance 5Ω. The value of R, to give a potential
difference of 5mV across 10 cm of potentiometer wire is
(2019)
(a) 490Ω (b) 480Ω
(c) 395Ω (d) 495Ω
48. Two electric bulbs, rated at (25 W, 220 V) and (100 W, 220
V), are connected in series across a 220V voltage source.
If the 25 W and 100 W bulbs draw powers P1 and P2
(a) 20  (b) 40 
P1
(c) 60  (d) 30  respectively, then the value of will be: (2019)
P2
45. The galvanometer deflection, when key K1 is closed, but
49. In the given circuit diagram, the currents, I 1 = –0.3 A,
K 2 is open, equals 0 (see figure). On closing K 2
I4 = 0.8A and I5 = 0.4A, are flowing as shown. The currents
a l s o a n d adjusting R 2 to 5Ω, the deflection in I2, I3 and I6, respectively, are : (2019)
0
galvanometer becomes . The resistance of the
5
galvanometer is, then, given by [Neglect the internal
resistance of battery] (2019)
(a) l.1A, - 0.4A, 0.4A

(b) 1.1 A, 0.4 A, 0.4A
(c) 0.4A, 1.1 A, 0.4A
(d) -0.4A, 0.4A, 1.1 A
(a) 5Ω (b) 22Ω 50. A galvanometer, whose resistance is 50 ohm, has 25
(c) 25Ω (d) 12Ω divisions in it. When a current of 4 × 10-4 A passes through
46. In a metre bridge, the wire of length 1 m has a non-uniform it, its needle (pointer) deflects by one division. To use this
galvanometer as a voltmeter of range 2.5 V, it should be
dR
cross-section such that, the variation of its resistance connected to a resistance of : (2019)
dl
(a) 250 ohm
dR 1
R with length l is  . Two equal resistances are
dl l (b) 200 ohm
connected as shown in the figure. The galvano meter has (c) 6200 ohm
zero deflection when the jockey is at point P. What is the
(d) 6250 ohm
length AP? (2019)
51. For the circuit shown, with R1 = 1.0 , R2 = 2.0 , E1 = 2 V 55. A wire of resistance R is bent to form a square ABCD as
and E2 = E3 = 4 V, the potential difference between the shown in the figure. The effective resistance between E
points ‘a’ and ‘b’ is approximately (in V) : (2019) and C is: (E is mid-point of arm CD) (2019)
(a) 2.7 (b) 2.3 7

(a) R (b) R
(c) 3.7 (d) 3.3 64
52. In the circuit shown, a four-wire potentiometer is made of
a 400 cm long wire, which extends between A and B. The 3 1
(c) R (d) R
resistance per unit length of the potentiometer wire is 4 16
(2019)
56. A metal wire of resistance 3  is elongated to make a
r = 0.01 /cm. If an ideal voltmeter is connected as shown
uniform wire of double its previous length. This new wire
with jockey J at 50 cm from end A, the expected reading of
is now bent and the ends joined to make a circle. If two
the voltmeter will be :
points on the circle make an angle 60° at the centre, the
equivalent resistance between these two points will be:
(2019)
12
(a) 
5
5
(b) 
2
(a) 0.50 V (b) 0.75 V 5

(c) 
(c) 0.25 V (d) 0.20 V 3
53. A cell of internal resistance r drives current through an 7
external resistance R. The power delivered by the cell tothe (d) 
2
external resistance will be maximum when : (2019)
(a) R = 0.001 r (b) R = 1000 r 57. The resistance of a galvanometer is 50 ohm and the
(c) R = 2r (d) R = r maximum current which can be passed through it is 0.002A.
What resistance must be connected to it in order to convert
54. In the figure shown, what is the current (in Ampere) drawn
it into an ammeter of range 0 – 0.5 A? (2019)
from the battery? You are given:
Rl = 15 , R2 = 10 , R3 = 20 , R4 = 5 , R5 = 25 , (a) 0.5 ohm (b) 0.002 ohm
R6 =30 , E = 15 V (2019) (c) 0.02 ohm (d) 0.2 ohm
58. In a conductor, if the number of conduction electrons per
unit volume is 8.5  1028 m 3 and mean free time is 25 fs
(femto second), its approximate resistivity is:
m e  9.1  10 31 kg  (2019)
(a) 106 m (b) 107 m
(a) 13/24 (b) 7/18 (c) 108 m (d) 105 m

(c) 9/32 (d) 20/3
59. In a meter bridge experiment, the circuit diagram and the 63. To verify Ohm’s law, a student connects the voltmeter
corresponding observation table are shown in figure. across the battery as, shown in the figure. The measured
voltage is plotted as a function of the current, and the
following graph is obtained :
If V0 is almost zero, identify the correct statement: (2019)

(a) The emf of the battery is 1.5 V and its internal resistance
is 1.5 Ω
Which of the reading is consistent? (2019) (b) The value of the resistance R is 1.5 Ω
(a) 3 (b) 2 (c) The potential difference across the battery is 1.5 V
(c) 4 (d) 1 when it sends a current of 1000 mA
60. In the given circuit, an ideal voltmeter connected across (d) The emf of the battery is 1.5 V and the value of R is 1.5
the 10 resistance reads 2V. The internal resistance r Ω
(in &) , of each cell is: (2019) 64. A galvanometer of resistance 100 Ω has 50 divisions on
its scale and has sensitivity of 20  A /division. It is to be
converted to a voltmeter with three ranges, of 0 – 2V, 0 –
10V and 0 – 20 V. The appropriate circuit to do so is
(2019)
(a)
61. A current of 5 A passes through a copper conductor (b)

(resistivity) = 1.7 × 10 -8nm) of radius of cross-section 5
mm. Find the mobility of the charges (in m2/Vs) if their
drift velocity is 1.1 × 10–3 m/s. (Express as the closest
integer).
(2019)
62. Space between two concentric conducting spheres of radii (c)
a and b (b > a) is filled with a medium of resistivity  . The
resistance between the two spheres will be: (2019)
 1 1  1 1
(a)    (b)   
4  a b  2  a b 
(d)
 1 1  1 1
(c)    (d)   
2  a b  4  a b 
65. The resistive network shown below is connected to a D.C. 70. A galvanometer having a coil resistance 100 gives a full
source of 16 V. The power consumed by the networkis 4 scale deflection when a current of 1 mA is passed through
W. The value of R (in  ) is (2019) it. What is the value of the resistance which can convert
this galvanometer into voltmeter giving full scale deflection
for a potential difference of 10 V?In full scale deflection,
current in galvanometer of resistance is 1mA. Resistance
required in series to convert it into voltmeter of range 10V.
(2020)
(a) 7.9 K (b) 9.9 K
(c) 8.9 K (d) 10K
66. A moving coil galvanometer, having a resistance G, 71. The series combination of two batteries both of the same
produces full scale deflection when a current Ig flows emf 10V, but different internal resistance of 20Ω and 5Ω, is
through it. This galvanometer can be converted into (i) an connected to the parallel combination of two resistors 30Ω
ammeter of range 0 to I0 (I0 > Ig) by connecting a shunt and RΩ. The voltage difference across the battery of
resistance RA to it and (ii) into a voltmeter of range 0 to V internal resistance 20Ω is zero, the value of R(in Ω) is
(V = GI0) by connecting a series resistance Rv to it. Then, (2020)
(2019) 72. In the given circuit diagram, a wire is joining point B & C.
2 Find the current in this wire (2020)
 I0  I g  RA  I g 
(a) RA RV  G 
2
 and  
 Ig  RV  I 0  I g 
(b) RA RV  G 2 and
2
 Ig  RA  I 0  I g 
(c) R R  G 2 
A V  I0  I g  and R   I 
  (a) 0.4 A (b) 2 A
  V g
(c) zero (d) 4 A

RA Ig 73. Consider four conducting materials copper, tungsten,
(d) RA RV  G 2 and 
RV I 0  I g mercury and aluminium with resistivity C , T , M and
67. The current  i1  (in A) flowing through 1 resistor int A respectively. Then : (2020)
the following circuit is (2020) (a) C  A  T (b) A  M  C

(a) 0.40 A (b) 0.20 A
(c) A  T  C (d) M  A  C
(c) 0.25 A (d) 0.5 A
68. In a building, there are 15 bulbs of 45W, 15 bulbs of 100W, 74. A potentiometer wire PQ of 1 m length is connected to a
15 small fans of 10 W and 2 heaters of 1kW. The voltage of standard cell E1. Another cell E2 of emf 1.02 V is connected
electric main is 220V. The minimum fuse capacity (rated with a resistance ‘r’ and switch S (as shown in figure).
value) of the building will be approximately. (2020) With switch S open, the null position is obtained at a
distance of 49 cm from Q. The potential gradient in the
(a) 10A (b) 20A potentiometer wire is : (2020)
(c) 25A (d) 15A
69. The length of a potentiometer wire of length 1200 cm and
it carries a current of 60 mA. For a cell of emf 5 V and
internal resistance of 20  , the null point on it is found to
be at 1000 cm. The resistance of whole wire is (2020)
(a) 80  (b) 100 
(c) 120  (d) 60 
(a) 0.03V/cm (b) 0.02 V/cm
(c) 0.04 V/cm (d) 0.01 V/cm
75. Model a torch battery of length  to be made up of a thin 78. Two resistors 400  and 800  are connected in series
cylindrical bar of radius ‘a’ and a concentric thin cylindrical across a 6 V battery. The potential difference measured by
shell of radius ‘b’ filled in between with an electrolyte of a voltmeter of 10 k across 400  resistor is close to :
resistivity  (see figure). If the battery is connected to a (2020)
resistance of value R, the maximum joule heating in R will (a) 2.05 V (b) 2 V
take place for : (2020) (c) 1.95 V (d) 1.8 V
79. A battery of 3.0 V is connected to a resistor dissipating 0.5
W of power. If the terminal voltage of the battery is 2.5V,
the power dissipated within the internal resistance is:
(2020)
(a) 0.072 w (b) 0.10 w
(c) 0.125 w (d) 0.50 w
80. The value of current i1 flowing from A to C in the circuit
diagram is: (2020)
 b
(a) R    (b) R  2 ln  b 
2l  a   
l  a 
 b  b
(c) R  ln   (d) ln  
l  a  2l  a 
76. Which of the following will NOT be observed when a
multimeter (operating in resistance measuring mode)
probes connected across a component, are just reversed?
(2020)
(a) 4A (b) 5A
(a) Multimeter shows NO deflection in both cases i.e.
(c) 2A (d) 1A
before and after reversing the probes if the chosen
component is metal wire. 81. Four resistances 40  , 60  , 90  and 110  make the
(b) Multimeter shows a deflection, accompanied by a arms of a quadrilateral ABCD. Across AC is a battery of
splash of light out of connected component in one emf 40 V and internal resistance negligible.The potential
direction and NO deflection on reversing the probes if the differenceacross BD in V is _______. (2020)
chosen component is LED.
(c) Multimeter shows an equal deflection in both cases
i.e. before and after reversing the probes if the chosen
component is resistor.
(d) Multimeter shows NO deflection in both cases i.e.
before and after reversing the probes if the chosen
component is capacitor.
77. An ideal cell of emf 10 V is connected in circuit shown in
figure. Each resistance is 2. The potential difference (in V)
82. An electrical power line, having a total resistance of 2 
across the capacitor when it is fully charged is ……(2020) delivers 1 kW at 220 V. The efficiency of the transmission
line is approximately : (2020)
(a) 72% (b) 91%
(c) 85% (d) 96%
83. A galvanometer of resistance G is converted into a
voltmeter of range 0 – 1V by connecting a resistance R1 in
series with it. The additional resistance that should be
connected in series with R1 to increase the range of t h e
voltmeter to 0 – 2V will be : (2020)
(a) G (b) R1
(c) R1 – G (d) R1 + G
84. In the circuit, given in the figure currents in different 89. When the switch S, in the circuit shown, is closed then
branches and value of one resistor are shown. Then the valued of current i (in A) will be: (2021)
potential at point B with respect to the point A is : (2020)
(a) +2 V (b) –2 V 90. A carbon resistance has following colour code. What is
the value of the resistance? (2021)
(c) +1 V (d) –1 V
85. A galvanometer is used in laboratory for detecting the
null point in electrical experiments. If, on passing a current
of 6 mA it produces a deflection of 2º, its figure of merit is (a) 53× 104 ± 5% (b) 5.3 × 104 ± 5%
close to : (2020)
(c) 6.4 × 104 ± 5% (d) 64 × 104 ± 10%
(a) 6  103 A / div. (b) 3  103 A / div. 91. In the given circuit the internal resistance of the 18 V cell
is negligible. If R1 = 400, R3 = 100 and R4 = 500 and
(c) 666º A / div. (d) 333º A / div.
the reading of an ideal voltmeter across R4 is 5 V, then the
86. A circuit to verify Ohm’s law uses ammeter and voltmeter value of R2 will be: (2021)
in series or parallel connected correctly to the resistor.In
the circuit: (2020)
(a) Ammeter is always connected in series and voltmeter
in parallel
(b) Both, ammeter and voltmeter must be connected in series
(c) Both ammeter and voltmeter must be connected in
parallel
(a) 300  (b) 450 
(d) ammeter is always used in parallel and voltmeter is series
(c) 550  (d) 230 
87. In the figure shown, the current in the 10V battery is close
92. A moving coil galvanometer allows a full scale current of
to : (2020)
10–4 A. A series resistance of 2 MO is required to convert
the above galvanometer into a voltmeter of range 0 – 5 V.
Therefore the value of shunt resistance required to convert
the above galvanometer into an ammeter of range 0 – 10
mA is: (2021)
(a) 100 b)10 
(a) 0.21 A from positive to negative terminal (c)None of these (d) 200 
(b) 0.36 A from negative to positive terminal 93. In the figure given, the electric current flowing through
(c) 0.42 A from positive to negative terminal
the 5 k resistor is ‘x’ mA.
(d) 0.71 A from position to negative terminal
88. An ideal cell of emf 10 V is connected in circuit shown in
figure. Each resistance is 2. The potential difference (in
V) across the capacitor when it is fully charged is ……. .
(2020)
The value of x to the nearest integer is__.

94. A cylindrical wire of radius 0.5 mm and conductivity 100. Two wires of same length and thickness having specific
resistances 6 and 3 respectively are connected in
5  107 S / m is subjected to an electric field of 10 m V/m. parallel. The effective resistivity is   cm. The value of
The expected value of current in the wire will be x3 mA . , to the nearest integer, is ___________.
The value of x is (2021)
101. A current of 6 A enters one corner P of an equilateral
(2021)
triangle PQR having 3 wires of resistance 2 each and
95. The energy dissipated by a resistor is 10 mJ in 1 s when an
electric current of 2 mA flows through it. The resistance is leaves by the corner R. The currents i1 in ampere is
________ . (Round off to the Nearest Integer)
(2021)
96. The equivalent resistance of series combination of two
resistors is ‘s’ When they are connected in parallel, the
equivalent resistance is ‘p’. If s = np, then the minimum
value for n is (Round off to the Nearest Integer)
(2021)
97. The circuit shown in the figure consists of a charged
capacitor of capacity 3 µF and a charge of 3 µC. At time t
= 0, when the key is closed, the value of current flowing
through the 5 M resistor is ‘x’ µA. (2021)
The value of ‘x’ to the nearest integer is ___________. 102. In the given circuit of potentiometer, the potential
difference E across AB (10 m length) is larger than E1 and
E2 as well. For key K1 (closed), the jockey is adjusted to
touch the wire at point J1 so that there is no deflection in
the galvanometer. Now the first battery ( E1 ) is replaced

(2021)
98. The voltage across the 10  resistor in the given circuit is by second battery ( E2 ) for working by making K1 open
x volt. and K 2 closed. The galvanometer gives then null
E a
deflection at J 2 . The value of 1 is , where a = __.
E2 b
(2021)
The value of ‘x’ to the nearest integer is __________.

(2021)
99. Consider a 72 cm long wire AB as shown in the figure. The
galvanometer jockey is placed at P on AB at a distance x
cm from A. The galvanometer shows zero deflection.
103. A cell E1 of emf 6V and internal resistance 2 is connected 108. A current of 10 A exists in a wire of cross-sectional area of
5 mm2 with a drift velocity of 2 103 m / s . The number of
with another cell E2 of emf 4 V and internal resistance 8 free electrons in each cubic meter of the wire is ____ .
(as shown in the figure). The potential difference across (2021)
points X and Y is:
(a) 2 106 (b) 625 1025
(2021)
(c) 2 1025 (d) 1 1023
109. Two cells of emf 2E and E with internal resistance r1 and r2
respectively are connected in series to an external resistor
R (see figure). The value of R, at which the potential
difference across the terminals of the first cell becomes
zero is: (2021)
(a) 10.0 V (b) 5.6 V
(c) 3.6 V (d) 2.0 V
104. A current through a wire depends on time as i = 0t + t2
where 0 = 20 A/s and  = 8 As–2. Find the charge crossed
through a section of the wire in 15 s. (2021)
(a) 11250 C (b) 2250 C r1
(a) r1  r2 (b)  r2
(c) 260 C (d) 2100 C 2
105. Five equal resistances are connected in a network as
r1
shown in figure. The net resistance between the points A (c)  r2 (d) r1  r2
and B is (2021) 2
110. The four arms of a Wheatstone bridge have resistances
as shown in the figure. A galvanometer of 15 resistance
is connected across BD. Calculate the current through the
galvanometer when a potential difference of 10 V is
maintained across AC. (2021)
3R R
(a) (b)
2 2
(c) R (d) 2R
106. A wire of 1 has a length of 1 m. It is stretched till its
length increase by 25%. The percentage change in
resistance to the nearest integer is (2021)
(a) 2.44  A (b) 2.44 mA
(a) 76% (b) 25%
(c) 56% (d) 12.5% (c) 4.87 mA (d) 4.87  A
107. A resistor develops 500 J of thermal energy in 20 s when a 111. In the experiment of Ohm’s law, a potential difference of
current of 1.5 A is passed through it. If the current is 5.0 V is applied across the end of a conductor of length
increased from 1.5 A to 3 A, what will be the energy 10.0 cm and diameter of 5.00 mm. The measured current in
developed (2021) the conductor is 2.00 A. The maximum permissible
(a) 2000 J (b) 500 J percentage error in the resistivity of the conductor is
(c) 1000 J (d) 1500 J (2021)
(a) 8.4 (b) 7.5
(c) 3.9 (d) 3.0

Single Choice Questions 5. Shown in the figure adjacent is a meter-bridge set up with
null deflection in the galvanometer. The value of the
1. A battery of internal resistance 4 is connected to the unknown resistor R is
network of resistances as shown. In order that the maximum
power can be delivered to the network, the value of R in 
should be
(a) 13.75  (b) 220 

(a) 4/9 (b) 2 (c) 110  (d) 55 
(c) 8/3 (d) 18 6. Four Bulbs B1, B2, B3 and B4 of 100 W each are connected
2. The current i in the circuit (see figure) is to 220 V main as shown in the figure. The reading in an
ideal ammeter will be :
1 1 (a) 0.90 A (b) 1.80 A

(a) A (b) A
45 15 (c) 1.35 A (d) 0.45 A
1 1 7. The total current supplied to the circuit by the battery is
(c) A (d) A
10 5
3. The resistance of all the wires between any two adjacent
dots is R. The equivalent resistance between A and B as
shown is
(a) 1 A (b) 2 A
(a) 7R/13 (b) 7R/6 (c) 4 A (d) 6 A
(c) 14R/8 (d) 15R/7 8. The electrical resistance between points A and B of the
figure shown is
4. What is the equivalent resistance of the network across
points A and B shown in figure below.
2
(a)    (b) 2 
3
(a) 4 ohm (b) 36/7 ohm 3

(c)    (d) 6 
(c) 23/7 ohm (d) 12/7 ohm 2
9. In the given circuit RB = 6, RC = 3, RD = 1. The ratio 14. This question has Statement-I and Statement-II. Of the
of current through resistors C, B and D will be in the ratio four choices given after the statements, choose the one
that best describes the two Statements.
Statement-I : Higher the range, greater is the resistance
of ammeter.
Statement-II : To increase the range of ammeter, additional
shunt needs to be used across it.
(a) If Statement-I is true, Statement-II is true; Statement-II
is the correct explanation for Statement-I.
(b) If Statement-I is true, Statement-II is true; Statement-II
is not a correct explanation for Statement-I.
(a) 2 : 1 : 6 (b) 3 : 2 : 1 (c) If Statement-I is true; Statement-II is false.
(c) 2 : 3 : 6 (d) 1 : 2 : 3 (d) If Statement-I if false; Statement-II is true.
15. Statement–1 : At cryogenic temperatures, the electrical
10. In the circuit, the galvanometer G shows zero deflection. If
resistivity in metallic conductors diminishes.
the batteries A and B have negligible internal resistance,
the value of the resistor R will be Statement–2 : Thermal oscillations of atoms which hinder
motion of free electrons under the influence of an external
field become insignificant.
(a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D
16. Statement– 1 : In the circuit shown assume both cell are
ideal and of fixed e.m.f., the resistor R1 is fixed, the resistor
R2 is non zero variable .Then the electric power delivered
to the resistor R1 is independent of value of resistance R2
(a) 200  (b) 100 

(c) 500  (d) 1000 
11. Two sources of equal emf are connected to an external
resistance R. The internal resistances of the two sources
are R1 and R2 (R2 > R1). If the potential difference across
the source having internal resistance R2, is zero, then
R 2   R1  R 2  Statement–2 : If potential difference across a fixed

(a) R  resistance is unchanged, the power delivered to the
 R 2  R1  resistor remains unchanged.
(b) R = R2 – R1 (a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D
R1R 2
(c) R  17. Statement–1 : A current flows in a conductor when there
 R1  R 2  is electric field within the conductor.
Statement–2 : The drift velocity of electrons in presence
R1R 2 of electric field decreases.
(d) R 
 R 2  R1  (a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D
12. When a cell is short circuited then
18. Statement–1 : When the battery is short circuited the
(a) current drawn from cell is maximum terminal potential difference is zero.
(b) potential difference across cell terminals become Statement–2 : In the situation of short circuit, the current
maximum is zero.
(c) potential difference across cell terminals become zero (a) A (b) B
(d) current drawn from cell is zero (c) C (d) D
13. The length of a given cylindrical wire is increased by 100%. 19. Statement–1 : Potentiometer is better for e.m.f.
Due to the consequent decrease in diameter the change in measurement of a cell than a voltmeter.
the resistance of the wire will be Statement–2 : A potentiometer draws no current while
measuring e.m.f. of a cell.
(a) 200% (b) 100%
(a) A (b) B
(c) 50% (d) 300% (c) C (d) D
189
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
20. Statement–1 : Two unequal resistors are connected in 28. Statement–1 : Voltmeter always gives e.m.f. of a cell if it is
series across a cell. Then the potential drop across the connected across the terminals of a cell.
larger resistor is more. Statement–2 : Terminal potential difference of a cell is
Statement–2 : Current will be same in both the resistors. given by V= E-Ir.
(a) A (b) B (a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D (c) C (d) D
21. Statement–1 : If the current in the lamp decreases by 29. Statement–1 : Potential measured by voltmeter across a
20%, the percentage decrease in its illumination is 40%. wire is always less than the actual potential difference
across it.
Statement–2 : Illumination is directly proportional to the
square of current flowing through lamp. Statement–2 : Finite resistance of voltmeter changes
current flowing through the resistance across which
(a) A (b) B
potential difference is to be measured.
(c) C (d) D
(a) A (b) B
22. Statement–1 : In a simple battery circuit the point of lowest (c) C (d) D
potential is negative terminal of battery.
30. Statement–1 : When two conducting wires of different
Statement–2 : Current flows towards the point of higher resistivity and having same cross sectional area are joined
potential as it does in such a circuit from negative to in series ,the electric field in them would be equal when
positive terminal. they carry current.
(a) A (b) B Statement–2 : When wires are in series they carry equal
(c) C (d) D current.
23. Statement–1 : Fuse wire must have high resistance and (a) A (b) B
low melting point. (c) C (d) D
Statement–2 : Fuse is used for small current flow only.
Comprehensive type questions
(a) A (b) B
(c) C (d) D Passage - 1
24. Statement–1 : A 200 watt bulb glows with more brightness Using the following passage, solve Q. 31 to 34
than 100 watt bulb. A potential difference is applied across a copper wire of
Statement–2 : 100 watt bulb has more resistance than 200 radius 0.5 mm. It results in a uniform electric field of 1.5 V/
watt. m along the length of the wire. Consequently there is a
(a) A (b) B current in the wire. Temperature of the wire is
(c) C (d) D 60oC.Assuming each copper atom contributes one free
electron .Given that density of copper is 8.9 gm/cm3 and
25. Statement–1 : It is advantageous to transmit electric power
resistivity of copper at 20oC is 1.7×10–8 ohm.m and its
at high voltage.
temperature coefficient of resistivity at 20oC is 3.9×10–3/
Statement–2 : High voltage implies high current. O
C . Atomic mass of copper is 63.5. Answer the following
(a) A (b) B questions.
(c) C (d) D 31. Resistivity of copper under experimental condition is
26. Statement–1 : Current density at any point in ohmic (a) 4.5 × 106 m (b) 1.96 × 10–8 m
resistor is in the direction of electric field at that point. (c) 3.2 × 10–8 m (d) 5.1 × 10–8 m
Statement–2 : A point charge when released from rest in 32. Current density in the wire is
a region having only electrostatic field always move along
(a) 11.24 × 106 A/m2 (b) 5.4 × 107 A/m2
electric field lines.
(c) 7.65 × 107 A/m2 (d) 52.5 × 106 A/m2
(a) A (b) B
33. Drift speed of the electron is
(c) C (d) D
(a) 2.3 × 10–2 m/s (b) 4.5 × 10–3 m/s
27. Statement–1 : The drift velocity of electrons in metallic
wire will decrease if the temperature of the wire is increased. (c) 7.5 × 103 m/s (d) 5.7 × 103 m/s
Statement–2 : On increasing temperature, conductivity 34. Potential difference that need to be applied between the
of metallic wire decreases. ends of a 4 m long wire to produce the given field is
(a) A (b) B (a) 3 volt (b) 4.5 volt
(c) C (d) D (c) 6 volt (d) 1.5 volt
190
CURRENT ELECTRICITY
Passage - 2 41. How can sensitivity of this potentiometer be further

Using the following passage, solve Q. 35 to 38 increased.
In the circuit shown the resistances are given in ohms (a) increasing the e.m.f. of driver cell
and the battery is assumed to be ideal with e.m.f. equal to
(b) increasing the length of potentiometer wire
3.0 volt.
(c) decreasing the length of potentiometer wire
(d) increasing the cross sectional area of wire
Passage - 4
Using the following passage, solve Q. 42 to 46
A Galvanometer is an instrument that can be used to
construct an ammeter for measuring current .It can be
35. The resistor that dissipated maximum power will be used converted to a voltmeter. It can also be used as a
multimeter. In all cases resistance must be connected to
(a) R1 (b) R2
galvanometer either in series or in parallel to effect the
(c) R3 (d) R5 change .To turn into an ammeter a low resistance in parallel
36. The electric current passing through 3 volt battery is of suitable value and to convert to a voltmeter a resistance
(a) 30 mA (b) 40 mA in series is connected to the galvanometer. You are given
(c) 50 mA (d) 60 mA a galvanometer for which a current of 10 mA is required
for full deflection .The internal resistance of the
37. Electric potential drop across R4 is
galvanometer is 100 ohm. Then answer the following
(a) 0.5 V (b) 1.0 V questions.
(c) 1.5 V (d) 2.0 V 42. Which of the following formula correctly applies to the
38. The potential difference across the resistor R5 is ammeter circuit.
(a) 0.4 V (b) 0.5 V
(c) 0.6 V (d) 1.0 V
Passage -3
The potentiometer basically consists of a uniform wire of
resistance R through which a steady current flows when
a driver cell source is connected between the points A (a) VR>Vr (b) Vr>VR
and B (ends of potentiometer wire) and tapping is adjusted (c) VR=Vr (d) more information required
till no current passes through galvanometer. Using this 43. What resistance must be connected in series to the
null deflection method, unknown e.m.f. of a cell is galvanometer in order to convert it to a 100 volt voltmeter?
determined. Using this concept answer the following (a) 600 ohm (b)1000 ohm
questions. (c) 9900 ohm (d) 13,900 ohm
39. The current in potentiometer wire is adjusted to give a 44. To double the full scale voltage reading of any
galvanometer turned into a voltmeter, you must
null point at 56 cm with a standard cell of e.m.f. 1.02 volt.
The e.m.f. of another cell for which null point is obtained
at 70 cm is
(a) 0.78 volt (b) 1.275 volt
(c) 1.35 volt (d) 1.54 volt (a) double the resistance R extra connected
(b) half the resistance R
40. The total length of the potentiometer wire is 10 m. The
distance between the null points on potentiometer wire (c) Increase the resistance to 4R
for two cells is 60 cm.If the difference between e.m.f.’s of (d) Increase the resistance to more than 2R
the cells be 0.4 volt, the potential gradient along the wire 45. In voltmeter circuit the current in resistor R must be
is (a) negligible so that it only has small effect on voltage
reading
4 (b) substantial but does not have any effect on voltage
(a) volt/m (b) 1 volt/m
3 reading
2
(c) substantial, but does have some effect on voltage
1
(c) volt/m (d) volt/m reading
3 2 (d) none of these
46. What resistance must be connected in parallel to the 52. A battery of e.m.f. E and internal resistance r is connected
galvanometer to turn it into an ammeter capable of reading across a resistance R. Resistance R can be adjusted to
electric current up to 10.01 A. any value greater than equal to zero. A graph is plotted
(a) 0.1 ohm (b) 1 ohm between the current passing through the resistance and
(c) 1.01 ohm (d) 10.01 ohm potential difference across it. Select the correct alternative.
Passage - 5
Bohr and Biot purchased two electric kettles A and B of
the same size and thickness and same volume of 0.4 litre.
They studied the specification of kettles as under
Kettle A : specific heat capacity;1680 J/kg–k, mass = 200
gm cost = Rs. 400 (a) internal resistance of the battery is 5 ohm
Kettle B : specific heat capacity = 2450 J/kg–K mass = 400 (b) e.m.f. of the battery is 10 volt
gm cost = Rs 400. When kettle A is switched on with
(c) maximum current which can be taken from battery is 2
constant potential source, the tea begins to boil in 6
ampere
minutes. When kettle B is switched on with same source
separately, tea begins to boil in 8 minutes. They made (d) V versus I graph can never be straight line as shown
discussion on specification and efficiency of kettles and here.
prepared a list of questions to draw a conclusion. Some 53. In the circuit shown in the figure
of these are as under (take specific heat of tea liquid =
4200 J/kg–k, and density = 1000 kg/m3)
47. Efficiency of kettle A is
(a) 93.34% (b) 83.34%
(c) 73.34% (d) 100%
48. Efficiency of kettle B is
(a) 93.5% (b) 83.5% (a) voltage V=10 volt
(c) 73.5% (d) 62.5% (b) resistance R1=10 ohm
49. If the resistances of coil of kettle A and B are RB and RB (c) resistance R2=20 ohm
respectively, then we can say (d) equivalent resistance of the circuit is 10 ohm
(a) RA > RB
(b) RA > RB Numeric Type Questions
(c) RA = RB 54. In the circuit shown below , calculate the current flowing
(d) no relation can be predicted through 3 ohm resistance.
50. If both the kettles are joined with the same source in series
one after the other .The boiling starts in kettle A & B after
(a) four times of their original time
(b) two times of their original time
(c) equal to their original time
(d) can not be ascertained from this data.
Multiple Choice Questions

55. Figure below shows a bridge circuit of the five resistors.
51. A microammeter has a resistance of 100  and full scale What is potential difference Vba in volt in the circuit shown.
range of 50 A. It can be used as a voltmeter or as a higher
range ammeter provided a resistance is added to it. Pick
the correct range and resistance combination (s)
(a) 50 V range with 10 k resistance in series
(b) 10 V range with 200 k resistance in series
(c) 5 mA range with 1  resistance in parallel
(d) 10 mA range with 1  resistance in parallel
56. The potential difference between the points A and B 63. Calculate the steady state current in the 2  resistor shown
shown in the circuit will be …..Volt. in the circuit (see figure). The internal resistance of the
battery is negligible and the capacitance of the condenser
C is 0.2 F.
57. In the given circuit, what is the value of R in ohm for

which current flowing through 4 ohm resistor is zero.
A B C
2 R
64. A leaky parallel plane capacitor is filled completely with a
4
10V 4V material having dielectric constant k = 5 and electrical
–12 –1 –1
conductivity  = 7.4 × 10  m . If the charge on the
6V
plane at instant t = 0 is = 8.85 mC, then calculate the leakage
D current at the instant t = 12 s.
58. Three 2 ohm resistors are connected as shown in figure 65. Find the emf (V) and internal resistance (r) of a single
below. Each can withstand a maximum power of 32 watt battery which is equivalent to a parallel combination of
without becoming excessive hot .What maximum power two batteries of emfs V1 and V2 and internal resistance r1
in watt that can be delivered to the combination of and r2 respectively, with polarities as shown in figure
resistors.
59. An ideal battery sends a current of 5 A in a resistor. When

another resistor of value 10 ohm is connected in parallel
the current through battery increases to 6 ampere. Find 66. Two resistors, 400 , and 800  are connected in series
the resistance of first resistor. with a 6 V battery. It is desired to measure the current in
60. A galvanometer has full scale range of 50A with a the circuit. An ammeter of 10  resistance is used for this
resistance of 100  When 1 In parallel, it can be used purpose. What will be the reading in the ammeter ? Similarly,
as a higher range ammeter. What is its range in mA. if a voltmeter of 1000  resistance is used to measure the
potential difference across the 400  resistor, what will be
61. In the circuit shown in figure E1 = 3 V, E2 = 2 V, E3 = 1 V and
R = r1 = r2 = r3 = 1 . the reading in the voltmeter ?
67. In the circuit shown in figure E, F, G, H are cells of emf 2, 1,
3 and 1 V respectively, and their internal resistances are 2,
1, 3 and 1  respectively. Calculate :
(i) the potential difference between B and D and
(ii) the potential difference across the terminals of each
(i) Find the potential difference between the points A and cells G and H.
B and the currents through each branch.
(ii) If r2 is short circuited and the point A is connected to
point B, find the currents through E1, E2, E3 and the resistor R.
62 . The equivalent resistance between points A and B of the
circuit given below is .........
Subjective Type Questions 74. A heating coil of 2000 watt is immersed in an electric kettle.
How much time will it take in raising the temperature of 1
68. It is desired to make a 20.0  coil of wire whose temperature litre of water from 4°C to 100°C ? Only 80% part of the
coefficient of resistance is zero. To do this, carbon resistor therml energy produced is used in raising the temperature
of resistance R1 is placed in series with an iron resistor of of water.
resistance R2. The proportion of iron and carbon are so 75. A house is fitted with 20 lamps of 60 watt each, 10 fans
chosen that R1 + R2 = 20 for all temperatures near 20°C. consuming 0.5 A each and and electric kettle of resistance
Find the values of R1 and R2. Temperature coefficient of 110 . If the energy is supplied at 220 V and costs 50 paise
–3 per k Wh, calculate bill for November while running these
resistance for carbon, C = – 0.5 × 10 /°C and that of
–3 appliances for 6 hours a day.
iron is Fe = 5 × 10 /°C.
76. We have 30 watt, 6 volt bulb which we want to glow by a
69. (a) Estimate the average drift speed of conduction electrons
–7 2 supply of 120 V. What will have to be done for it ?
in a copper wire of cross-sectional area 1.0 × 10 m carrying
77. A heater is designed to operate with a power of 1000 W in
a current to 1.5 A. Assume that each copper contributes
a 100 V line. It is connected to two resistance of 10  and
roughly one conduction electron. The density of copper is
3 3 R , Figure. If the heater is now operating with a power of
9.0 × 10 kg/m , and its atomic mass is 63.5 u.
62.5 W, calculate the value R.
(b) Compare the drift speed obtained above with,
(i) thermal speeds of copper atoms at ordinary
temperatures,
(ii) speed of propagation of electric field along the
conductor which causes the drift motion.
70. A wire carries a current of 0.5 A, when a potential difference
of 1.5 V is applied across it. What is its conductance ? If
2 78. Five equal resistance each of R  are connected in a
the wire is of length 3 m and area of cross-section 5.4 mm , network as shown in figure. Calculate the equivalent
calculate its conductivity. resistance between the points A and B.
71. Write the mathematical relation between mobility and drift
velocity of charge carriers in a conductor. Name the mobile
charge carriers responsible for conduction of electric
current in (a) an electrolyte (b) an ionised gas.
72. Find the current in each branch of the given circuit. What
is the energy supplied by the battery to the circuit in one
minute?
73. The resistance of the galvanometer G in the circuit is 25. 79. The given network is part of another larger circuit.
The meter deflects full scale for a current of 10 mA. Calculate the potential of point D.
The meter behaves as an ammeter of three different
ranges. The range is 0–10 A, if the terminals O and P
are taken; range is 0 – 1 A between O and Q; range is 0
– 0.1 A between O and R. Calculate the resistance R 1,
R 2 and R3.
Match the Column Type Questions 83. Consider two identical cells each of e.m.f. E and internal
resistance of r connected to a load resistance R. Match
80. For an electric conductor, Match column I with Column II column-1 with column-2.
Column-I Column-II Column-1 Column-2
(a) Electric conductivity of a (p) Electric field
conductor depends on strength E2
(a) For parallel combination (P)
(b) Conductance of a (q) Temperature 4r
conductor depends on of cells
(c) For a given conductor (r) Nature of the
r
at a given temperature conductor (b) For series combination (Q) Ee= E, req 
current density depends on 2
(d) For a given potential (s) Dimensions of of cells
difference applied across a conductor (area/ (c) For maximum power (R) Ee= 2E, re= 2q
conductor, current in it will length) transfer to load when
depends on. cells in series
81. In an electric circuit with two batteries in series with E2
opposite polarities are shown in the figure, match the (d) For maximum power (S)
2r
following quantities in column I with column-II. transfer when cells
are in parallel
Column-I Column-II
(a) Potential difference across (p) B1
B1 battery
(b) Potential difference across (q) 9 volt
B2 battery
(c) power is supplied by battery (r) B2
(d) Powerr is consumed by (s) 14 volt
battery (t) none
82. Referring to a circuit shown below, match the column I
with Column II
Column-I Column-II
(a) Equivalent resistance (p) The circuit is a balanced
between A and C wheatstone bridge plus a
resistance parallel to bridge
(b) Equivalent resistance (q) R/2
between B and D
(c) Equivalent resistance (r) On removing the
A and B between B and D
equivalent resistance
becomes R/2
(d) Equivalent resistance (s) On removing
between C and D resistance between
B and D equivalent
resistance becomes 5R/8

1. In the given circuit, it is observed that the current I is
1 1
independent of the value of the resistance R6. Then, the (a)
4

C V12  V22  (b)
4

C V12  V22 
resistance values must satisfy (JEE 2001)
1 1
C  V1  V2  C  V1  V2 
2 2
(c) (d)
4 4
Passage
Consider a simple RC circuit as shown in figure 1.
Process 1 : In the circuit the switch Sis closed at t = 0 and
the capacitor is fully charged to voltage V0 (i.e. charging
continues for time T>>RC). In the process some
dissipation (ED) occurs across the resistance R. The
(a) R1R2R5 = R3R4R6 amount of energy finally stored in the fully charged
capacitor is Ec.
1 1 1 1
(b) R  R  R  R  R  R Process 2 : In a different process the voltage is first set
5 6 1 2 3 4
V0
(c) R1R4 = R2R3 to and maintained for a charging time T>>RC. Then
3
(d) R1R3 = R2R4
2. A wire of length L and 3 identical cells of negligible internal 2V0
the voltage is raised to without discharging the
resistances are connected in series. Due to the current, 3
the temperature of the wire is raised by T in a time t. A capacitor and again maintained for a time t>>RC. The
number N of similar cells is now connected in series with a
process is repeated one more time by raising the voltage
wire of the same material and cross-section but of length
to V0 and the capacitor is charged to the same final voltage
2L. The temperature of the wire is raised by the same amount
V0 as in process 1.
T in the same time. The value of N is (JEE 2001)
These two processes are depicted in figure 2.
(a) 4 (b) 6
(c) 8 (d) 9
3. The effective resistance between points P and of the
electrical circuit shown in the figure is (JEE 2002)
5. A 100 W bulb B1, and two 60 W bulbs B2 and B3, are

connected to a 250 V source, as shown in the figure. Now
W1, W2 and W3 are the output powers of the bulbs B1, B2
and B3 respectively. Then (JEE 2002)
2 Rr 8 R R  r
(a) (b)
Rr 3R  r
5R
(c) 2r + 4R (d)  2r
2
4. Two identical capacitors, have the same capacitance C.
One of them is charged to potential V1 and the other to V2. (a) W1 > W2 = W3 (b) W1 > W2 > W3
The negative ends are also connected, the decrease in
(c) W1 < W2 = W3 (d) W1 < W2 < W3
energy of the combined system is (2002)
6. A thin uniform wire AB of length 1 m, an unknown resistance Assertion and Reason

X and a resistance of 12  are connected by thick
conducting strips, as shown in the figure. A battery and (a) If Statement-I is true, Statement-II is true; Statement-II is
galvanometer (with a sliding jockey connected to it are the correct explanation for Statement-I.
also available). Connections are to be made to measure (b) If Statement-I is true, Statement-II is true; Statement-II is
the unknown resistance X using the principle of not a correct explanation for Statement-I.
Wheatstone bridge. Answer the following questions. (c) If Statement-I is true; Statement-II is false.
(JEE 2002) (d) If Statement-I if false; Statement-II is true.
9. Statement-I : In a meter bridge experiment, null point for
an unknown resistance is measured. Now, the the unknown
resistance is put inside an enclosure maintained at a higher
temperature. The null point can be obtained at the same
point as before by decreasing the value of the standard
(a) Are there positive and negative terminals on the resistance.
galvanometer ? Statement-II : Resistance of a metal increases with increase
(b) Copy the figure in your answer book and show the in temperature. (JEE 2003)
battery and the galvanometer (with jockey) connected at (a) A (b) B
appropriate points. (c) C (d) D
(c) After appropriate connections are made, it is found 10. Six equal resistances are connected between points P, and
that no deflection takes place in the galvanometer when R as shown in the figure. Then, the net resistance will be
the sliding jockey touches the wire at a distance of 60 cm maximum between (JEE 2004)
from A. Obtain the value of the resistance X.
7. In the shown arrangement of the experiment of the meter
bridge if AC corresponding to null deflection of
galvanometer is x, what would be its value if the radius of
the wire AB is doubled ? (JEE 2003)
(a) P and Q (b) and R

(c) P and R (d) any two points
11. A moving coil galvanometer of resistance 100  is used
as an ammeter using a resistance 0.1 . The maximum
(a) x (b) x/4
deflection current in the galvanometer is 100 A. Find the
(c) 4x (d) 2x
minimum current in the circuit, so that the ammeter shown
8. Three resistances of equal value are arranged in the
maximum deflection. (JEE 2005)
different combinations shown below. Arrange them in
increasing order of power dissipation. (JEE 2003) (a) 100.1 mA (b) 1000.1 mA
(c) 10.01 mA (d) 1.01 mA
12. A rigid container with thermally insulated walls contains a
coil of resistance 100 , carrying current 1A. Change in
internal energy after 5 min will be (JEE 2005)
(a) zero
(b) 10 kJ
(c) 20 kJ
(a) III < II < IV < I (b) II < III < IV < I (d) 30 kJ
(c) I < IV < III < II (d) I < III < II < IV
13. Find out the value of current through 2  resistance for Multiple Choice Questions
the given circuit. (JEE 2005)
17. For the circuit shown in the figure (JEE 2009)
(a) 5 A (b) 2 A
(c) zero (d) 4 A
14. Two bars of radius r and 2r are kept in contact as shown.
An electric current I is passed through the bars. Which
(a) the current I through the battery is 7.5 mA
one of following is correct ? (JEE 2006)
(b) the potential difference across RL is 18 V
(c) ratio of powers dissipated in R1 and R2 is 3
(d) if R1 and R2 are interchanged, magnitude of the power
dissipated in RL will decrease by a factor of 9
18. Consider a thin square sheet of side L and thickness t,
made of a material of resistivity . The resistance between
(a) Heat produced in bar BC is 4 times the heat produced two opposite faces, shown by the shaded areas in the
in bar AB figure is (JEE 2010)
(b) Electric field in both halves is equal
(c) Current density across AB is double that of across BC
(d) Potential difference across AB is 4 times that of across BC
15. A resistance of 2  is connected across one gap of a
metre-bridge (the length of the wire is 100 cm) and an
unknown resistance, greater than 2 , is connected across
the other gap. When these resistances are interchanged,
the balance point shifts by 20 cm. Neglecting any
(a) directly proportional to L
corrections, the unknown resistance is (JEE 2007)
(a) 3  (b) 4  (b) directly propotional to t
(c) 5  (d) 6  (c) independent of L
16. Figure shows three resistor configurations R1, R2 and R3 (d) independent of t
connected to 3 V battery. If the power dissipated by the
19. Incandescent bulbs are designed by keeping in mind that
configuration R1, R2 and R3 is P1, P2 and P3, respectively,
then (JEE 2008) the resistance of their filament increases with the increase
in temperature. If at room temperature, 100W, 60W and 40W
bulbs have filament resistance R100, R60 and R40, respectively,
the relation between these resistances is (JEE 2010)
1 1 1
(a) R  R  R
100 40 60
(b) R100 = R40 + R60

(c) R100 > R60 > R40
(a) P1 > P2 > P3 (b) P1 > P3 > P2
(c) P2 > P1 > P3 (d) P3 > P2 > P1 1 1 1
(d) R  R  R
100 40 60
20. To verify Ohm’s law, a student is provided with a test 23. A meter bridge is set-up as shown in figure, to determine
resistor RT, a high resistance R1, a small resistance R2, two an unknown resistance X using a standard 10  resistor.
identical galvanometers G1 and G2, and a variable voltage The galvanometer shows null point when tapping-key is
source V. The correct circuit to carry out the experiment is at 52 cm mark. The end-corrections are 1 cm and 2 cm
(JEE 2010) respectively for the ends A and B. The determined value
(a) of X is (JEE 2011)
(a) 10.2  (b) 10.6 

(b) (c) 10.8  (d) 11.1 
24. For the resistance network shown in the figure, choose
the correct option(s). (JEE 2012)
(c)
(a) The current through Pis zero

(b) I1 = 3A
(d)
(c) The potential at S is less than that at Q
(d) I2 = 2A
25. During an experiment with a metre bridge, the galvanometer
shows a null point when the jockey is pressed at 40.0 cm
using a standard resistance of 90, as shown in the figure.
The least count of the scale used in the metre bridge is 1
mm. The unknown resistance is (JEE 2014)
21. When two identical batteries of internal resistance 1
each are connected in series across a resistor R, the rate of
heat produced in R is J1. When the same batteries are
connected in parallel across R, the rate is J2. If J1 = 2.25 J2
then the value of R in  is (JEE 2010)
22. Two batteries of different emfs and different internal
resistances are connected as shown. The voltage across
AB in volt is. (JEE 2011) (a) 60  0.15
(b) 135  0.56
(c) 60  0.25
(d) 135  0.23
26. Two ideal batteries of emf V1 and V2 and three resistances 2475 1875
R1, R2 and R3 are connected as shown in the figure. The (a)  (b) 
64 64
current in resistance R2 would be zero if (JEE 2014)
1875 2475
(c)  (d) 
49 132
30. Consider two identical galvanometers and two identical
resistors with resistance R. If the internal resistance of
the galvanometers RC < R/2, which of the following
statement(s) about any one of the galvanometers is(are)
true? (JEE 2016)
(a) The maximum voltage range is obtained when all the
components are connected in series
(a) V1 = V2 and R1 = R2 = R3
(b) The maximum voltage range is obtained when the two
(b) V1 = V2 and R1 = 2R2 = R3 resistors and one galvanometer are connected in series,
(c) V1 = 2V2 and 2R1 = 2R2 = R3 and the second galvanometer is connected in parallel to
(d) 2V1 = V2 and 2R1 = R2 = R3 the first galvanometer
27. A galvanometer gives full scale deflection with 0.006 A (c) The maximum current range is obtained when all the
current. By connecting it to a 4990  resistance, it can be components are connected in parallel
converted into a voltmeter of range 0-30 V. If connected to (d) The maximum current range is obtained when the two
2n galvanometers are connected in series and the combination
a  resistance, it becomes an ammeter of range 0-1.5
249 is connected in parallel with both the resistors
A. The value of n is (JEE 2014) 31. In process 1, the energy stored in the capacitor EC and
28. In the following circuit, the current through the resistor R heat dissipated across resistance ED are related by :
(=2) is I amperes. The value of I is (JEE 2015) (JEE 2017)
(a) EC = ED ln2 (b) EC = ED
1
(c) EC = 2ED (d) EC  E D
2
32. In process 2, total energy dissipated across the resistance
ED is : (JEE 2017)
29. In an aluminium (Al) bar of square cross section, a 1 

(a) E D  1  1 CV02  (b) E D  3  CV02 
square hole is drilled and is filled with iron (Fe) as 3 2  2 
shown in the figure. The electrical resistivities of Al and
Fe are 2.7 × 10 m and 1.0 × 10 m, respectively. The 1
(c) E D  3CV02 (d) E D  CV02
electrical resistance between the two faces P and of the 2
composite bar is (JEE 2015)
33. A moving coil galvanometer has 50 turns and each turn
has an area 2×10–4 m2. The magnetic field produced by the
magnet inside the galvanometer is 0.02T. The torsional
constant of the suspension wire is 10–4 N m rad–1. When a
current flows through the galvanometer, a full scale
deflection occurs if the coil rotates by 0.2 rad. The
resistance of the coil of the galvanometer is 50. This
galvanomter is to be converted into an ammeter capable
of measuring current in the range 0–1.0 A. For this
purpose, a shunt resistance is to be added in parallel to
the galvanometer. The value of this shunt resistance, in
ohms, is.................. (JEE 2018)
34. In the circuit shown, initially there is no charge on

capacitors and keys S1 and S2 are open. The values of the
capacitors are C1 = 10F , C2 = 30F and C3 = C4 = 80F .
Which of the statement(s) is/are correct? (JEE 2019)
V0 t  R 2 
(a) I  ln
  R1 
(b) the outer surface is at a higher voltage than the inner
surface
(c) the outer surface is at a lower voltage than the inner
surface
(a) The key S1 is kept closed for long time such that
(d) V  I 2
capacitors are fully charged. Now key S2 is closed, at this
time the instantaneous current across 30 resistor 37. In the balanced condition, the values of the resistances
(between points P & Q) will be 0.2A (round off to 1st of the four arms of a Wheatstone bridge are shown in
decimal place). the figure below. The resistance R3 has temperature
(b) If key S1 is kept closed for long time such that coefficient 0.0004° C–1. If the temperature of R3 is
increased by 100 ºC, the voltage developed between S
capacitors are fully charged, the voltage across the
and T will be__________ volt. (JEE 2020)
capacitor C1 will be 4V.
(c) At time t = 0, the key S1 is closed, the instantaneous
current in the closed circuit will be 25 mA
(d) if key S1 is kept closed for long time such that
capacitors are fully charged, the voltage difference
between points P and will be 10V.
35. Two identical moving coil galvanometers have 10
resistance and full scale deflection at 2A current. One
of them is converted into a voltmeter of 100 mV full scale 38. In the circuit show below, the switch 5 is connected to
reading and the other into an Ammeter of 1mA full scale position P for a long time so that the charge on the
current using appropriate resistors. These are then used capacitor becomes q1μC . Then 5 is switched to position
to measure the voltage and current in the Ohm’s law Q. After a long time, the charge on the capacitor is q 2μC .
experiment with R = 1000 resistor by using an ideal cell. [JEE 2021]
Which of the following statement(s) is/are correct ?
(JEE 2019)
(a) The resistance of the Voltmeter will be 100
(b) The resistance of the Ammeter will be 0.02(round
off to 2nd decimal place)
(c) If the ideal cell is replaced by a cell having internal The magnitude of q2 is
resistance of 5 then the measured value of R will be 39. In the circuit show below, the switch 5 is connected to
more than 1000  position P for a long time so that the charge on the
(d) The measured value of R will be 5 capacitor becomes q1μC . Then 5 is switched to position
36. Shown in the figure is a semicircular metallic strip that Q. After a long time, the charge on the capacitor is q 2μC .
has thickness t and resistivity  Its inner radius is R1 and [JEE 2021]
outer radius is R2. If a voltage V0 is applied between its
two ends, a current I flows in it. In addition, it is observed
that a transverse voltage V develops between its inner
and outer surfaces due to purely kineticeffects of moving
electrons (ignore any role of the magnetic field due to the
current). Then (figure is schematic and not drawn to
scale)– (JEE 2020) The magnitude of q1 is
CURRENT ELECTRICITY

202
ANSWER KEY
Answer Key
CHAPTER -1 ELECTROSTATICS
EXERCISE - 1 : EXERCISE - 2 :
BASIC OBJECTIVE QUESTIONS PREVIOUS YEARS JEE MAIN QUESTIONS
DIRECTION TO USE -
DIRECTION TO USE - Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions.
Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions.
1. (6.25) 2. (a) 3. (b) 4. (c) 1. (d) 2. (a) 3. (d) 4. (a)

5. (c) 6. (b) 7. (a) 8. (d) 5. (c) 6. (c) 7. (c) 8. (b)
9. (d) 10. (a) 11. (4.50) 12. (b) 9. (d) 10. (2) 11. (b) 12. (c)
13. (d) 14. (a) 15. (a) 16. (a) 13. (d) 14. (b) 15. (a) 16. (d)
17. (d) 18. (a) 19. (3) 20. (3) 17. (d) 18. (d) 19. (b) 20. (b)
21. (c) 22. (c) 23. (c) 24. (b) 21. (b) 22. (4) 23. (d) 24. (1.00)
25. (d) 26. (c) 27. (c) 28. (c) 25. (b) 26. (b) 27. (c) 28. (d)
29. (1) 30. (c) 31. (c) 32. (c) 29. (d) 30. (c) 31. (c) 32. (d)
33. (a) 34. (c) 35. (d) 36. (4) 33. (b) 34. (b) 35. (a) 36. (a)
37. (b) 38. (b) 39. (c) 40. (b) 37. (c) 38. (c) 39. (b) 40. (b)
41. (c) 42. (a) 43. (c) 44. (c) 41. (c) 42. (c) 43. (48.00) 44. (b)
45. (2.70) 46. (d) 47. (a) 48. (b) 45. (c) 46. (b) 47. (a) 48. (c)
49. (d) 50. (b) 51. (b) 52. (b) 49. (a) 50. (b) 51. (c) 52. (a)
53. (d) 54. (b) 55. (d) 56. (90) 53. (a) 54. (d) 55. (b) 56. (c)
57. (c) 58. (a) 59. (a) 60. (7) 57. (48.00) 58. (226.00) 59. (128.00)
61. (d) 62. (b) 63. (c) 64. (c) 60. (36.00) 61. (20) 62. (243.00)
65. (d) 66. (a) 67. (576) 68. (d) 63. (a) 64. (d) 65. (c) 66. (c)
69. (a) 70. (b) 71. (b) 72. (b) 67. (1.00) 68. (640.00) 69. (a) 70. (c)
73. (a) 74. (3) 75. (d) 76. (a) 71. (c)
77. (a) 78. (c) 79. (a) 80. (d)
203
ANSWER KEY
EXERCISE - 3 :
ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTION 1  Qq 
 
(c) 40  2ma 
47. (a) 2and 8at ends, at 3 cm from 2(b) zero
5
48. 
6
49. (b)
2
Q2 R   R  
n
U
50. (a) n  1    
8 0 r 2   R  r  
DIRECTION TO USE -
Q2 R
(b) U  
1. (d) 2. (d) 3. (c) 4. (b) 8 0 r 2
5. (a) 6. (b) 7. (a) 8. (c) 51. (b, d) 52. (a,b,c)
9. (b) 10. (b) 11. (a) 12. (d) 53. (b,c) 54. (c,d)
13. (d) 14. (c) 15. (d) 16. (c) 55. (b,d) 56. (a,b,cd)
17. (a) 18. (a) 19. (c) 20. (a) 57. (a,b) 58. (a,b,c,d)
21. (a) 22. (b) 23. (c) 24. (d) 59. (c,d) 60. (a,d)
25. (a) 26. (b) 27. (b) 28. (b) 61. (a,b,c) 62. (c,d)
29. (c) 30. (d) 31. (d) 63. (a,c) 64. (a,b)
65. (A–R, P; B–Q; C–P; D–P,S)
32. (True) 33. (False) 34. (0.2) 35. (0.9)
66. (–Ea)
36.(0) 37. (0.5) 38. (3.16 × 10–9C)
39. (8.48 m) 40. (0.628 sec.) 67. ( 8iˆ )
4
41. (a) H  a (b) H  3
a
9 q2
3 68. 9  10
L2
   a2  69. (c)
42. (i) VA   a  b  c  , VB    b  c  ,
0 0  b 
1 Q2
70. 180º , , 2
  a 2 b2  40 4L
VC     c , (ii) a + b = c
0 
 c c 
3 Q2 3 GM 2
43. (a) U  , (b) U   E  1.5  1032 J ,
20  0 R 5 R
(c) U  Q2
80 R
q
44. 2 0 m
QR  r
45. 4 R 2  r 2
0  
 1
46. (a) 4a, (5a, 0); (b) KQ 
2 
 ;
 3a  x 3a  x 
204
ANSWER KEY
EXERCISE - 4 :
PREVIOUS YEARS JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS
DIRECTION TO USE -
1. (b) 2. (c) 3. (b)

4. (5.86 m/s)
1 q2 4
5. (b) 6.
40 a
.
6

3 3 3 6  2 
qp  pq ˆ
7. (c) 8. (a) KE  2
, (b) F  i
40 d 20 d3
9. (c) 10.
 1  2  qa 11. (c)
2 0
1/ 3
 a 
12. V '  V  
 3t 
13. (b) 14. (a,b,c,d) 15. (c) 16. (d)
17. (b) 18. (a) 19. (d) 20. (c)
21. (b) 22. (a) 23. (b) 24. (c)
25. (b) 26. (a) 27. (a) 28. (a,d)
29. (d) 30. (a)
31. (a,b,c,d)
32. (c)
33. (a,b,c,d)
34. (c,d) 35. (c) 36. (a,c,d)
37. (6) 38. (b,d) 39. (c,d) 40. (c)
41. (c) 42. (a) 43. (c) 44. (d)
45. (6) 46. (c) 47. (b,d)
48. (P–5; Q–3; R–1, 4; S–2)
49. (a,b) 50. (a) 51. (c,d)
52. (b,c,d)
53. (b,c) 54. (6.00) 55. (2.00) 56. (a,c)
57. (3.00) 58. (6.40)
205
ANSWER KEY
Answer Key
CHAPTER -2 CAPACITANCE
DIRECTION TO USE - DIRECTION TO USE -

Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions. Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions.
1. (b) 2. (d) 3. (d) 4. (d) 1. (a) 2. (d) 3. (b) 4. (b)

5. (c) 6. (a) 7. (b) 8. (a) 5. (b) 6. (a) 7. (c) 8. (c)
9. (c) 10. (c) 11. (c) 12. (2.40) 9. (a) 10. (a) 11. (a) 12. (b)
13. (c) 14. (b) 15. (c) 16. (c)
13. (c) 14. (b) 15. (b) 16. (b)
17. (d) 18. (13) 19. (b) 20. (c)
21. (a) 22. (b) 23. (a) 24. (c) 17. (b) 18. (b) 19. (b) 20. (d)
25. (40) 26. (b) 27. (c) 28. (d) 21. (a) 22. (d) 23. (c) 24. (b)
29. (c) 30. (d) 31. (b) 32. (b) 25. (b) 26. (a) 27. (a)
33. (c) 34. (b) 35. (d) 36. (b)
28. (4.00) Our Answer NTA Answer (36.00)
37. (a) 38. (c) 39. (d) 40. (b)
41. (b) 42. (a) 43. (c) 44. (b) 29. (a) 30. (c) 31. (d) 32. (d)
45. (a) 46. (c) 47. (c) 48. (a) 33. (d) 34. (d) 35. (864.00) 36. (2.00)
49. (b) 50. (d) 51. (b) 52. (a) 37. (16.00) 38. (161.00) 39. (a)
53. (d) 54. (b) 55. (b)
206
ANSWER KEY
ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTION PREVIOUS YEARS JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS
DIRECTION TO USE -
DIRECTION TO USE -
1. (b) 2. (a) 3. (b) 4. (a) 1. (b) 2. (a) 3. (a) 4. (d)
5. (c) 6. (b) 7. (a) 8. (d) 5. (c) 6. (b,d) 7. (a,d) 8. (d)
9. (c) 10. (d) 11. (d) 12. (a) 9. (1.00) 10. (1.30)
13. (a) 14. (c) 15. (d) 16. (c)
17. (c) 18. (b) 19. (c) 20. (c)
21. (a) 22. (a) 23. (b) 24. (c)
25. (b) 26. (b) 27. (b) 28. (5)
29. (5) 30. (2)
31. 
3 
V
K2
CK1K 2 K A
32. CR  n 2 where C  0
K 2  K1 K1 d
33. (1.50)
34. (3/5)
–9 –5
35. (i) CA = 2 × 10 F, UA = 1.21 × 10 J ;
–5 –5
(ii) W = 4.84 × 10 J ; (iii) U = 1.1 × 10 J
36. (b,c)
37. (a,c)
38. (a,c,d)
39. (a,d)
40. (b,d)
41. (a,c,d)
42. (A–S; B–Q; C–Q; D–P)
43. (A–S; B–S,R; C–P,Q; D–R,P)
0 AV  2AV
44. ,
d d
207
ANSWER KEY
Answer Key
CHAPTER -3 CURRENT ELECTRICITY
DIRECTION TO USE - DIRECTION TO USE -

Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions. Scan the QR code and check detailed solutions.
1. (c) 2. (b) 3. (d) 4. (10) 1. (b) 2. (a) 3. (c) 4. (d)

5. (d) 6. (a) 7. (a) 8. (c) 5. (b) 6. (b) 7. (a) 8. (b)
9. (b) 10. (d) 11. (d) 12. (d) 9. (a) 10. (b) 11. (d) 12. (d)
13. (a) 14. (b) 15. (b) 16. (a) 13. (a) 14. (b) 15. (a) 16. (d)
17. (a) 18. (d) 19. (b) 20. (15) 17. (a) 18. (c) 19. (d) 20. (d)
21. (b) 22. (c) 23. (a) 24. (b) 21. (d) 22. (a) 23. (a) 24. (a)
25. (b) 26. (c) 27. (c) 28. (d) 25. (c) 26. (d) 27. (d) 28. (b)
29. (a) 30. (a) 31. (b) 32. (d) 29. (d) 30. (c) 31. (200.00) 32. (b)
33. (b) 34. (a) 35. (c) 36. (d) 33. (c) 34. (c) 35. (4.00) 36. (b)
37. (15) 38. (a) 39. (d) 40. (a) 37. (a) 38. (a) 39. (b) 40. (b)
41. (b) 42. (b) 43. (d) 44. (6.67) 41. (b) 42. (b) 43. (c) 44. (c)
45. (d) 46. (1.5 A) 47. (c) 48. (b) 45. (b) 46. (c) 47. (c) 48. (4.00)
49. (a) 50. (d) 51. (d) 52. (a) 49. (b) 50. (b) 51. (d) 52. (c)
53. (c) 54. (c) 55. (2.6) 56. (b) 53. (d) 54. (c) 55. (b) 56. (c)
57. (a) 58. (b) 59. (d) 60. (b) 57. (d) 58. (c) 59. (c) 60. (0.50)
61. (c) 62. (c) 63. (c) 64. (c) 61. (1.00) 62. (a) 63. (a) 64. (c)
65. (30) 66. (d) 67. (d) 68. (c) 65. (8.00) 66. (b) 67. (b) 68. (b)
69. (b) 70. (a) 71. (a) 69. (b) 70. (b) 71. (30) 72. (b)
72. (53.57) 73. (40) 74. (37.5) 75. (b) 73. (d) 74. (b) 75. (d) 76. (d)
76. (c) 77. (a) 78. (b) 79. (b) 77. (8.00) 78. (c) 79. (b) 80. (4)
80. (a) 81. (c) 82. (0.41) 83. (0.01) 81. (2.00) 82. (4) 83. (d) 84. (c)
84. (d) 85. (b) 86. (b) 87. (c) 85. (b) 86. (a) 87. (a) 88. (8.00)
88. (d) 89. (b) 90. (a) 89. (5.00) 90. (a) 91. (a) 92. (c)
93. (3.00) 94. (5.00)
95. (2500.00) 96. (4.00)
97. (2.00) 98. (70.00)
99. (48.00) 100. (4.00)
101. (2.00) 102. (1.00)
103.(b) 104. (a) 105. (c) 106. (c)
107.(a) 108. (b) 109. (b) 110. (c)
111. (c)
208
ANSWER KEY
ADVANCED OBJECTIVE QUESTION PREVIOUS YEARS JEE ADVANCED QUESTIONS
DIRECTION TO USE -
DIRECTION TO USE -
1. (b) 2. (c) 3. (b) 4. (b) 1. (c) 2. (b) 3. (a) 4. (c)
5. (b) 6. (c) 7. (c) 8. (a) 5. (d)
9. (a) 10. (b) 11. (b) 12. (c) 6. (a) No ; (c) 8 (bridge balanced)
13. (d) 14. (d) 15. (a) 16. (a) 7. (a) 8. (a) 9. (d) 10. (a)
17. (c) 18. (c) 19. (a) 20. (a) 11. (a) 12. (d) 13. (c) 14. (a)
21. (d) 22. (c) 23. (c) 24. (b) 15. (a) 16. (c) 17. (a, d) 18. (c)
25. (c) 26. (c) 27. (a) 28. (d) 19. (a) 20. (c) 21. (4) 22. (5)
29. (a) 30. (d) 31. (b) 32. (c) 23. (b)
33. (d) 34. (c) 35. (a) 36. (b) 24. (a, b, c, d) 25. (c)
37. (b) 38. (c) 39. (b) 40. (c) 26. (a, b, d) 27. (5)
41. (b) 42. (c) 43. (c) 44. (d) 28. (1 A) 29. (b)
45. (a) 46. (a) 47. (b) 48. (d) 30. (b, c) 31. (b)
49. (c) 50. (a) 51. (b, c) 32. (a) 33. (5.55)
52. (a, b, c) 34. (b, c) 35. (b, d)
53. (b, c, d) 54. (4) 55. (1) 36. (a, c, d) 37. (0.26 to 0.27)
56. (6) 38. (0.67) 39. (1.33)
57. (1) 58. (48) 59. (2)
60. (5)
61. (2 V, 1 A, 0, – 1A ; (ii) 1 A, 2 A, – 1A, 2 A)
62. (R/2) 63. (0.9 A) 64. (0.198 A)
V1r2  V2 r1 rr
65. ( V  , r 12 )
r1  r2 r1  r2
66. (4.96 mA, 1.58 V)
2 21 19
67. ( V ; (ii) V, V)
13 13 13
68. (*)
69. (*) 70. (*) 71. (*) 72. (*)
73. (*) 74. (*) 75. (*) 76. (*)
77. (*) 78. (*) 79. (*)
80. (a–q, r; b–q, r, s; c – p; d – q, r, s)
81. (a–s; b – t; c – p; d – r)
82. (a – p, q, r; b – p, q; c – s; d – s)
83. (a–q; b–r; c–s; d–s)
MASTER INDEX .
VOLUME 1:
Electrostatics
Capacitance
Current Electricity
VOLUME 2:
Magnetic Effect of Current
Magnetism and Matter
Electromagnetic Induction
Alternating Current & Electromagnetic Waves
VOLUME 3:
Ray Optics and Optical Instruments
Wave Optics
VOLUME 4:
Modern Physics
Semiconductors and Communication system
Creating Impact at Scale
65 Million+
Monthly
Youtube Views
49 Million+ 40+ Countries

Monthly Where Students
Web + App Visitors Take Live Classes
25 Million+ 26 Million+
Monthly Active Hours of
Users Live Learning
25 43
Parents
Happy
Trust
Students
Vedantu
MILLION+ MILLION+
Our Achievers of 2021
JEE Advanced 2021
Prerak Kevin Abhinav Vedantu students ace

JEE ADV. AIR 35 JEE ADV. AIR 78 JEE ADV. AIR 156 JEE Advanced 2021
JEE MAIN AIR 243 JEE MAIN AIR 533 JEE MAIN AIR 512
Ankit Shrey
6% of IITs’ upcoming batch
will be from Vedantu
JEE ADV. AIR 172 JEE ADV. AIR 174

JEE MAIN AIR 252 JEE MAIN AIR 238
JEE Main 2021
903 students in
Top 10,000
Vaibhav Bajaj Hrishit B P Sunrit Roy K
AIR 35 AIR 113 AIR 139
78 869
students scored students scored
99.9+ PERCENTILE 99.9+ PERCENTILE
68 444
students in students in
Top AIR 1000 Top AIR 5000 Kushagra Ganesh C Iyer
Sharma
AIR 158 AIR 179
NEET (UG) 2021
AIR 23
Pavit
Online Long Term Course
Score 710 AIR 92

Anirudh
Online Crash Course
Score 705
Shivank
Online Crash Course
AIR 143 Score 700

1172 NEET
Qualifiers
CBSE Class 12 ISC Class 12 CBSE Class 10
Annmary
Aatman Upreti Shreya Roshan Aastha N Raj Gitanjali Rajulal Shreya Nigam Khushi Arora Anshika Singha
Santhosh
98.4% 98.4% 98.0% 99.8% 98.4% 99.8% 99.6% 99.4%
ICSE Class 10
M.D.Sriya Varshil J Patel Mohammad Y Devika Sajeev Sakshi Semwal Aloki Upadhyay Ishita Surana Saumya Gupta
99.4% 97.4% 97.2% 97.2% 97.2% 99.4% 99.2% 99.2%
#HereForRealAchievers

Academic Progress Tracking for Every Student with Vedantu's Improvement Promise

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Academic Progress Tracking for Every Student with Vedantu's Improvement Promise

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Academic Progress for every Student

Regular tests &

Our Extraordinary Results 2021

All India HIGHER

37.28% 37.28% 8.25%

CBSE 10 CBSE 12 JEE

We strongly believe in you and your capabilities. So believe in yourself

Typesetting Team Graphic Designers

Solved examples ............................................................................................................................... 38

Exercise - 1 : Basic Objective Questions............................................................................................ 50

Exercise - 2 : Previous Years JEE MAIN Questions ........................................................................... 58

Exercise - 3 : Advanced Objective Questions .................................................................................. 69

Exercise - 4 : Previous Years JEE Advanced Questions ..................................................................... 76

Answer Key ........................................................................................................................................ 202

Solved examples ............................................................................................................................... 102

Exercise - 1 : Basic Objective Questions............................................................................................ 106

Exercise - 2 : Previous Years JEE MAIN Questions ........................................................................... 113

Exercise - 3 : Advanced Objective Questions .................................................................................. 119

Exercise - 4 : Previous Years JEE Advanced Questions ..................................................................... 125

Answer Key ........................................................................................................................................ 205

Theory ................................................................................................................................................ 128

Solved examples ............................................................................................................................... 156

Exercise - 1 : Basic Objective Questions............................................................................................ 166

Exercise - 2 : Previous Years JEE MAIN Questions ........................................................................... 174

Exercise - 3 : Advanced Objective Questions .................................................................................. 187

Exercise - 4 : Previous Years JEE Advanced Questions ..................................................................... 195

Answer Key ........................................................................................................................................ 207

1.2 Type (vi) Invariance of charge: The numerical value of an

particle is in non accelerated motion it produces both

Dimensional formula [Q] = [AT]. electromagnetic waves.

positive, negative or body to the other.

3. Charge is quantized. The quantization of mass is

4. Electric charge is Mass is not conserved as

5. Force between charges The gravitational force

1.7 Methods of Charging (iii) Charging by conduction: Charging by conduction

glass rod is rubbed with silk, the rod becomes positively

NOTE: (1) Uncharged electroscope

Inducting body neither gains nor loses charge.

A truck carrying explosives has a metal chain touching

(2) Charged electroscope

Fig 1.3 Fig 1.5

2.1.1 Effect of Units Metal 

1 N  m2 1 Q1Q2 F12 = force on 1 due to 2 F21 = force on 2 due to 1

12 C2 Farad  Similarly, electric force on q2 due to charge q1 is

2.1.2 Effect of Medium

Hence in the presence of medium

Fig 1.9 Fig 1.10

A positive charge or a negative charge is said to create its

3.5 Continuous Charge Distributions

(sigma)  = Charge per unit area C/m2

Fig 1.14 (rho)  = Charge per unit volume C/m3

3.3 Superposition of Electric Field

E  E12  E22  2E1E2 cos  and the direction is given by

3.5.1 Electric Field Strength at a General Point Due kQ 1 kQ

calculated by integrating dEcos within limits from

4. ELECTRIC FLUX 4.2 Unit and Dimension

5.2 Gaussian Surface

(Assuming Electric Field is uniform over whole area) NOTE:

5.3 Deriving Gauss’s Law from Coulomb’s Law

6. APPLICATIONS OF GAUSS’S LAW

  Q 6.1 Electric Field due to a Line Charge

5.4 Coulomb’s Law From Gauss’s Law

The appropriate choice of Gaussian surface is a cylinder of 